JP7269495B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pinball game machine in which an effect is executed while a game is in progress.

Conventionally, among various pinball game machines, a game machine called a so-called first-class pachinko game machine has a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided approximately in the center of the game board. display (hereinafter, such display is referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display"). This game machine shifts to a special game called a jackpot in which more prize balls than in a normal game can be obtained when a combination of symbols becomes a specific mode when the variation of symbols in a plurality of rows is stopped. known as a thing. In the variable display of symbols in the display area, not only are multiple symbols variably displayed, but the variable display time is usually set in a state called a so-called reach screen, in which if one more symbol is aligned, a big hit will occur. The performance is intended to increase the player's sense of expectation, such as making it longer. In addition, the player's expectations are heightened by effects that use characters in images such as patterns to give a story to the variable display, and advance notice effects that suggest the high degree of expectation for transition to special games. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714

A large number of conventional gaming machines employing the above-described configuration already exist. In order to differentiate from conventional models, further improvement in game playability is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of further improving game playability.

A pinball game machine according to one aspect of the present invention includes a game board in which a game area is formed, a start opening provided in the game area, and a winning decision based on a lottery value obtained when a ball enters the start opening. a special pattern display device that displays the special symbols in a variable manner and shows the result of the success/failure determination by stop-displaying the special symbols; is stop-displayed, a special game control means for executing a special game more advantageous to the player than the normal game after the stop-display, and a performance display device capable of displaying the performance. In one pattern fluctuation from the start of the special pattern fluctuation to the stop display, the decorative patterns that are variably displayed on the effect display device are temporarily stopped and then changed again to simulate a plurality of pattern fluctuations. It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous variation production that looks as if it were a stunt, and in the pseudo-continuous variation production, a special production can be started when the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode. includes an effect process suggesting whether or not changes again to continue the pseudo-continuous change effect. As the pseudo-continuous variation performance, there are a first pseudo-continuous variation performance in which a special performance is executed and a second pseudo-continuous variation performance in which no special performance is executed, and in the first pseudo-continuous variation performance, a decorative pattern is displayed before the start of the special performance. The time value from when is in the ready-to-win mode until the decorative design is temporarily stopped after the start of the special effect is the time value from when the decorative design changes again in the second pseudo-continuous variation effect to when the decorative design is next temporarily stopped. longer than the time value of one pseudo fluctuation period.

In addition, any combination of the above constituent elements, and those in which the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are replaced with each other between methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. , is effective as an aspect of the present invention.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving further improvement in game playability.

It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing a functional block of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main substrate; FIG. It is a figure which shows typically a right/wrong determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing range setting of winning/failing lottery values for each set value; It is a figure which shows a pattern determination table typically. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern table typically. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination; It is a figure which shows typically the preliminary right/wrong determination table corresponding to game setting. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board; FIG. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a figure which shows typically the outline of a mobile cooperation system. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of a main board and sub-boards; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the main board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the main process of S120 in FIG. 15; FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the control start processing of the sub-board in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing in detail the main process of S518 in FIG. 20; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board; It is a flow chart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a special design variation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a decorative design variation display. It is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. It is a flowchart which shows the process of a small-hit game. 1 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the outer surface of a slot machine; FIG. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the housing door exposed when the housing door is opened; FIG. 4 is a front view showing the internal configuration of the housing base exposed when the housing door is opened; It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. It is a functional block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flow chart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the hardware constitutions of a main control unit and a sub control unit. 4 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of an effect display control section; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main program control processing of the main controller in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control unit. It is a figure which shows typically the flow of fluctuation|variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation pattern of prior suggestion production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the first half of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering pattern 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the second half of the production process of prior suggestion production pattern 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the second half of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering pattern 2; FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of a prior suggestion production pattern 3; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing part of the rendering process of a prior suggestive rendering pattern 4; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing part of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering pattern 5. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of a prior suggestion production pattern 6; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing part of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering pattern 7. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing part of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering pattern 9. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of prior-suggestion production patterns 10 and 11; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of a prior suggestion production pattern 12; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of a prior suggestion production pattern 15; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of a prior suggestion production pattern 19; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a rendering process of a prior suggestive rendering pattern 20. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the first half of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering over multiple variations; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the second half of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering over multiple variations; FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a production process in which a specific production does not occur after the end of the prior suggestive production. It is a figure which shows the expectation level of the battle ready-to-reach production of normal route and special route. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a production|presentation selection screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation process when button production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation process of a button stimulation production|presentation and a button production|presentation. It is a figure which shows typically the production|presentation process which the decorative design comes off after execution of a special production|presentation, and is fixed and stops. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation of the production|presentation process by which time adjustment is made by special production|presentation. It is a figure which shows typically the production|presentation process which the decorative design becomes a hit and the determination stop is carried out after execution of a special production|presentation. It is a figure which shows typically the production|presentation process which a decorative design changes again after execution of special production|presentation. It is a figure which shows typically the production|presentation process of step-up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows typically the production|presentation process of special step-up production|presentation. It is a figure which shows typically the production|presentation process of pseudo-continuous-variation production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a game flow typically. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation process of a special pseudo-continuous zone. It is a table showing an example of a symbol combination when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. It is a figure which shows an example of the design combination at the time of the determination stop of the decorative design. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing effect patterns that can be executed in a special pseudo-continuous zone; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation pattern by which 12 times of pseudo-fluctuations are performed. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation pattern by which pseudo-variation is performed 18 times. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo-fluctuation scenario; It is a figure which shows an example of a design change pattern and a band color change pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a design change pattern and a band color change pattern. It is a table which shows an example of the design combination of a premium pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a design change pattern and a band color change pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a design change pattern and a band color change pattern. An example of a combination of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern is shown.

(Prerequisite technology)
In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, a plurality of games corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko game machine are mixed. The second game is preferentially executed so that the first game and the second game as the plurality of games are not executed at the same time. Moreover, in order to make these game characteristics compatible, it is equipped with a plurality of starting prize winning openings, a plurality of special symbol display devices, and a plurality of holding lamps. It is designed so that the number of jackpot balls released in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. For example, the second game has a higher probability of becoming a big hit with variable probability, and the second game has a larger number of unit games that make up the special game when the second game hits (the opening time of the big winning port is A long long opening unit game and a short opening unit game having a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game is longer than the first game. ), the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game. On top of that, at first, the first game is aimed at the first hit, and after the big hit in the first game is given to shorten the working time, the second game is repeatedly aimed at to obtain a lot of balls. come true.

FIG. 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a production button 109, a cross key 110, A decorative lamp 111 is included. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 to a position to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body aligned with the opening of the outer frame 101, and is attached to the outer frame 101 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door 104 . The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray 106, and the like. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and sound effects and music sounds are output according to the game state and the performance by means of controlling the performance. Most of the resin member forming the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and the decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the translucent interior. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game state, the effect, etc. by a means for controlling the effect, and plays a role of the effect by blinking or the like.

The game board 80 has a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, and a general winning port 33 on a game area 81 partitioned by rails 82. , an outlet 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided so as to form a screen frame of the effect display device 60 over the substantially central part of the game area 81 and its upper and right parts. 60 protection, decoration and other functions. A stage 65 is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64 on which the game ball that has flowed in rolls. It is distributed to the side direction that does not enter the ball. Above the center decoration 64, a movable accessory 66 is provided which is driven along with the content of the performance to perform a performance action. In the game area 81, mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) for forming a flow path for game balls are installed. In this specification, "entering the ball", "winning", and "falling" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning hole and each ball entrance may be configured as a "passing hole" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass. ', 'winning', 'falling in' and 'passing' may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting port 11 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first game, and the second starting port 12 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second game. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 are configured so that it is possible to aim for entry into one of the game balls according to the player's intention. The first starting port 11 is provided substantially at the lower center of the game area 81 , and the second starting port 12 is provided directly below the first starting port 11 . Left-handed, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly aiming to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the first start hole 11 and the second start hole 12, while right-handed. That is, if the ball is hit relatively strongly aiming to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64, it is possible or easy to enter the second starting hole 12, but it is impossible to enter the first starting hole 11. Alternatively, a flow path is formed by arranging the game nails so as to make it difficult to enter the ball. However, since the upper part of the opening of the second starting port 12 is usually covered with the first starting port 11 and the inflow of the game ball is hindered, unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting port 12 is opened, the second starting port 12 is impossible or difficult to enter. The winning lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, and is executed each time a ball enters the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. be.

In addition, the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be provided at positions separated from each other to such an extent that it is possible to target one of them depending on the launch strength of the game ball. The first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 may be arranged separately on the left side and the right side of the game area 81, respectively, so that a game ball aimed at one side is difficult to enter the other side. For example, the first starting port 11 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when the ball is hit left-handed, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly so as to flow into the left passage of the center decoration 64 . The second starting hole 12 is provided at a position where it is possible or easy to enter the ball when hitting the ball to the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly so as to flow into the right passage of the center decoration 64 .

The first starting port 11 is provided with a first starting winning detection device 16 . The first start winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start opening 11, and generates first start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. The second starting port 12 includes a second starting prize detection device 17, a normal electric accessory 90 (so-called electric tulip) that is an expansion mechanism, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 90. Prepare. The second start winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start opening 12, and generates second start winning information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry.

The first operation opening 31 is provided at a left side position of the game area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36 . The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operation opening 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when it passes. The second operation opening 32 is provided at the right side position of the game area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37 . The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operation opening 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage at the time of passage. Passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery for determining whether or not to spread the normal electric accessory 90 . When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol, which is the symbol indicating the determination result of the open lottery, is variably displayed on the normal symbol display portion 45. - 特許庁Therefore, the open lottery is also called "normal symbol lottery". After a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display of normal symbols stops. When the normal symbol stops at a winning symbol, the normal electric accessory 90 is expanded by the driving force of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91, and the possibility of the ball entering the second starting port 12 increases. As a modified example, the number of operating ports may be set to one, and the configuration may be such that one is provided at the left side position of the game area 81 .

The three general winning openings 33 are each equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of game balls. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the game ball at the time of entry.

The large winning opening 20 includes a large winning opening detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a large winning opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large winning opening 20 . The big winning detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 20, and generates big winning hole winning information indicating the ball entering when the ball enters. The big winning opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular winning opening that opens as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The big winning opening 20 is provided at the upper right position of the out opening 34 . In addition, as a modified example, one more large winning opening may be provided in the central lower portion of the game area 81 or above or below the large winning opening 20, and a plurality of large winning openings may be provided. The out port 34 is a discharge port from which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are discharged, and includes an out detection device 39 . The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects a game ball discharged through the out port 34, and generates discharge information indicating the detection at the time of detection. The out port 34 is provided at the central lowermost end of the game area 81 so that all game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports can be guided and passed through. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be arranged side by side while ensuring a game ball passage with a sufficient width to prevent the out port 34 from being clogged with balls.

A pattern display unit 120 is arranged outside and below the game area 81 on the game board 80 . The symbol display unit 120 includes a first special symbol display portion 41, a second special symbol display portion 42, a first special symbol reservation display portion 71, a second special symbol reservation display portion 72, a normal symbol display portion 45, and a normal symbol display portion. Display units such as a holding display unit 75, a game state display unit 76, an abnormality notification unit 77, and the like are provided. Specifically, a first special symbol display portion 41 corresponding to the first game and a second special symbol display portion 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the first special symbol Variations of 51 and second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the determination result of the second success or failure lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 12, and when stopped in a predetermined hit mode, the special game. As a big hit occurs. The first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are, for example, an 8-segment LED consisting of 8 segments, 7 segments forming a "figure 8" and 1 segment representing a "dot". is a display device. An 8-segment LED can express a numerical value of 8 bits by combining 8 segments. The first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 represented by a combination of segments do not necessarily form letters or numbers, and may be generally meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments. . These symbols are replaced one after another at high speed and displayed on the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42, or predetermined display (eg "-") and non-display (eg all lights off) are switched. By displaying the symbol corresponding to the determination result after repeating for a predetermined time, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is realized. It should be noted that the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol display portion 42 use an LED dot array that is not an 8-segment LED, and a plurality of kinds of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol display portion 42 are combined with the lighting pattern and the lighting color. A special pattern 52 may be expressed.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have a role of production, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol display portion 41 and the second special symbol on the lower left side of the game area 81 are displayed. It is displayed in an inconspicuous size on the display part 42.例文帳に追加However, when adopting a method of expressing without using a decorative pattern by giving the special pattern itself a dramatic role, the special pattern is displayed on another display device such as a liquid crystal display instead of the 8-segment LED. It may be configured to allow

Above the first special symbol display part 41, a first special symbol reservation display part 71 is provided as a suspension lamp for special symbol variation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display part 42, a second special symbol display part 71 is provided. A second special symbol reservation display portion 72 is provided as a special symbol variation reservation lamp corresponding to the game of . The first special figure reservation display unit 71 consists of two lamps, and the number of pending lottery values in the first game depending on the number of lights or blinking numbers (hereinafter, the number of pending lottery values) (also simply referred to as "holding number"). The number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation display unit 71 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the first start port 11 during the variation of the first special symbol 51 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The second special figure reservation display unit 72 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of reservations in the second game according to the number of lights or the number of blinks. The number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation display unit 72 is the number of times (the number) of obtaining the lottery value based on winning the second start port 12 during the variation of the second special symbol 52 or during the execution of the special game. Yes, indicating the number of winning balls for which symbol variation has not yet been executed. The pending number of win/fail lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 60 in the form of the number of lit pending lamp images.

A normal symbol display portion 45 is provided on the right side of the symbol display unit 120 . For the sake of convenience, the normal symbol display portion 45 is composed of two lamps, and the normal symbol display state is represented by a lighting combination thereof. First, by flashing the first lamp and the second lamp at the same time, the variation of the normal pattern is expressed, and finally, the combination of the lighting state of the first lamp and the second lamp is the stop pattern of the normal pattern. is expressed. For example, turning on the first lamp and turning off the second lamp expresses the stop pattern of losing, turning off the first lamp and turning on the second lamp expresses the first winning mode, and the first A second winning mode is expressed by lighting both the lamp and the second lamp.

In addition, on the right side of the normal symbol display portion 45, a normal pattern suspension display portion 75 is provided as a suspension lamp for normal symbol variation. The normal pattern reservation display unit 75 also consists of two lamps, and displays the number of normal pattern fluctuations reserved by the number of lights or the number of flashes. The number of pending normal symbol fluctuations is the number of game balls that have passed through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 during normal symbol fluctuations, and the number of normal symbol lotteries in which normal symbol fluctuations have not yet been executed. indicates

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77 . The game state display unit 76 is a display unit that displays a game state such as a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, each game state is notified by lighting a lamp when the probability is fluctuating, blinking when the ball is easy to enter, and extinguishing when the normal state. to display the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies an abnormality of a part of the game machine, and is composed of, for example, a plurality of lamps, and notifies the abnormality with a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of abnormality. It should be noted that these display units may be configured individually without being collectively arranged in the pattern display unit 120, or they may be divided into a plurality of display devices grouped as appropriate. Further, the notification of the game state such as the specific game state may be configured so as to be limited to a predetermined period of time, for example, a certain period of time after the power is restored.

Approximately in the center of the game area 81, an effect display device 60 is provided so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center decoration 64, and the decorative pattern 61 interlocking with the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 is displayed. Display the variation of the effect image including. Such display is hereinafter referred to as "symbol variation" or "variation display".

The effect display device 60 is a display device composed of a liquid crystal display that variably displays the decorative pattern 61 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 . The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually directing the determination result display of the lottery indicated by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 . The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative pattern 61, a moving image in which a plurality of rows of patterns imitating a slot machine game, for example, are varied in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, symbols composed of numerals "0" to "9" are displayed in three rows and varied, and finally the combinations of the three symbols that are stopped and displayed indicate hits or misses. Each of the plurality of patterns constituting the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns. It may be configured in such a manner that a different pattern is added to each and integrated. The pattern is a pattern depicting a motif related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a person or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 is switched between a case where a pattern integrally included in the pattern is variably displayed and a case where the pattern is separated and only numbers, letters and symbols are variably displayed according to the development of the performance. The configuration may be such that In the background of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a performance effect related to the decoration or performance theme set for the model of the pachinko game machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern variation.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot-matrix display device. There may be. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a passage width that allows one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the game ball with maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed hit", the right side passage is almost certain. A game ball can be passed through, and it is possible to distinguish between so-called "left-handed" and "left-handed". The effect display device 60 may be configured not only by a single display device but also by a combination of a plurality of display devices. In the case of multiple displays, displays of different sizes, such as a combination of a main liquid crystal and a sub-liquid crystal, may be combined. (upper ball plate, right decorative lamp, etc.). If installed near the firing handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The effect display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured by a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured by mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type, or display means such as an LED matrix type. .

The effect button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine according to the content of the effect. A performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102 . The production button 109 is normally stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the production button 109, and the rod-shaped member and the production button 109 are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface. It is provided so that it can be protruded. The rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a performance lever 112 in a state of protruding outside, and the player can grip the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a predetermined instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is operation input means for the player to input a direction instruction to the gaming machine, and is provided on the left outer wall surface of the upper ball tray 105 .

The game method and control flow performed in the gaming machine having the above configuration will be outlined. When the player rotates the shooting handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided by the rail 82 one by one and shot to the game area 81 with the intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. . When the player manually fixes the rotating position of the shooting handle 107, the shooting of game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game ball shot to the upper part of the game area 81 hits a plurality of game nails, a windmill, a center ornament 64, etc., and falls in a direction according to how it hits. When the game ball falls into each of the winning openings of the general winning opening 33, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the big winning opening 20, the prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening enter the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray. It is dispensed onto the ball tray 106 . A game ball falling into each winning hole such as a general winning hole 33 is treated as a safe ball, and a game ball falling into an out hole 34 is treated as an out ball. The ejection of safe balls may be excluded from detection by the out detection device 39, or the specification may be such that the safe balls are guided to the area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all of the ejections are detected by the out detection device 39. may be Alternatively, guidance of safe balls and detection of safe balls by the out detection device 39 may not be performed, and the number of discharged balls may be determined by adding the number of detected safe balls to the number of detected out balls.

Further, when the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display part 45, and is stop-displayed after the lapse of the variability display time determined prior to the display. When the normal symbols are stop-displayed in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded based on the winning mode of the stopped-displayed symbols and the game state when they are stopped. . That is, when the game state when the symbols are stopped is the normal game state and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode, the normal electric accessory 90 is opened for a short period of 0.1 seconds. Further, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in the first winning mode during the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state), the normal symbols are displayed in the second winning mode during the normal time and the specific game state (for example, the easy-to-enter state). When the stop display is performed, a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric accessory 90 . Here, the winning probability of normal symbols and the execution probability of long opening are set differently depending on the game state. Specifically, in the open lottery in the normal state, the normal pattern wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening in that case (the probability that the winning pattern of the first winning mode is selected) is 1/100. 3. The execution probability of long opening (the probability of selecting the winning pattern of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. In addition, in the open lottery in the specific game state (for example, easy ball entry state), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability between the first win mode and the second win mode is the same as in the normal game state. However, it is set so that the long opening is executed even if the lottery is won in any mode. In this way, in the easy-to-enter state, the function of changing the hit probability of the normal pattern (probability change from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (0 when the opening time is displayed stopped in the first winning mode) 0.1 second to 6.0 seconds), the ease of entering the second starting port 12 is enhanced. In addition, the function (long opening) of extending the operation period of the normal electric accessory 90 may be called "open extension".

In addition, as described above, the probability of long opening in the normal state is higher than the probability of short opening, so that the long opening is executed at a certain rate even in the normal state when winning the normal pattern. . As a modification, on the contrary, in the normal state, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening. good. Further, in the ball-entering easy state, it is possible to increase the ease of ball-entering the second starting port 12 by using three functions including a function of shortening the variation time of normal symbols. In that case, the normal pattern variation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the winning probability of the open lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the specification may be such that the normal electric accessory 90 can be expanded only when the open lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Further, when the normal electric accessories 90 are expanded, it may be notified in advance to that effect, or may be notified before the start of the normal pattern variation by reading in advance the suspension of the normal symbol variation, or the normal symbol variation may be notified. Notification may be made during the change.

As a modification of the opening mode when the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time is extended to about 6 seconds by repeating the 2-second opening, which is longer than the short opening, three times. It is good also as an aspect. Alternatively, a plurality of combinations of the open time and the number of times of opening may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, in the case of three 2-second openings, the total opening time is the same as in the case of one 6-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, especially in the configuration of the modification in which the second starting port 12 is arranged in the right-handed direction, the former is the one who enters the ball assuming that the player who notices the opening matches the hitting direction with the second starting port 12 from that point. The chances are long. In addition, it is possible to configure such that there are a plurality of winning types of normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism differs according to the winning types. For example, when the normal pattern is the first hit, the normal state is 0.1 seconds open once, and the easy ball entry state is 1 second open three times, and when the second hit is the normal state. In this case, the ball may be opened once for 6 seconds, and in the easy-to-ball state, the open for 2 seconds may be opened twice.

On the other hand, when the ball is entered into the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in the first special symbol display section 41, the second special symbol display section 42 and the effect display device 60. , and the decorative pattern 61 are variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the lapse of the variable display time determined prior to display. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to a variation pattern in which the variation mode from the start to stop of variation is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed according to a variability performance pattern in which a variability mode from the start to stop of the variability is determined. Plural kinds of variation patterns and variation performance patterns are prepared respectively, and each of them has various lengths of variation time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are variably displayed according to the variation pattern, the decorative design 61 is variably displayed according to the variation performance pattern having the same variation time. In the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation display time is set for each pattern as a condition for ending the pattern fluctuation, and when the fluctuation display time elapses, the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 change. be stopped. Hereinafter, the variable display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variable effect pattern will be exemplified, and the variable effect pattern will be briefly described. In addition, details such as a method of determining the variation pattern and the variation effect pattern will be described separately.

As an example of the variable display of the decorative pattern 61, first, the symbols in all three rows are changed like the rotation of the reels of a slot machine at the start of the variation, and when the variation end timing is approached, the symbols are stopped row by row, thereby finally stopping. Display the symbol combination as. Incidentally, as an operation when the variation of the decorative symbols 190 is stopped, it is possible to control not to stop one row at a time but to stop a plurality of rows at the same time so as to attract the attention of the performance display other than the decorative symbols during the variable display, or in a shorter variation time. You may enable it to display a design variation. In addition, as an operation at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 190, control is performed so as to delay the start of variation of a part of the rows according to the subsequent development of the variation (type of production pattern, etc.), so as to produce a sense of expectation. can be

Next, the variation effect pattern will be briefly described. The variable performance pattern includes a normal out of reach performance pattern, a reach out performance pattern, and a reach big hit performance pattern. The normal outlier effect pattern is a effect pattern when displaying a normal outlier pattern combination. The out-of-reach performance pattern is a performance pattern when a combination of out-of-reach symbols is displayed through a ready-to-win state in which a big win is achieved if one more symbol is aligned. The ready-to-win big-hit production pattern is a production pattern when a big-hit symbol combination is displayed through the ready-to-win state. In particular, the reach state pattern includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. A reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called "super reach". ”. The usual out-of-ordinary performance pattern, the out-of-reach performance pattern, and the ready-to-win big hit performance pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second pattern variation corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12, the probability that the big hit will change and the number of unit games of the special game will increase. Since it can be said that the chance state is higher than the first variation corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, a pattern for chance presentation may be used to indicate that there is a chance for a relatively advantageous big win to occur. In addition, although the pattern for time saving is used in a time saving state in an Example, since it accompanies time saving in a probability variable state, the time saving pattern is used also in a probability variable state. However, in the modified example, it may be a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation that is different from that for time saving in the probability variation state. Alternatively, it may be a specification that uses a common pattern for time saving and probability variation, or a specification that uses a pattern for probability variation in a probability variation state without using a pattern for time saving.

When the number of winning lotteries held reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the symbol variation time in the case of losing is shortened (hereinafter also referred to as "shortened variation") in order to improve the game efficiency. Similarly, when the number of pending lotteries is 4, the pattern variation time in the case of losing is further shortened than the case of the above 3 in order to further improve the game efficiency (hereinafter also referred to as "super shortened variation"). ). When the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping become a stop mode indicating a big win after the above-described symbol fluctuation, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a special game, and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is started. The mode of stopping the decorative symbols 61 indicating a big hit is, for example, a mode of combination in which the types of three symbols match.

There are two types of special games, a normal special game and a shortened special game, and there is a big difference in the profit from winning prize balls. A normal special game is started by displaying an effect screen called start demo time. After the start demonstration time is displayed on the screen, the big winning hole 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds, or after 9 or more game balls fall, it is temporarily closed. The operation from opening to closing of such a large prize winning opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be cases where multiple short-time openings are repeated during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the big winning opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, 4 times or 10 times, the normal special game is ended by displaying an effect screen called end demo time. In normal special games, 9 or more balls can be sufficiently expected to be entered per unit game, and sufficient prize balls (also referred to as ``discharged balls'') can be obtained through 10 unit games, resulting in a large profit. is obtained. A special game in which the unit game is repeated 10 times is arbitrarily called a "10R big hit", and a special game in which the unit game is repeated 4 times is arbitrarily called a "4R big hit". In addition, although the unit game is repeated 10 times, the unit game is substantially repeated a few times by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games. It is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as "substantial nR jackpot") similar to the one.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are short or almost short (eg, 0.1 seconds), and the big winning opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice and the shortened special game is ended. In the shortened special game, since the opening of the big winning hole 20 is repeated only twice for a very short period of time, almost no ball can enter the big winning hole 20, and the number of balls that come out is substantially zero or few (for example, a few It is a special game equal to the number of payouts corresponding to 1 to 2 balls in one round, such as about 10 balls to about 10 balls. A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also called a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the number of unit games is the same as that of the normal special game, a shortened special game can be realized by opening the big winning opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

Further, through the above-described pattern variation, when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 and the decorative pattern 61 at the time of stop are in a predetermined small winning mode, a small winning game composed of one unit game , and the opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small winning game, the big winning opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is similar to that of the 2R big winning.

When a special game occurs and the hit stop pattern at that time is in a specific mode (for example, "777"), a probability variation, which is one of the specific games, is further started after the special game is finished. During the probability variation, a lottery with a higher probability of winning than the normal probability state is performed, and a new special game can occur relatively early. It should be noted that the fact that the determination result of the win/fail lottery is a specific jackpot, that is, a jackpot with a probability change may not be clearly indicated on the outside, and may be in a latent probability change state in which it is not explicitly reported as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, the effect display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the probability is variable or non-variable even during the variable probability. It should be noted that, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect display device 60 may indicate whether it is a probability variation or a non-probability variation.

An easy ball entry state, which is one of the specific game states, is started in the normal game after the special game ends. In the ball-entering easy state, the winning probability of the open lottery is increased more than usual, and the opening extension is executed to extend the opening time of the normal electric accessory 90. - 特許庁Since the number of hits of normal symbols per fixed period of time can be increased and the ease with which a ball enters the second starting port 12 also increases, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 12 will also increase. Therefore, as a result of increasing the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting port 12, it is possible to continue playing while hardly reducing the number of balls in possession or gradually increasing the number of balls in possession.

In the easy-to-enter state, as one of the specific game states, so-called time saving is further executed in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is shortened compared to the normal state. The fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is returned to the original fluctuation time after the fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times, for example, 100 times, but the fluctuation number is reached. If a big hit occurs before, the time saving will end once. Since the fluctuation time of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is shortened in the reduction of working hours, compared with the case of the normal state in which the pattern is changed with the normal fluctuation time, it is possible to wait until the big hit occurs. time can be shortened, and the easiness of obtaining a big win can be relatively increased. In a modified example, it may be a specification that does not implement the time saving of the special symbol in the easy-to-enter state.

FIG. 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch for turning on/off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and processes overall game operations such as a lottery when winning the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 in particular. The sub-board 300 includes a liquid crystal unit 151 and controls display contents in the effect display device 60 , and particularly changes the effect display contents according to the determination result by the main board 200 . The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 for paying out prize balls, and the like. The payout device 154 pays out the game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 according to the winning to each prize winning opening. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154 . The shooting device 156 shoots the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 to the game area 81 one by one. A firing control board 157 controls the firing operation of the launcher 156 . The power board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 . A performance display section 159 is provided on the substrate of the main substrate 200 . The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number indicating the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the board of the main board 200 . The setting change device 170 is a device for changing settings to one of a plurality of settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six levels of settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of winning a big hit can be varied according to the game settings. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among the settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications can be for the player. The jackpot probability of each setting can be determined so that ≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not essential to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a plurality of game settings, and a set value. It includes a setting display portion 173 that lights up and a setting memory that stores set values. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey switch for shifting to a state in which settings can be changed (hereinafter referred to as "setting change state") and a state in which settings can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, and the setting key is turned to turn it on. In order to shift to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to shift to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the number “1” indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting display unit 173 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172 . The setting display section 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a one-digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are changed in order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . . . When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to the OFF state after changing the setting, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, and the setting change is confirmed. , it becomes a playable state. On the other hand, when shifting to the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display portion 173 . In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display section 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state to turn it off, the game becomes ready for play. When the setting key is turned off to enable a game, the setting display section 173 is turned off and the current setting value cannot be visually recognized.

Note that the setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key OFF state), the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, if the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key ON state), the RAM is cleared and the setting change state is entered. If the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is off, the power is restored without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. Further, the setting display section 173 may also be used as the performance display section 159 . In this case, the combined display section may function as the performance display section 159 in the playable state, and may function as the setting display section 173 in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the change of game settings may be disabled.

<Functional block>
FIG. 3 shows functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the functions realized by using each configuration will be described. For the part already described as , the term may be used as it is for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 includes a power board 158 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control device that controls the basic operation of the game and the progress of the game. , a payout control board 155 as a frame control device for controlling the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 for controlling the launch of game balls to the game area, and controls the performance operations and processes. It is configured in a form in which the function is shared with the sub-board 300 as a sub-controller.

The main board 200 includes a first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, a big winning port 20, a first operating port 31, a second operating port 32, a group of general winning ports (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port It is electrically connected to the port 33b), the output port 34, the pattern display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200 , the firing control board 157 and the payout device 154 . The payout control board 155 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the control state of the prize ball payout and the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200, and indirectly controls the launch control board 157. , and controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. Dispensing device 154 includes dispensing motor 166 and ball counting sensor 167 . The firing control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launching device 156, and the ball feeding device 164, and controls the ball feeding device 164 and the ball feeding device 164 based on a firing permission signal or the like transmitted from the payout control board 155. A device 156 is controlled to shoot a game ball. The sub-board 300 includes the effect display device 60, the movable accessories 66 (the drive motor 67, the position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the effect input operation device 115 (the effect button 109, the cross key 110), the decorative lamp 111 and the electrical and transmit and receive various control signals to and from each other.

The main board 200 and the sub-board 300 are configured so that data transmission/reception between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300. It is arranged on the sub-board 300 . Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main substrate 200 to the sub substrate 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the sub substrate 300 to the configuration included in the main substrate 200. I can't even ask. Therefore, the sub board 300 cannot refer to the information generated by the main board 200 unless the information is transmitted. Further, between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155 , and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157 , data transmission/reception is performed bidirectionally. However, as in the case between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data can be sent and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the firing control board 157. A configuration for data transmission/reception may be employed.

Each functional block included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the firing control board 157, and the sub-board 300, which will be described below, is merely an example. may be installed. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the firing control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. good. Also, for example, a part of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining part may be mounted on the payout control board 155. may be divided and provided on a plurality of substrates so that one functional block is configured as a whole.

<Main board 200>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main substrate 200. As shown in FIG. The main board 200 includes an entering ball determination means 201, a performance display section 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a normal figure lottery means 213, a reservation control means 240, a main Display control means 250, special game control means 260, small winning game control means 265, specific game control means 270, opening and closing control means 275, special figure adjustment means 276, main initial process execution means 280, main power interruption process execution means 282, It comprises main error detection means 284 , setting change means 286 , setting confirmation means 287 and command communication means 205 .

<Entering ball determination means 201>
The entering ball determining means 201 determines entering of a game ball into each winning hole. The ball entry determination means 201 determines that the game ball has won the first start opening 11 when receiving the first start winning information, and determines that the game ball has won the second starting opening 12 when receiving the second start winning information. to decide. A ball entry judging means 201 judges that the game ball has entered the big prize winning slot 20 when receiving the big winning slot winning information, and judges that the game ball has entered the general winning slot 33 when receiving the general winning slot information. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 when passing information is received. The entering ball determination means 201 determines that the game ball has passed through the out port 34 when receiving the ejection information. The entered ball determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display section 159 . The ball-entering determination means 201 calculates the "number of balls paid out"/"number of out-balls"×100 when the probability of winning a big hit is normal probability and normal ball-entering state (so-called low probability and low ball-entering state). is displayed on the performance display unit 159 . Therefore, the performance display section 159 displays the base in the low base state.

<Random Number Generation Means 202>
The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various decisions in the first lottery means 211 , the second lottery means 212 and the normal pattern lottery means 213 . Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number (also referred to as a "lottery value") used in the lottery by the first lottery determination means 221 and the second lottery determination means 222. A range of random numbers is generated by predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 selects from "0" to "255" as a random number (also referred to as "symbol determination lottery value") used in design determination (symbol lottery) by the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227. A random number in the range of up to is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 uses "0" to "255 ” is generated by a predetermined means. In addition, the random number generating means 202 generates a random number in the range from "0" to "99" as a random number to be used in the success/failure lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 by means of a predetermined means. Further, the random number generation means 202 generates a random number in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as a random number used when determining the normal symbol. In addition, "random number" here refers to physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit, true random numbers in a mathematical sense, and pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter and software random numbers using random number generation algorithms. It's okay. Alternatively, random numbers generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used. The random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means. .

<Universal drawing lottery means 213>
The normal pattern lottery means 213 generates a random number used for the lottery of the normal pattern and the random number used for determining the stop pattern of the normal pattern when the game ball passes through the first operation port 31 or the second operation port 32. 202 to execute a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 includes a normal symbol success/failure determination table (not shown) that is referred to for determining whether the normal symbol is appropriate, and a normal symbol determination that is referred to for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. to hold the table. The correspondence relationship between the lottery value for win/fail lottery and the win is defined in the normal symbol determination table, and the correspondence relationship between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol is defined in the normal symbol determination table. Based on the winning probability and the selection probability of the symbol, the success or failure of the normal symbol and the stop symbol are determined. The normal pattern lottery means 213 determines the stop pattern of the normal pattern with reference to the normal pattern determination table when the lottery value for the success/failure lottery of the normal pattern corresponds to the hit, and the lottery value for the success/failure lottery of the normal pattern is determined. If it falls under the deviation, always determine the aspect of the 1 deviation symbol. If the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is a win, and the normal symbol stops at a predetermined symbol (first winning mode or second winning mode), the opening/closing control means 275, which will be described later, determines the mode of the stopped symbol and the game state. The normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 is expanded accordingly. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The lottery value of the normal symbol is temporarily reserved by the reservation control means 240, which will be described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when it does not exceed the predetermined upper limit number reserved by the reservation control means 240 .

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first success/fail determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination as a function of executing the first lottery related to the first game. A means 231 is included, and a first win/fail lottery is executed as a win/fail lottery corresponding to the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 causes the first special symbol display section 41 to display the first special symbol 51 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second propriety determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and corresponds to the ball entering the second starting port 12. A second winning lottery is executed as a winning lottery. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol display section 42 to display the second special symbol 52 in a variable manner. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative pattern 61 is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 60. FIG.

<First Lottery Value Obtaining Means 216 and Second Lottery Value Obtaining Means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202 when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 . Specifically, the first success/failure lottery value for success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, the first symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special symbol 51 by the first symbol determination means 226, the first variation pattern A first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol 51 by the determining means 231 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means. The second lottery value acquiring means 217 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and determinations by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generating means 202 when the ball enters the second starting hole 12 . Specifically, the second success or failure lottery value for success or failure determination by the second success or failure determination means 222, the second symbol lottery value for determining the stop mode of the second special symbol 52 by the second symbol determination means 227, the second variation pattern A second pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol 52 by the determining means 232 is obtained from the corresponding random number generating means.

The first success/failure determination means 221 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the first success/failure lottery value. The second success/failure determination means 222 executes success/failure determination to determine whether or not to shift to a special game based on the second success/failure lottery value. In the success/failure determination, more specifically, "big hit" indicating transition to a special game, "small hit" indicating transition to a small hit game, " It is determined whether it corresponds to "out of". The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 hold a right/wrong judgment table referred to in the right/wrong judgment. In addition, in order to distinguish the success/failure determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation from the prior success/failure determination described later, it is also appropriately referred to as "the success/failure determination as the main determination". In this specification, when the term "table" or "selection criteria" is used, the relationship between the first parameter such as the lottery value and the second parameter such as the value indicating the option is strictly defined in the table structure. It not only refers to data, but also broadly includes implementation by a program structure that derives a second parameter from a first parameter as such a correspondence relationship. The concept including them is substantially synonymous with the "table" and is appropriately referred to as "selection criteria". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

The first right/wrong determination means 221 and the second right/wrong determination means 222 hold tables corresponding to respective right/wrong determinations as right/wrong determination tables referred to in the right/wrong determination. Specifically, a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the first right/wrong determination means 221 (also referred to as a "first right/wrong determination table") and a right/wrong determination table for right/wrong determination by the second right/wrong determination means 222 ("second (also referred to as "validity judgment table") is held, and a table to be referred to is selected according to the validity judgment to be executed. Judgment results of big hits, small wins, and misses are associated with winning/failing lottery values in a plurality of winning/failing determination tables, and winning/failing probabilities are determined according to the range setting of the associated big wins. In addition, a plurality of types of win/fail judgment tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings are prepared. is prepared. In addition, when the probability of a big hit, a small win, and a loss is the same among a plurality of game settings, a winning/failure determination table that is common to the plurality of game settings may be prepared.

FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a propriety determination table. This figure shows a win-or-fail determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a win-fail determination table corresponding to setting 6. FIG. In the hit/fail determination table of this figure, the determination results of big wins, small wins, and misses are associated with the win/fail lottery values. is determined. The first right/wrong judgment means 221 and the second right/wrong judgment means 222 refer to the right/wrong judgment table of this figure in the right/wrong judgment as the main judgment. In both of the first success/failure lottery by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure lottery by the second success/failure determination means 222, a big win is usually made only when the success/failure lottery value falls within the range of 0-299. When the odds are variable, the range of the big win is expanded, and the big win is achieved not only when the win/fail lottery value falls within the range of 0-299, but also when it falls within the range of 300-2999. Thus, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state. In this figure, a single hit/fail determination table shows the jackpot range for both normal and variable probability, but the hit/fail determination table may be prepared separately for normal time and for variable probability. It may be separately prepared for the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the winning/failure lottery value does not fall within the big winning range, it will be a small winning if it falls within a predetermined range. In the example of this figure, if the winning lottery value acquired by the first winning judgment means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, it becomes a small hit, and the winning lottery value acquired by the second winning judgment means 222 is 64000 to 65535. If it falls within the range, it will be a small hit. That is, the first win/fail lottery has a wider range of small wins than the second win/fail lottery, and the small wins are more likely to occur. In this way, when it does not correspond to the big hit, it is originally all "missing", but in the example of this figure, the winning or not lottery value range when it does not correspond to the small hit among the cases where it does not correspond to the big hit is especially expressed as "outside". In other words, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "whether it is a big hit or not", "minor win" may be included in the broad sense of "loss" in the sense of "not a big hit". Further, when "win or fail" is understood from the viewpoint of "hit or not", "minor win" and "big win" may be included in the broad definition of "hit". In this figure, an example is shown in which the determination table for whether or not the big hit is made and the determination table for whether or not the small win is made are realized in the form of a single winning or not judgment table. good. Further, the "small win" may be provided only in one of the first game and the second game, or may be provided in neither game. In that case, the value corresponding to the small hit is not set in the corresponding success/fail determination table.

FIG. 6 schematically shows the range setting of the winning lottery value for each set value. FIG. 1(a) shows the correspondence relationship between the first win/fail lottery value acquired by the first win/fail determination means 221 and the win/fail determination result. FIG. 2(b) shows the correspondence relationship between the second win/fail lottery value acquired by the second win/fail determination means 222 and the win/fail determination result. The range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit at normal time and probability change is 0 to 294 if the setting value is "1", 0 to 295 if the setting value is "2", and the setting value is " 0 to 296 if the set value is "3", 0 to 297 if the set value is "4", 0 to 298 if the set value is "5", and 0 to 299 if the set value is "6". Therefore, the larger the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that result in a big win in the normal time, and the probability of winning a big win in the normal time increases. In addition, the range of the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value that will be a big hit only at the time of probability change (that is, the loss in normal times) is 295 to 2949 if the setting value is "1", and if the setting value is "2". 296 to 2959 if the setting value is "3", 297 to 2969 if the setting value is "4", 298 to 2979 if the setting value is "4", 299 to 2989 if the setting value is "5", and if the setting value is "6", 300-2999. Therefore, the greater the set value, the greater the range of winning/losing lottery values that will result in a big win at the time of variable probability, and the higher the probability of winning a big win at the time of variable probability. The range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the ratio between the normal big win probability of winning a big win in a normal time and the big winning probability of winning a big win in a variable probability is constant irrespective of the set value. In this figure, the range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the variable probability jackpot probability is 10 times the normal jackpot probability, and is common to all set values "1" to "6". . In addition, the range of win/fail lottery values is determined so that the probability of winning a small win is constant regardless of the set value. In all set values "1" to "6", if the range of the first winning lottery value falls within 56500 to 65535, it will be a small hit, and if the range of the second winning lottery value corresponds to 64000 to 65535, it will be a small hit. It hits. The range of win/fail lottery values outside the range of a big win or a small win is "off". In this figure, the big win probability is different for each set value, but the correspondence relationship between the win/loss lottery value and the win/fail judgment result may be determined so that the big win probability is the same for different set values.

<First Symbol Determination Means 226 and Second Symbol Determination Means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 determine the stop symbol at the start of symbol fluctuation based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generating means 202 and the result of the winning/losing determination. . The first symbol determining means 226 and the second symbol determining means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables that are referred to for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables corresponding to the results of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221, A plurality of symbol determination tables are held according to the determination results. A first win/fail determination means 221 holds a first pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to when winning big, a first symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a first symbol determination table for loss to be referred to when losing. A second win/fail determination means 222 holds a second pattern determination table for big wins to be referred to for big wins, a second symbol determination table for small wins to be referred to for small wins, and a second symbol determination table for misses to be referred to for misses. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referred to according to the result of the success/failure determination. In addition, in order to distinguish the symbol determination to be executed when the symbol variation is started from the preliminary symbol determination described later, it is also appropriately called "symbol determination as the final determination".

FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing a symbol determination table. FIG. 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a big hit, FIG. 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the hit/fail judgment result is a miss, and FIG. 7(c) is a This is a table to be referred to when the result of winning/failure determination is a small hit. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 refer to the symbol determination table of this figure in the symbol determination as the final determination. Each symbol determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the types of special symbols and the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value. The types of special symbols are associated with the judgment results of big wins, small wins, and misses, respectively. "10" corresponds to an out. Each type is assigned a plurality of special symbols, that is, a plurality of generally meaningless symbols formed by combining segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a big hit and probability fluctuation after the big hit. Specifically, the type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, is associated with "0 to 99" in the case of the first symbol lottery value, and "0 to 99" in the case of the second symbol lottery value. 144”. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot (or "actual 4R hit") with probability variation as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" in the case of the first design lottery value, and in the case of the second design lottery value It is associated with "145 to 149". The type "2" indicates a 2R big hit with variable probability, and the type "2" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "150 to 189". Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot, and type "3" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "150 to 189". Type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot that does not involve probability variation as a normal jackpot, and type "4" is associated with both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value of "230 to 255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (that is, the content of the jackpot and whether or not there is a change in probability thereafter) is determined by the size of the range of the symbol lottery values.

In addition, it is also possible to provide more types of special patterns, and in that case, by configuring so that one jackpot type is determined corresponding to a plurality of types of special patterns, it is possible to increase the number of types of patterns and increase the number of jackpots. You can set less types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide into a larger number of types of jackpots corresponding to the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is possible to provide different symbol types for the first lottery and the second lottery. In this case, one kind of jackpot is determined so as to correspond to each of the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the first lottery and the kind of special symbols selected at the time of the second lottery. However, it is desirable to set the ratio of the probability change to be the same between the first lottery and the second lottery.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the type "10" is associated with the symbol lottery value of the entire range when the winning/losing determination result is out. Therefore, it is decided that the same special symbol should always be stop-displayed in the case of a loss. It should be noted that it is also possible to provide a plurality of special symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of being out.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small hits. The type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0-49", and the type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50-99". The type "7" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "100 to 149", the type "8" is associated with the range of symbol lottery values "150 to 199", and the type "9" is the range of symbol lottery values. It is associated with "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, the table of FIG. 7 is referred to as a preliminary symbol determination table also in the preliminary symbol determination in order to save the storage area in the main board 200. FIG. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 indicate the type of the special symbol as a result of the preliminary symbol determination, indicating that the value is the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery. It is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the indicated value and the number of pending. In addition, as the preliminary symbol determination table, a table that is further subdivided to enable execution of complicated determination, or a simple one that summarizes the determination range of big hit symbols for executing a similar special game may be used. . In addition, when the pattern is uniformly determined at the time of loss as in the present embodiment, a specific pattern can be selected without referring to the acquired symbol lottery value and without preparing a pattern determination table for loss. may decide.

<First variation pattern determining means 231 and second variation pattern determining means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determining means 231 obtains from the random number generating means 202 the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the effect display device 60 is determined. It is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on one pattern lottery value. The second variation pattern determination means 232 uses the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 as the variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the effect display device 60 is determined. Based on this, it is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the symbol variation when starting the symbol variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform preliminary pattern determination as to which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main substrate 200 include a variation pattern table to be referred to for determining the variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and a change pattern table to the start port. Each holds or shares a pre-pattern determination table used to generate information for determination of execution of look-ahead processing at the time of ball entry. In the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation to the stop when the special symbol is variably displayed is determined, and the fluctuation time varies depending on the type. That is, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the symbol variation is determined, a variation display time is substantially determined for each pattern as a termination condition of the symbol variation, and when the variation display time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. is stopped from fluctuating. Incidentally, the variation pattern determination to be executed at the time of starting the pattern variation is also appropriately referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" in order to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation effect pattern of the decorative design to be described later, it may be defined as different types of variation patterns with the same variation time.

FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table of this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table of this figure (b) in the time saving state.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), if the success/failure determination result is out of the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "0", If the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, "Super 2", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "2", and if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, select "normal 2”. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, the pattern range number "4" and "no reach out" are selected. As "no reach out", different variation patterns are selected according to the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0 to 2, 7 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 3, number of holds is 4, a variation pattern of 4 seconds is selected.

In this figure, an example in which five types are mainly classified according to the variation time will be described. A plurality of variation performance patterns are prepared for each variation pattern on the sub-board 300, and there are dozens of variation performance patterns in total. is associated with the lottery value range of each classification.

The range of pattern lottery values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "No Reach Out" also varies depending on the number of holds. When the number of reservations is 0, 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reservations increases, the lottery value range of "normal 1" and "normal 2" narrows, and the lottery value of "no reach out" Wider range. The smaller the number of reservations, the wider the lottery value range of the variation pattern with a relatively long variation time, and the probability that the variation pattern with a long variation time is selected increases. Therefore, the smaller the number of reservations, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a variation pattern table in which the correspondence relationship between the pattern lottery value range and the variation pattern differs for each number of reservations, it is possible to realize control in which a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of reservations decreases.

If the success/failure determination result is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot in the normal state, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 123, select "Super 1", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "5", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 124 to 248, it selects "Super 2" which is the super reach of the pattern range number "6". If the pattern lottery value is 249 to 252, select "normal 1" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "7", and if the pattern lottery value is 253 to 255, select "normal 2”.

In the normal state, when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, select "Super 3", which is the super reach of the pattern range number "9", and the pattern lottery value is If it is 123 to 255, it selects "normal 3" which is the normal reach of the pattern range number "10".

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the pre-determination result to the effect determination means 303 as a so-called look-ahead result, the value of the pattern range number (0 to 10) is It is transmitted together with a value indicating whether it is the lottery or the second lottery, and the number of pending lotteries. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the preliminary pattern determination is exemplified so as to have a table for each success/failure determination result. It is also possible to derive only the information about the range in which the position is located, and control the control means of the sub-board 300 to determine what kind of variation is to be carried out together with the result of the prior suitability determination.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8B that is referred to in the time saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all variation patterns for time saving. However, the correspondence relationship between the range of the pattern lottery value and the variation time is the same as in FIG. "No reach out, shortened" is a variation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that is associated with the same lottery value range and pattern range number as the "no reach out" in FIG. 8(a). "Reach without reach shortening" also selects a different variation pattern depending on the number of holds, 10 seconds variation pattern when the number of holds is 0, 1, 1 second variation pattern when the number of holds is 2 to 4 are selected respectively. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or may refer to different variation pattern tables depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery, and the second lottery is given priority over the first lottery, the ball-entering state is easy due to the time saving. A situation in which the holding of the second lottery is exhausted and the first lottery is continuously executed is not preferable for the player. Therefore, in the loss fluctuation in the first lottery in the easy-to-enter state, a fluctuation pattern table in which a long-time (for example, 10 seconds) fluctuation pattern that does not shorten the fluctuation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reservations is referred to. You can do it.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4 , the reservation control means 240 includes a special figure reservation means 241 and a normal figure reservation means 242 . When the special figure holding means 241 newly acquires the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value, the symbol variation corresponding to the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value acquired before that. is displayed, the start of pattern variation corresponding to the newly obtained first win/fail lottery value or second win/fail lottery value is suspended, and the win/fail lottery value is stored until the start of the variation display of the corresponding pattern. Here, for the first special symbols, the upper limit is four, and the first success or failure lottery value, the first pattern lottery value, and the first pattern lottery value are stored. A second lottery value, a second pattern lottery value, and a second pattern lottery value are stored. The normal pattern reservation means 242 stores the normal pattern lottery value acquired by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. The numbers of these reservations are represented by the number of lights or the number of blinks of the first special figure reservation display portion 71, the second special figure reservation display portion 72, and the normal figure reservation display portion 75, respectively. The number of reservations by the special figure reservation means 241 is also displayed on the effect display device 60. - 特許庁

The lottery value of the second success/failure lottery retained in the special figure retention means 241 is preferentially digested over the lottery value of the first success/failure lottery, and the pattern variation is displayed. Therefore, even if the big win lottery value is reserved as the first win/fail lottery, as long as the lottery value is held as the second win/fail lottery, the pattern variation corresponding to the big win lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is not displayed. Therefore, even if the big win is reserved in the first win/fail lottery, by continuing to beat until the big win is held in the second win/fail lottery, there is a possibility that a plurality of continuous big wins can be obtained.

<Main display control means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special figure control means 251 , a second special figure control means 252 and a general figure control means 254 . The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display section 41 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the first winning lottery by the first lottery means 211. Let The first special figure control means 251 makes it a condition for starting a new symbol variation that the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win-or-fail lottery or the second win-or-fail lottery made before is completed. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display section 42 according to the variation pattern determined corresponding to the determination result of the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212. Let The second special figure control means 252 also makes the completion of the fluctuation display of the symbols corresponding to the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery performed before that a new symbol variation start condition.

The first special figure control means 251 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first success/failure lottery when the success/failure lottery value of the second success/failure lottery is stored by the special figure retention means 241.例文帳に追加On the other hand, the second special figure control means 252 starts the symbol variation display corresponding to the second success or failure lottery regardless of whether or not the success or failure lottery value of the first success or failure lottery is stored by the special figure reservation means 241.例文帳に追加Thus, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the pattern variation is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out and the symbol variation does not start until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes zero.

The 1st special figure control means 251 and the 2nd special figure control means 252 are changed by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing to start and stop the variable display of the 1st special symbol 51 and the 2nd special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, a value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, stop pattern, and variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and a value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. The normal pattern control means 254 causes the normal pattern display section 45 to display the determination result of the lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 as the fluctuation display of the normal pattern.

<Special Figure Adjustment Means 276>
The special figure adjustment means 276 waits the start of the other variation display while one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is variably displayed. The special figure adjusting means 276 is the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 12, regardless of the order in which the game ball entered the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. The variable display of 52 is prioritized over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on the ball entering the first starting port 11.例文帳に追加For example, when both the first win/fail lottery value and the second win/fail lottery value are reserved, the second win/fail lottery value is always preferentially consumed and the second special pattern 52 is continuously varied and displayed.

In addition, the special figure adjustment means 276 in the modified example changes the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 according to the order of entering the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 Alternatively, the display may be varied. For example, when the ball is entered in the order of the first starting port 11, the first starting port 11, and the second starting port 12, the display fluctuates in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. be done. In this case, the special figure adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the success or failure lottery value. Which special symbol should be varied is determined according to the order of game ball entry, that is, the retention order of the winning lottery value in the retention control means 240, so the player can easily grasp the variation order visually.

Even if the special figure adjustment means 276 in another modification displays the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the variation display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined digestion order regardless of the order of entry. good. For example, priority may be given to alternately displaying the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 . For example, when both the first winning lottery value and the second winning lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed alternately. Which special symbol should be varied is simply alternated regardless of the order of game ball entry, so the player can intuitively grasp the order of variation.

When one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a winning manner, the special figure adjusting means 276 waits for the other to start the variable display. In this case, since the variable display of the special symbols is not started while the special game is being executed, the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary determination means 235>
The prior determination means 235 includes a first lottery prior determination means 236 and a second lottery prior determination means 237 . First lottery pre-determination means 236 includes various random numbers acquired by first lottery value acquisition means 216 before execution of various determinations by first success/failure determination means 221, first symbol determination means 226, and first variation pattern determination means 231 Before the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special figure control means 251 using the information about the fluctuation is determined in advance. The second lottery pre-determination means 237, the second lottery value acquisition means 217 various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 before executing various determinations by the second success/failure determination means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232 Before the start of the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol control means 252 using the information about the variation is determined in advance.

The first lottery prior determination means 236 includes a first prior lottery value determination table, a first prior symbol lottery value determination table, and a first prior variation pattern random value determination as determination tables for prior determination of the first lottery means 211. hold the table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first symbol lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior symbol lottery value determination table. The first lottery prior determination means 236 determines the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special figure reservation means 241 belongs using the first prior variation pattern determination table. These determination results are temporarily stored as preliminary determination results, and information about the preliminary determination results is transmitted to the sub board 300 by command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207), which will be described later.

FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing a prior validity determination table referred to in prior validity determination. The first lottery prior determination means 236 (preliminary success/failure determination for the first game) refers to the first prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the result of the prior suitability determination. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "56500 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the prior winning judgment result. Next, referring to the first preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the first symbol lottery value is "0 to 99", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . When the first symbol lottery value is "100 to 149", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. If the first symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the first symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the first preliminary variation pattern random value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. . If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (preliminary determination regarding the first game) is performed by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing of the information indicating the entry into the ball (indicating that it is the first lottery), the information indicating the number of pending balls, and the like.

The second lottery prior determination means 237 (preliminary success/failure determination for the second game) refers to the second prior success/failure lottery value determination table in FIG. If the value is "0 to 299", the value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary suitability determination result. If the winning lottery value is "300 to 2999", the value "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "3000 to 63999", the value "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. If the winning lottery value is "64000 to 65535", the value "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary winning judgment result. Next, referring to the second preliminary symbol lottery value determination table (not shown), if the second symbol lottery value is "0 to 144", the value of "0" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. . If the second symbol lottery value is "145 to 149", the value "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "190 to 229", the value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. When the second symbol lottery value is "230 to 255", the value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary symbol determination result. Furthermore, referring to the second preliminary variation pattern random value judgment table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", the value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern judgment result. . If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the second lottery preliminary determination means 237 (preliminary right or wrong determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the second start port 12 by the command communication means 205 (sub control command transmission means 207) described later. (Indicating that it is a second lottery), information indicating the number of pending balls, etc. are transmitted to the effect determining means 303 in accordance with the transmission timing.

The various types of information temporarily stored as the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 are stored in a predetermined preliminary determination result storage area with an upper limit of 4, similarly to the number of reserved storages. It should be noted that the pre-determination result may be stored using the reservation storage area that the reservation control means 240 stores. The information may be erased based on transmission of the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 to the effect determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas and erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. Further, as the determination table for preliminary determination, the determination table for main determination may be used without providing a table dedicated to preliminary determination, and the preliminary determination regarding the first game and the preliminary determination regarding the second game may be performed. A part or all of them may share a common pre-determination table. In this way, by sharing this table with other determination tables, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the main board 200 . It should be noted that the content to be transmitted as the determination result of the prior determination means 235 can be appropriately selected, such as transmitting only the determination result of acceptance or rejection, for example. In addition, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 are transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 without being judged by the advance judgment means 235, and the sub-board 300 may be configured to determine the content of the preliminary determination.

The prior determination means 235 may refer to a prior success/failure lottery value determination table in which the correspondence relationship between the success/failure lottery value and the prior success/failure determination result differs according to the setting value set by the setting change device 170 . As with the win/loss determination table described above, a plurality of types of pre-win/fail lottery value determination tables corresponding to a plurality of game settings may be prepared, and the pre-win/fail lottery value determination table to be referred to may be switched according to the set values of the game settings. In addition, a pre-win/fail lottery value determination table that can be used in common among a plurality of game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be pre-determined by a combination of the set value of the game setting and the value of the pre-win/fail determination result.

FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a prior success/failure determination table corresponding to game settings. FIG. 3(a) is a prior determination table referred to by the first lottery prior determination means 236, and FIG. 4(b) is a prior determination table referred to by the second lottery prior determination means 237. If the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 294", the result of the prior win/fail determination is "11", indicating that all the settings 1 to 6 will result in a big win. When the win/loss lottery value is "295", the result of prior win/loss determination is "12", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 2 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "296", the result of prior win/loss determination is "13", which indicates that a big hit is achieved with the normal setting of 3 or more or with all the settings during the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "297", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "14", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 4 or more or in all the settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "298", the result of prior win/fail determination is "15", indicating that a big win is achieved in the normal setting of 5 or more or in all settings in the variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "299", the prior win/loss determination result is "16", indicating that a big win is achieved with the normal setting of 6 or all the settings during the variable probability. Also, when the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2949", the result of the prior win/loss determination is "21", indicating that all the settings at the time of probability change will result in a big win. If the win/loss lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the result of prior win/loss determination is "22", indicating that a big hit is achieved at the setting of 2 or higher at the time of variable probability. When the win/loss lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the prior win/loss judgment result is "23", which indicates that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 3 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the result of prior win/loss determination is "23", indicating that a big hit is achieved when the odds are set to 4 or higher. When the win/loss lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the prior win/loss determination result is "25", indicating that a big win is achieved when the odds are set to 5 or more. When the win/loss lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the prior win/loss determination result is "26", indicating that the setting 6 at the time of probability variation will result in a big hit. Furthermore, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary judgment result is " 30”, indicating that it will be a small hit in all settings. In addition, when the first lottery value shown in (a) is "56500 to 65535", and when the second lottery value shown in (b) is "64000 to 65535", the advance judgment result is " 40”, indicating that it is out in all settings. By using such a prior success/failure determination table, it is possible to show an appropriate prior success/failure determination result for each game setting value.

<Special game control means 260>
The special game control means 260 operates the special game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode when the first win/fail lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in the transition to the special game. A special game is executed by determining that a condition is met and opening the big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, the special game control means 260, when the second winning lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in indicating the transition to the special game, when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode. A special game is executed by determining that a special game operating condition is established and opening a big winning hole 20.例文帳に追加

The special game is a game in which the operation of opening and closing the big winning opening 20 is continued a plurality of times, and is composed of a plurality of unit games. The special game includes a 10R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated ten times, a 4R jackpot in which a unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which a unit game whose opening time is shorter than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot is repeated twice. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first lottery. In the 10R big win and 4R big win, the big winning opening 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in principle in one unit game. In the 2R jackpot, the big prize opening 20 is opened for about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 terminates the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is consumed. Even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the big prize opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot.

<Small hit game control means 265>
A small winning game control means 265 operates a small winning game when the first special symbol 51 is stopped in a predetermined small winning manner when the first lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a small winning. A small winning game is executed by judging that the condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加Similarly, when the second lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a small hit, the small hit game control means 265 determines that when the second special symbol 52 is stopped in a predetermined small hit mode, the small win game control means 265 A small winning game is executed by determining that a winning game operation condition is established and causing the opening/closing control means 275 to open the big winning opening 20.例文帳に追加

In the small winning game, the unit game is executed once, and the big winning opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small winning game control means 265 opens the big winning opening 20 for only about 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the big winning opening 20 to end the small winning game.

<Specific game control means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability variable state, the time saving state, and the ball easy state. A specific game control means 270 shifts the game state to a variable probability state, a time saving state and an easy ball entry state after the end of the special game when the special pattern is a pattern of a specific jackpot accompanied by a transition to a variable probability. The variable probability state, the time saving state and the easy ball entry state are continued until the next big hit occurs. In the time saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally shortened. do. However, in a normal state, reference is made to the variation pattern table corresponding to the number of retentions of the lottery value by the retention control means 240, and as the number of retentions by the retention control means 240 decreases, a variation pattern with a longer variation time tends to appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of variable probability of normal symbols, short time of normal symbols, and extension of the opening of the second start port 12 is performed, so that the entry to the second start port 12 The ball frequency (ease of entering the ball) is improved. During the variable probability state, the probability that the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 is a big hit is maintained at a high value. Further, the specific game control means 270 puts the second starting port 12 in an open extension state when the specific jackpot is obtained, and further increases the winning probability of the open lottery only when the winning lottery is the second winning lottery. It shifts to a probability variable state higher than the normal probability state.

<Opening/closing control means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the ordinary electric accessory 90 of the second starting opening 12 and the big winning opening 20 . The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 to open the normal electric accessory 90 of the second starting port 12 when the normal pattern is stopped in a specific manner. The opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting port 12 with a short or long opening time according to the result of the opening lottery in the normal state, and opens the second start port 12 with a long opening time in the easy-to-enter state. 2 Open the starting port 12 . The ease of entering a ball into the second starting port 12 is enhanced so that the player can continue the game without reducing the number of balls he has. The opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the big winning gate solenoid 92 to open the big winning gate 20 in the special game.

<Main Initial Processing Executing Means 280, Main Power-Off Processing Executing Means 282, Main Error Detecting Means 284>
The main initial process executing means 280 executes the control start process of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored. The main power-off process execution means 282 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the main substrate 200 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200 . The control start processing, abnormality handling processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Changing Means 286, Setting Confirming Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting change means 286 shifts to the setting change state described above. The setting change unit 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is changed to the setting change state. The setting change unit 286 sequentially changes the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 in response to pressing of the setting change button 172 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→ . , the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated to the same value as displayed on the setting display section 173 . When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming game settings. If the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state, the setting confirmation means 287 shifts to the setting confirmation state described above. The setting confirmation unit 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory when the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. Unlike the setting change unit 286 described above, the setting confirmation unit 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and also updates the setting value stored in the setting memory. do not. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display section 173 .

The setting value data managed by the setting memory may be numbers "0" to "5" instead of numbers "1" to "6". In this case, setting value "0" corresponds to setting 1, setting value "1" corresponds to setting 2, setting value "2" corresponds to setting 3, and setting value "3" corresponds to setting 4. , the setting value “4” may correspond to setting 5, and the setting value “5” may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared when the RAM is abnormal and the set value data is set to the initial value "0", it will not be determined to be abnormal. can be simplified. In addition, when executing some lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the prefetch process, there is also an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. . For example, when "1" to "6" are used as set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as the offset data. In addition, when numerical values of “0” to “5” are used as the setting value data, the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 may display the numerical values of the setting value data as they are on the setting display section 173, or may display the setting value data as they are. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display section 173 . In the latter case, the numeric data of "0" to "5" are converted into the numeric values of setting 1 to setting 6 in the game setting and displayed, so that the display can be easily understood by the manager of the gaming machine.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands necessary for executing payout and the like to the payout control board 155, and a sub-controller that transmits control commands necessary for executing performance control and the like to the sub-board 300. A command transmission means 207 is included. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole based on the judgment of the entering ball into each winning hole by the entering ball judging means 201 . Sends a command that indicates the status of an error that occurred in The sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the determination result of the lottery corresponding to the symbol variation to the effect determining means 303 together with the symbol variation control command when starting the symbol variation.

The sub-control command transmitting means 207 varies at the timing when the first special figure control means 251 and the second special figure control means 252 start and stop the variation display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. A start command and a variation stop command are transmitted to the effect determination means 303 (sub-main). When transmitting the variation start command, the value indicating each of the success/failure determination result, the stop pattern, and the variation pattern determined or determined as this determination, and the value indicating whether it is the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When the fluctuation stop command is transmitted, the value indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect determining means 303 together with the fluctuation stop command. In addition, the effect determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits a variation start command, a change stop command, etc. to the effect control means 304 in order to control the variable display of the decorative symbols by the effect control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and interlocking is maintained. Also, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determining means 235 to the effect determining means 303 . After the preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, regardless of whether or not the pattern variation display corresponding to the lottery starts immediately, the winning opening corresponding to the preliminary determination result (first start opening 11, second start opening It is transmitted to the effect determination means 303 together with the type information of the port 12), the information of the number of reservations, the game state, etc., and is erased from the transmission buffer or overwritten later. As a result, on the side of the sub-board 300, it is possible to speculatively recognize the winning result before the turn to start pattern variation, based on the received preliminary determination result. Processing based on the preliminary determination information performed by the sub-board 300 will be described later. Sub-control command transmitting means 207 is set by special game control means 260 information on the special game, information on the small winning game by small winning game control means 265, information on the lottery result by normal figure lottery means 213, setting change means 286 setting value information of the game setting is transmitted to the sub-board 300 . Further, the sub-control command transmitting means 207 transmits various kinds of control in the main board 200 or to the main board 200, such as information on initial processing by the main initial process executing means 280 and the main error detecting means 284, information on errors, and the like. information about various signals and the like to be sent to the sub-board 300 as appropriate.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub board 300 includes pattern mode determination means 301, pattern storage means 302, effect determination means 303, effect control means 304, timer means 307, effect setting means 308, sub initial process execution means 360, sub power interruption process execution means 362, A sub-error detecting means 364 , a command receiving means 370 , and a sub-side prior determination means 371 are provided.

The pattern storage means 302 holds a plurality of production patterns in which the content of the production image to be displayed on the production display device 60 and the display process thereof are determined when the decorative pattern 61 is changed. The performance patterns include a plurality of variable performance patterns in which the variation process from the start to stop of variation in the variable display of the decorative patterns 61 and the performance process are determined, and the degree of expectation for the big win displayed separately from the variable display of the decorative patterns. and a plurality of forewarning effect patterns that foretell the height of the variable display before stopping.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205 , and the sub-side preliminary determination means 371 holds the preliminary determination results transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The effect determination means 303 includes normal effect determination means 373 and prefetch effect determination means 374 . The normal effect determination means 373 displays on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 according to the information of the determination result of the first lottery or the determination result of the second lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the speaker 108, decides the content of the presentation to be output to the decoration lamp 111 or the like. The effect determination means 303 determines the content of effect according to the set value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205 . The look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, the decoration lamp 111, etc., according to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205. . The normal effect determination means 373 is determined by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232, and is selected from among a plurality of variation effect patterns corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern transmitted from the command communication means 205. Either one is selected and read out from the pattern storage means 302 . The normal effect determination means 373 sends the information of the read variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304 . The normal effect determining means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a variable effect pattern. In addition, there may be a case where the variable effect pattern is determined by the normal effect determination means 373 with reference to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the contents of the look-ahead effect determined by the look-ahead effect determination means 374 are varied. A production pattern may be determined. The look-ahead effect determination means 374 more accurately specifies the result of this determination based on the result of prior determination from the command communication means 205, the result of prior determination in the past held in the sub-board 300, the game state information, and the like. Based on the results obtained, whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect before this determination and the execution details are determined. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is in the probability variation game, and then shifts to the normal game state based on the prior determination result prior to the prior determination result received this time. determine whether or not to Based on the judgment result, it identifies the result of this judgment related to the pre-judgment result received this time, the selected variation pattern, etc., and determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and the execution content of the pre-reading effect based on the specific result. . Since the normal effect determining means 373 and the look-ahead effect determining means 374 cooperate in many parts of the effect determining means 303, the effect determining means 303 will be described as including both, except for a particularly necessary part.

In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. The effect determination means 303 selects a variable effect pattern of effect images having the same variable time according to the change pattern of the special symbol.

The symbol mode determining means 301 determines the combination and arrangement of the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols 61 based on the determination result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the decoration. It is determined according to the variation performance pattern of the design. The symbol mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stop symbols to the effect control means 304 . The symbol mode determination means 301 holds a symbol range table to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

The stop pattern of the decorative pattern 61 is formed as a combination of three patterns. For example, when the result of the success/failure determination by the first success/failure determination means 221 and the second success/failure determination means 222 indicates a transition to a 4R big hit or a 10R big hit special game. , a specific combination, for example, a combination of three symbols such as "777" and "111" is selected. A specific combination such as "357" is also selected when the success/failure determination result is a 2R big hit or a small hit, but these specific combinations are not necessarily combinations of three symbols. It doesn't have to be. If the result of the judgment is neither a big hit nor a small hit, it is a combination of three patterns such as "312" or "946" that does not match, and it is a specific combination selected at the time of a 2R big hit or a small hit. Non-applicable combinations are selected. If the hit/fail judgment result is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and if a variation pattern that indicates an outlier with a reach is selected, a combination that does not have a single pattern such as "191" or "727" to select.

The variation display pattern of the decorative symbols defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, that is, the performance process from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the stop of the variation. The variable effect patterns include a pattern for displaying a normal winning pattern, a pattern for displaying a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state in which one more pattern is aligned, and a winning pattern after a ready-to-win state. Contains patterns for when In particular, the pattern when passing through the reach state includes patterns with various long and short fluctuation times. In each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as a termination condition of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time elapses. A performance determining means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of decorative symbols having the same variation time as the special symbols according to the variation pattern of the special symbols.

In the time saving state, when the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determining means 231 or the second variation pattern determining means 232 is a pattern for time saving, the effect determining means 303 determines the variation for which the effect content for time saving is determined. Select a production pattern. The effect content for time saving is an effect in which a background image or sound is output to give the impression that the player is in an advantageous state due to the time saving or probability change.

The advance notice effect pattern is a effect pattern for temporarily displaying a specific character or motif image, animation, video, or the like, a effect pattern for moving a character, or a effect pattern for outputting a specific sound. The performance by the foretelling performance pattern is executed in parallel with the pattern variation, and preliminarily suggests that the degree of expectation that the pattern variation is stopped in a jackpot mode is high. For example, there is a normal announcement effect in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group announcement effect in which a group of characters are displayed so as to pass from one end of the screen to the other. In addition, a step-up notice performance is further included in which the display process of the notice performance is divided into a plurality of stages, the number of stages to be displayed is variable, and the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation for the big win.

The notice effect pattern includes a pattern (post-read notice) for predicting the final stop state of the pattern by executing the effect at the timing after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 becomes the ready-to-win state, and the decorative pattern 61. There is also a pattern (prior notice before reach) that simultaneously announces that the production will be executed at a timing that is not always stopped and the reach state will be reached.

The performance determining means 303 determines whether or not to display the preliminary performance on the performance display device 60 according to the determination result of the win/fail lottery or the preliminary determination result by a predetermined preliminary lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and displays it. To decide a notice performance pattern. A performance determining means 303 holds a preliminary announcement determination table to be referred to for determining whether or not to display the preliminary performance and a preliminary announcement type table to be referred to when selecting the kind of preliminary performance pattern. The advance notice determination table is set so that different columns are referred to according to the judgment result of the success or failure lottery or the result of prior judgment, and the advance notice effect is displayed at a higher probability when the lottery is successful than when the lottery is lost. As described above, the correspondence relationship between the determination result of the win/fail lottery and whether or not to display the advance notice effect is determined. Thus, the display of the advance notice effect itself can suggest a high degree of expectation for the big win.

The effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern 61 according to the selected variable effect pattern data. The production control means 304 sets the reception of the command to start the variation of the decorative pattern 61 as a condition for starting the variable display of the new decorative pattern. When the effect determining means 303 determines to display the notice effect, the effect control means 304 displays the notice effect according to the selected notice effect pattern on the effect display device 60 in a form superimposed on the pattern change effect. Let

A performance control means 304 reserves the start of the symbol variation display corresponding to the first win/fail lottery when the win/fail lottery value of the second win/fail lottery is stored, and whether the win/fail lottery value of the first win/fail lottery is stored. The symbol variation display corresponding to the second win/fail lottery is started regardless of whether or not. As a result, when the lottery values are reserved for both the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/fail lottery is preferentially read and the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. . In such a case, the lottery value withheld in the first lottery is not read out until the number of pending lotteries in the second lottery becomes 0, and the decorative pattern does not start to change. In this manner, the effect control means 304 causes the effect display device 60 to display the symbol variation effect including the variable display of the decorative symbol 61. - 特許庁

The effect control means 304 further controls the lighting and extinguishing of the decorative lamp 111 and the operation of the movable accessory 66 . Effect control means 304 has effect display control means 305 , sound control means 306 and lamp control means 309 . Effect display control means 305 controls display on the effect display device 60 , and audio control means 306 controls audio output from the speaker 108 . The lamp control means 309 controls lighting and extinguishing of the decoration lamp 111 .

During the variation of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, the effect display device 60 needs to display an image indicating that the symbol is varying. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is variably displayed, but in a manner that hinders visibility of the variable display of the normal-sized decorative pattern 61, other than the variation of the decorative pattern 61, is regarded as the main performance content. A special effect may be displayed. In this case, the player is presented with the fact that the pattern is fluctuating by variably displaying the substitute pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller than the normal size decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referred to as a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing it from an alternative pattern, the normal-sized decorative pattern is also called "normal decorative pattern", "main decorative pattern", or "main decorative pattern". .

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for directing the result of the judgment result, and has a display form simplified (in other words, simplified, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and the normal decorative pattern It is displayed in a more simplified variation process than The alternative pattern has an external display form corresponding to the portion indicating the pattern type of the normal decorative pattern, for example, has a display form representing numbers, letters, and symbols indicating the pattern type. In addition, the alternative pattern is variably displayed in an area narrower than the area where the decorative design is variably displayed. Typically, it is located at a position where it is difficult for elements other than the design to interfere with the main effect, such as a corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Fluctuating display. The alternative pattern is usually displayed relatively smaller than the decorative pattern, but has a display form in which at least the type of pattern can be identified in appearance. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

A plurality of substitute patterns displayed in place of a plurality of normal decorative patterns suggest a high degree of expectation that the result of the winning lottery will be in an advantageous state for the player due to the combination of stop modes at the end of variation. For example, a plurality of alternative symbols suggest that the likelihood of a big win in the variation is high when two of the three alternative symbols are in a ready-to-win state. In addition, the left and right symbols in the reach state are “3” and “7”, which indicate that the expectations are relatively high, and the expectations are “1” and “2”. The degree of expectation of the reach state may be suggested by becoming a pattern of a type that suggests a relatively low degree. It should be noted that the alternative pattern does not appear to be in a definite stop state, but is in a temporary stop state in which slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the alternative symbol, the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in the fixed stop state. In addition, the display periods may overlap instead of displaying the normal decorative pattern and the alternative pattern exclusively. Furthermore, at the time of a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is obstructed, the variable display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued and the variation of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative design, the special design is fluctuating in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 while the first special design 51 and the second special design 52 are changing, with an image that is about the same as or smaller than the alternative design. A simple symbol suggesting that there is something may be variably displayed. The simple design may consist of a variable display of a combination of three patterns in the same way as the normal decorative design, or may consist of a variable display of a single design, or may be a simple symbol ("O", "X", etc.). may be configured in such a manner that they are sequentially switched. The simple design is not related to the variable display mode of the normal decorative design or alternative design, it displays a constant variation from the start to the end of the variation of the special design, and when it is stopped, it is related to the stop display mode of the normal decorative design. may be displayed as It should be noted that the simple symbols may be changed as long as the indication that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the result of the special symbols are reported at least, and the simple symbols may be displayed in a combination of two symbols or the like. In addition, the simple design may also be called "sub-decorative design", "sub-design", "mini-decorative design", "mini-design", and the like. Aside from the effect display device 60, variable display of a decorative pattern called a fourth pattern that shows a display equivalent to the simple pattern by means of a light emitting mode such as an LED may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display during variation of special symbols, display of results) in the event that a problem occurs in the effect display device 60 or the like. As an example of the display mode of the fourth pattern, the LED lights up in sequence as "white", "blue", "green", "yellow", "orange", and "red" (blinking including extinguishing is also possible). Alternatively, the variable display may be suggested by blinking in a certain single color according to the type of special pattern, and the luminescent color at the time of stop display may suggest the type of loss or big win.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used for games. The clock means 307 is a timer circuit that measures the time from power-on with a counter and outputs it as time information. However, a real-time clock circuit that incorporates a battery and can continue to measure the date and time by the battery even when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off or during a power outage may be used. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is the possibility that slight differences may occur in the time of each game machine due to individual differences or time lags. is unlikely to occur.

The effect determination means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing triggered by the time information output by the clock means 307 indicating a predetermined time. The synchronization effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 in a synchronization effect period which is substantially asynchronous with the fluctuation period of the symbol fluctuation and the game state. The synchronization performance period lasts for several minutes, and its length is longer than one symbol variation time, and can include a plurality of symbol variation periods. The effect pattern of the synchronizing effect is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and reproduction of a predetermined music piece and video is determined in the effect pattern. A plurality of types of performance patterns for synchronized performance are prepared, and different types of performance patterns can be selected depending on the date and time such as the month, date, day of the week, and time.

Synchronization performance is executed regardless of whether it is during a normal game or during a special game. Here, "during a normal game" includes displaying a so-called standby demo screen. That is, the "during normal game" includes (1) "normal game during variable display" in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and (2) "normal game during variable stop" in which symbols are not displayed in variable display and the standby demo screen is not displayed. , and (3) ``Normal game during display of standby demo screen'' in which the standby demo screen is being displayed instead of the variable display of symbols. The tuning effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the case of (2) and (3), the output mode for control such as volume reduction and brightness reduction in the tuning effect is (1). can be different from when Also, while the standby demo screen is being displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile cooperation system, which will be described later, by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when the operation input is received, the video and audio of the synchronization effect are output. It is suppressed, and screen display such as effect customization by the mobile cooperation system is given priority.

The synchronization effect is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined musical piece or video is reproduced at a predetermined time (referred to as "synchronization effect start time"). The time that triggers the reproduction of the synchronization effect may be the time that arrives after a predetermined time interval from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, or the time on the hour or half past the hour based on the standard time. may be Alternatively, times may be set that may vary depending on the date or day of the week, not at regular intervals such as "every hour", but at different intervals such as one hour later, then three hours later, and so on. Intervals may vary by date or day of the week. It may be a variable setting in which the time can be designated by a game clerk for each game parlor. However, it is set in advance so that the same synchronization effect is executed at least at the same time among a plurality of machines of the same model installed in the same game parlor. For example, in the case of a specification that is triggered by the arrival of a predetermined time interval after the power is turned on, a plurality of machines are powered on at the same time in an amusement arcade. As a result, when the predetermined time is reached, the same synchronizing effect is executed on the plurality of game machines all at once. As a result, the performance is displayed at the same time as if it were synchronized on multiple devices, and the same music and images are played at the same time, creating a synergistic effect with a sense of realism, as if a live performance or movie was being shown on the spot. A dramatic effect is obtained.

The function of synchronized performance is similarly built in other game machines of the same model, and a plurality of game machines on the same game island are simultaneously turned on by the game clerk every day. Then, all of the plurality of game machines that are powered on at the same time reach the synchronization performance start time almost at the same time, so that the synchronization performance can be executed all at once. This is called multi-unit synchronous production. In that case, not only will the video display be synchronized across multiple units, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized across multiple units. increase.

The effect setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes the history of game results and the history of performance results. The history of the game result is the result of the game that leads to the number of balls that the player can obtain as a result of the game, such as the number of hit balls, the number of prize balls, the number of big hits, the number of variable probability, and the number of time reductions. Unlike game profits, the history of performance results is recorded in order to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of performance and the right to make it easier for specific types of performance to appear. It is information such as the score of For example, in order to convert the number of appearances of a predetermined effect or the result of a mini game into a score and give it to the player, encoded information indicating the score or game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, the score and game history information obtained by decoding are accumulated in the player's mobile terminal. A cooperation system between the gaming machine and the mobile terminal of the player via the two-dimensional code will be described later. It should be noted that the score here is necessary to expand the range of production customization described later, and the score reaches a predetermined cumulative value (for example, reaching 1000 points, every 100 points, etc.). With this as an opportunity, the number of customizable items increases.

Effect setting means 308 stores settings for selecting one of a plurality of types of effect content options as effect customization based on the player's selection instruction and game history. For example, a pattern storage means 302 prepares a plurality of types of performance patterns with different motifs, characters and music to be displayed as performance patterns to be displayed during special games, and the player is allowed to select which performance to display. It is assumed that Alternatively, a plurality of kinds of motifs or character patterns are prepared in a pattern storage means 302 as designs of patterns included in decorative patterns to be varied, and the player is allowed to select which pattern to display. In these cases, when the player operates the production button 109 or the cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, and the production pattern is selected through the operation, the production setting means 308 selects the contents of the selection. Remember. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308. - 特許庁

The sub-initial processing executing means 360 executes control start processing of the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored. The sub-power-off process execution unit 362 executes an abnormality handling process such as a power-off process in the sub-board 300 when a power failure such as a power failure occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300 . When the sub-error detection means 364 detects power interruption, the sub power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to the backup RAM as power interruption processing.

FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the mobile cooperation system. As a premise of the mobile cooperation system, the player is registered as a user by setting an account and a password on the game history server 358 provided with a dedicated site on the mobile terminal 354 in advance. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of the game, the performance display control means 305 causes the screen of the performance display device 60 to display the two-dimensional code 350 encoded with the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358, The player is made to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal and access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. - 特許庁Character information (also referred to as "password information") in which the player's identification information and performance score history are coded from the dedicated site is transmitted to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 causes the effect display device 60 to display the input screen of the password information, and allows the player to input the password information through button operation such as the cross key 110 . The performance setting means 308 decrypts the entered password information and registers it as the identification information of the player and the performance score history, so that the player's previous game contents and performance score state can be handed over. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization for selecting various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko game machine 100, with the progress of the game and the performance, the performance setting means 308 adds the score given to the player as a profit in the performance at any time and accumulates it as a performance score history, and the player , it is possible to carry out production customization at any time and select and set favorite elements as various production elements. Scoring in performance is basically added for each pattern variation, and a higher score is given to a performance type with a higher degree of expectation for shift to a special game, and a higher score is given when shifting to a special game.

As effect customization, the player utilizes a part of the cumulatively acquired points, and according to the number of points used, colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, etc. that constitute the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 60 are changed. You can change production elements such as music to your favorite type. The effect setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the effect element through button operation by the player, and changes various effect elements according to the instruction. Multiple types of items are prepared for each customizable production element, and a different value is set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated score reaches a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance is given to increase the customizable items. When a player operates a button to instruct the end of a game or performance customization, a performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and controls the performance display. Means 305 displays on effect display device 60 . The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, and decodes the read two-dimensional code 352 to acquire information and store it in the mobile terminal 354 . Further, the information is transmitted from the portable terminal 354 to a game history server 358 having a dedicated site via the network 356, and is managed in association with its own account information. In this way, information such as performance benefits and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via transmission means such as display and reading of the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358. The contents of the game and production can be taken over in the next game. In addition, by continuing the game for a long time, the number of symbol changes and the number of presentations increase, so that points can be obtained.

FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. As shown in FIG. The main substrate 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, a main ROM 292, and the like. The main ROM 292 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291 , and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A ball entry signal from each ball entrance and a payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as winning opening solenoids, the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 together with information such as the result of the win/fail lottery, the determination result of the pattern, the determination result of the variation pattern, and the like. A signal is transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 by one-way communication.

The command data transmitted from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 has a two-byte configuration consisting of a combination of one-byte command type data called MODE data and one-byte command content data called EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and the command content data and transmitting them to the sub board 300 . The instruction type data is a bit string indicating the instruction type, and a unique type code is assigned in advance to each instruction type at the development stage. The instruction content data is a bit string indicating the content of the instruction. The most significant bit of instruction type data and instruction content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is instruction type data or instruction content data. When the bit is 0, it indicates that it is instruction content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 requires two transmissions of 1 byte each to transmit 2-byte command data because of the specification of transmitting 1-byte data per data transmission. . MODE data, which is the upper byte, is transmitted in the first communication, and EVENT data, which is the lower byte, is transmitted in the second communication. Considering the possibility of communication failure due to the influence of noise, etc., the main circuit board 200 continuously transmits the same data, and when the sub circuit board 300 reads the same data twice in succession, the completion of transmission and reception of the data is determined. . The main board 200 repeatedly transmits the same data until it is read twice in succession, and transmits it up to five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, effect control device 313, and the like. The sub ROM 312 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining a effect process and display pattern data defining a effect display process. A sub-control program including effect pattern data, display pattern data, and sound pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 into the sub-RAM 311, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 310. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal from an external device such as the effect button 109 is acquired by the sub CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). The sub CPU 310 drives external devices such as the effect display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable accessory 66 by the effect control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and outputs the display. , voice output, lighting of lamps, and performances by character actions. Sub CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and sound pattern data to effect control device 313 . In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the effect control device 313 will be described, but the sub-board 300 and the effect control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, but are separated and connected to each other. may be formed as a separate substrate with the

FIG. 14 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. As shown in FIG. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320 , a control RAM 322 , a data ROM 324 , a display control circuit 326 and an audio control circuit 314 . The data ROM 324 is one of data storage means for holding raw material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display and audio data used for audio output in a data-compressed state. The effect image data is an image used for variable display and effect display as a effect object indicating the result of winning or failing lottery determination. It is a material image such as a moving image to be used. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and lines of characters that are output during production.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data designated by the display pattern data are read out from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and effect display is performed using the effect image data and motion data. is executed by the control CPU 320 . As a result, a command, effect image data, and motion data relating to effect display are transmitted from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display control circuit 326 performs display control. Similarly, the control CPU 320 transmits commands and audio data relating to audio output to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio control circuit 314 controls audio output.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332 , a drawing memory 334 , a drawing circuit 336 , a frame buffer 338 and a display circuit 340 , each connected via a bus 330 . For convenience, the bus 330 in this figure generically represents buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

Effect image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334 , and compressed data among these data are decoded by the decoder 332 . The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 332 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 320 to generate a display image. 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 60 .

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the effect display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The data ROM 324 holds “detailed display pattern data” that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326 . At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 310 can be referred to as "general display pattern data" that defines the outline of the effect display process. For example, in the general display pattern data, a rough flow of a series of effect display processes is defined, such as the start and stop timing of variation of decorative patterns, the order of reproduction of a plurality of moving images, and the timing of start and stop of reproduction. . On the other hand, detailed display pattern data includes detailed display control such as the display order of sprite images for realizing variable display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order for each frame to display moving images based on motion data. A process is defined.

When performing display control based on the "general display pattern data" sent from the sub CPU 310, the effect control device 313 reads the "detailed display pattern data" necessary for the process from the data ROM 324, and uses both display pattern data. display processing. Therefore, it can be said that the effect control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly mentioned, the "general display pattern data" stored in the sub ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other. ”. For example, when the effect control means performs specific processing based on the display pattern data held in the data storage means, the display pattern data includes "general display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data". . In the modified example, even if the display pattern data is not divided into the "general display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data", and the display pattern data serving as both is held in the sub ROM 312 or the data ROM 324, good.

In this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313, a configuration including a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324 and a display control circuit 326 is shown. In a modification, control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Also, the processing that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320 , the control RAM 322 or the data ROM 324 . For example, the control CPU 320 included in the effect control device 313 may execute processing that is supposed to be performed by the decoder 332 , the drawing circuit 336 and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326 . Further, the control RAM 322 included in the effect control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338 . In addition, the hardware configuration may not include the display control circuit 326 in the effect control device 313, in this case, the processing to be executed by the display control circuit 326 is executed by the control CPU320, the control RAM322 or the data ROM324 may be

Further, in this embodiment, as the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300, a configuration including a production control device 313 in addition to the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311 and sub-ROM 312 is shown. In a modification, the sub CPU 310, the sub RAM 311, the ROM 312 and the effect control device 313 may be integrated instead of being configured as separate electronic components. Further, the processing that is executed by the effect control device 313 may be executed by the sub CPU310, the sub RAM311 or the sub ROM312. For example, the sub CPU 310 may execute the processing of the control CPU 320 , the sub RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322 , and the sub ROM 312 may function as the data ROM 324 . In addition, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration in which the effect control device 313 is not included. may

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the main board 200 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process executing means 280 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process executing means 280 . When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as setting internal registers of the main CPU 290. (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y of S122), setting change processing is executed (S124). On the other hand, if RAM clear is OFF (N of S122), setting confirmation processing is executed (S126). In S105, if the setting key is OFF (N in S105), the processing of S122 to S126 is skipped.

Subsequently, according to the operating state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of data stored in the main RAM 291, power-off recovery processing or initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power interruption information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, the power interruption recovery process is executed. do. In other cases, that is, when the RAM clear switch is turned on or even when the RAM clear switch is not turned on, either the power interruption information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is normal. If not, initialization processing of the main RAM 291 is executed.

The main CPU 290 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and when the RAM clear switch is turned on (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (N of S106), the main CPU 290 confirms the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the power-off normal data (N of S108), the main RAM 291 is initialized (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (Y of S108), the data stored in the main RAM 291 is checked (S110). As will be described later, if the processing was completed normally when the power was turned off last time, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 uses the checksum to The data in the main RAM 291 are inspected. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 are not normal (N of S112), the data in the main RAM 291 are initialized (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y of S112), a process for returning to the state before the power was turned off is executed (S114).

In the power-off recovery process (S114), the power-on normal data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power-off information flag, and the initialization of various errors and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 155 are executed. do. Next, it clears the command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off, and requests the command transmission of various information indicating the game state. Subsequently, an effect command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. Subsequently, the open/closed states of the second starting port 12 and the big prize winning port 20 are restored to the states before the power was turned off. Subsequently, a process for notifying the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the initialization of the main RAM 291 and the initialization of the effect display are executed. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are held as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start an interrupt process, which will be described later, and an interrupt timer is started (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) thereafter, and interrupt processing, which will be described later, is executed. Subsequently, the main CPU 290 executes main processing for managing the gaming machine (S120).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S132), the process of S134 is skipped. Subsequently, the setting change state is entered (S136), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S138). If there is a change operation using the setting change button 172 (Y of S140), the setting values displayed on the setting display section 173 are updated, and the setting values stored in the setting memory are updated (S142). If there is no change operation (N of S140), the process of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N of S144), the processing of S138 to S142 is repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original state and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display section 173 is hidden so that the setting values cannot be visually recognized (S146), and the process returns.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. The value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N of S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y of S152), the process of S154 is skipped. The setting confirmation state is entered (S156), and the setting values stored in the setting memory are displayed on the setting display section 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N of S160), the processing of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is OFF (Y of S160), the setting display section 173 is hidden. to make the set value invisible (S162), and return.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in FIG. The main CPU 290 once prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors power interruption (S204). When a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) detects a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158, the power supply voltage monitoring circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290 to execute power-off memory. In the process, the power-off confirmation data is stored in the power-off confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power-off confirmation flag (S204), and when the value of the power-off confirmation flag matches the power-off confirmation data (Y of S206), executes the power-off process. Therefore, the process proceeds to S212. If the value of the power interruption confirmation flag does not match the power interruption confirmation data (N of S206), in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial random number per special symbol, and the soft initial random number per special symbol, An initial value random number update process is executed (S208), a timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while the timer interrupt is disabled (S202-S208), after the timer interrupt is enabled in S210, the interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

When power failure is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and confirms the contents of the power failure information flag (S214). If the content of the power-off information flag does not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the power-on data was not saved normally, and the power-off abnormal data is stored in the power-off information flag. (S216) and proceed to S222. If the content of the power-off information flag matches the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the power-on data has been saved normally, and the power-off normal data is stored in the power off information flag. (S218). Subsequently, when the power is turned on next time, in order to check the backed-up data of the main RAM 291, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the loop continues until the power is turned off. Note that the above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing executing means 282 realized by the main CPU 290 .

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs in the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes interrupt processing. First, an interrupt operating condition is set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Subsequently, in order to manage the game machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312) , 2nd starting mouth effective period setting process (S314), winning monitoring process (S316), prize ball control process (S318), normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), normal symbol control process (S322), normal symbol fluctuation start Monitoring process (S324), starting opening monitoring control process (S326), special symbol control process (S328), special electric accessory control process (S330), large winning opening effective period setting process (S332), special symbol variation start monitoring control Processing (S334), Abnormality detection processing (S336), Ball passing time abnormality detection processing (S338), Game state display processing (S340), Handle state signal inspection processing (S342), LED output processing (S344), Launch control signal Output processing (S346), test signal output processing (S348), solenoid output processing (S350), production control command transmission processing (S352), external information output processing (S354) are executed in order, and the next timer interrupt is permitted. (S356) and return.

In the input process (S304), the data of the input port of the switch attached to the game board surface, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, door / frame open signal, magnetic detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and touch state signal are monitored. , data indicating the input state is created and stored in the main RAM 291 . The data indicating this input state consists of level data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt), rising data or falling data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt, and input port data at the time of the previous interrupt). This is data indicating a switch for which switching is observed by comparing the data of the input port by exclusive OR).

In various random number update processes (S306), the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated. A normal symbol variation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is greater than or equal to the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from the main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is 0 or more, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, a predetermined maximum value is stored. As a result, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value of each random number, the maximum value, and the initial value are read out from the main RAM 291, and the value of the random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the maximum value, the value of the random number is set to 0. Also, when the incremented result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291 to update the initial value. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated each time the timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, that is, the range of the random number is completed. Then, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. An initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table of the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the incremented result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial random number is set to zero. A similar process is performed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of various control timers are read out from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and when the timer values are other than 0, the values are sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, no timer update is performed.

In the second starting opening valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second starting opening 12 is set. In the second start port 12, there is an effective period during which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters and a lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and a prize ball payout and a second special symbol are executed even if a game ball enters. An invalid period is set during which the lottery related to the symbol is not executed. As will be described later, in the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed during the invalid period of the second starting opening 12, so the game ball enters the second starting opening 12. Even so, the payout of prize balls and the lottery related to the second special symbol are not executed. The same applies to the case where the valid period and the invalid period are set for the first starting opening 11, the big winning opening 20, the first working opening 31, the second working opening 32, the general winning opening 33, and the like. When the state of the normal symbol is "ordinary electric accessary product in operation", data indicating that the second starting port 12 is valid is stored in the second starting port valid period flag. If the state of the normal pattern is not "ordinary electric accessories in operation", if the value of the second start opening effective extension timer is not 0, the second start opening valid period flag indicates that the second start opening 12 is valid. If the value of the second starting port valid extension timer is 0, data indicating that the second starting port is in the invalid period is stored in the second starting port valid period flag.

In the prize winning monitoring process (S316), it is checked whether the game ball has passed through the switch. If so, update the win counter. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

In the prize ball control process (S318), monitoring of data reception from the payout control board 155, command transmission request to the payout control board 155, command transmission to the payout control board 155, and inspection of received data from the payout control board 155 are executed in order.

In the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first operation opening 31 and the second operation opening 32 is monitored, and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32. When the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit value of 4, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number related to normal symbols is stored in the main RAM 291 .

In the normal symbol control process (S322), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the normal symbol control is in progress, the process relating to the normal symbol display section 45 or the normal electric accessory 90 is executed. When the state of the normal design is "during normal design fluctuation", normal design fluctuation processing is executed, and when it is "normal design stop design display", normal design stop design display processing is executed, "normal electric If it is "in operation", the normal electric auditors operation process is executed, and if it is "demonstrating the end of normal electric auditors operation", the normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is executed. In the normal symbol fluctuation process, after the normal symbol fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is over, the fluctuation stop setting of the normal symbol is performed, and the state of the normal symbol is changed to "Normal". Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In the normal pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is over, the operation end setting of the normal pattern corresponding to the result of the hit determination is executed. In the case of a hit, set the state of the normal pattern to "normal electric accessory in operation", save the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time of normal electric accessory operation start, and start normal electric accessory operation Execute the operation setting of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the normal electric accessory opening extension function at the time. In the case of loss, the normal design state is set to "normal design fluctuation standby". When it is determined that the winning number of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessories 90 has reached the maximum number of winnings by monitoring the winning of the winning openings related to the ordinary electric accessories 90 of the game ball in the normal electric accessories operating process. , executes the operation end setting of the normal electric accessory 90 and the setting of the second starting port effective extension time. When it is determined that the number of winning prizes of the winning openings related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not reached the maximum winning number, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored, and the normal electric accessory 90 is monitored. When it is determined that the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening is completed, and the opening of the entrance of the series of normal electric accessories 90 is completed, the operation end setting of the normal electric accessories 90 and the second start opening valid Execute extension time setting. When it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory 90 is not performed. In the ordinary electric accessory operation end demonstration process, the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is monitored, and when it is determined that the operation end demonstration time of the ordinary electric accessory 90 is over, the state of the normal symbol is changed to "normal symbol Set to “Waiting for fluctuation”.

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal symbol is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal symbol fluctuation" and the value of the number of normal symbol operation pending balls is other than 0, the normal symbol fluctuation is determined to start When it is determined to start the normal pattern variation, the number of normal pattern operation suspension balls is decremented, hit determination, stop pattern determination, normal pattern variation pattern number setting, and normal pattern variation time setting are executed. . After that, the state of the normal design is set to "during normal design fluctuation", and the area of the main RAM 291 used for normal design state setting, hit determination, and fluctuation pattern determination is cleared.

In the starting opening monitoring control process (S326), the first starting opening 11 winning and the second starting opening 12 winning of the game ball are monitored. If the winning of the game ball is confirmed when the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4, the built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the soft random number per special symbol to the acquired built-in random number, It is stored in the buffer as a special symbol per random number used in big hit determination. In addition, as the random number which relates to the special design, it acquires and remembers the design random number and the fluctuation pattern random number. When the reservation of the second special design is prioritized over the reservation of the first special design, only the renewal of the reservation related to the winning is executed. In addition to updating the pending status of the winning, the total pending number is updated and the winning order is stored. Subsequently, in order to request a notice effect command corresponding to the random number to be stored at the time of start-up winning, the state of the game machine is checked, and if it is determined that it is a command transmission period, a hit notice effect request, a winning pattern notice effect request, and a pattern notice Execute production requests in order. Here, (1) while waiting for a hit and while the probability variation function of the normal symbol is not operating, when storing the random number related to the first special symbol, (2) waiting for a hit and the normal symbol When the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored while the probability variation function is not in operation, or (3) when the random number associated with the second special symbol is stored during the big win or the small win. , is the command transmission period. Subsequently, a production command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is requested. As a result, the sub-board 300 is notified that the number of activated balls with special symbols has been updated. As described above, in pre-reading, four sets of preliminary determination information (preliminary correctness determination information, preliminary pattern determination information, and preliminary pattern determination information) and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-board 300 . In the above example, the main CPU 290 controls the transmission of the command for the pre-determination process, but in another example, if there is a ball entering the starting hole, it is uniformly transmitted and can be read ahead. The sub-CPU 310 may make various kinds of judgments such as whether it is a period or not. Subsequently, the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is checked, and if the value of the second starting opening effective period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the effective period, the first starting opening winning prize In the same way as in the case, the monitoring process of the second start opening winning is executed. When the value of the second starting opening valid period flag is data indicating that the second starting opening 12 is in the invalid period, the second starting opening winning monitoring process is not executed. In addition, when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and then a control process relating to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed. .

In the special symbol control process (S328), the hit waiting state is checked, and if the special electric accessary product is in operation, that is, during the big hit or the small hit, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric accessory is not in operation, the state of the special symbol is inspected, and if "standby for special symbol variation", end the special symbol control general-purpose processing, and if "variation start", special symbol variation Start processing is executed, and if ``special symbol fluctuation is in progress'', special symbol variation in-process is performed, and if ``special symbol stop symbol display is in progress'', special symbol stop symbol display in-process is performed. In the special symbol variation start processing, the selection number of the special symbol variation pattern is acquired based on the variation pattern random number, the variation time corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern number is determined, and the sub board 300 starts the effect display. Request a command for additional pattern information, variation pattern, and character information, set the state of the special pattern to ``during special pattern variation'', and clear the variation pattern determination area used to determine the special pattern variation pattern with 0. . In the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol variation is performed, the variation time is monitored, and when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has ended, the special symbol variation stop setting is performed, and the special symbol state is changed to "special Set to "symbol stop symbol display". In a special pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is monitored, and when it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the special pattern is over, the operation end setting of the special pattern corresponding to the result of hit determination is executed. In the case of a big hit, in order to end the operation of the special design, the state of the special design is set to "waiting for special design fluctuation", the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, and the probability of special design The variable function, the variable time shortening function for special symbols, the probability variable function for normal symbols, the variable time shortening function for normal symbols, and the opening extension function for normal electric accessories are deactivated, and the state of the game machine is prepared for the opening of the big winning mouth. Set to medium, set the winning start demonstration display time, command request for winning start demonstration effect, and command request for firing position specification effect (command request to execute effect that suggests recommended firing position such as "right shot") to run. When the result of the hit determination is a small win, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time shortening function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is requested. In order to end the operation of the special symbol, set the state of the special symbol to "waiting for special symbol fluctuation", set the state of the gaming machine during the small winning start demonstration, set the winning start demonstration display time, set the winning start demonstration effect Execute the command request and the command request for the firing position designation effect. If the result of hit determination is lost, the end of the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function and the normal symbol probability variation function is determined, the variation pattern selection state is updated, the game state command is requested, and the special symbol is determined. In order to end the operation, the state of the special symbol is set to "standby for special symbol variation", and the command request for the launch position designation effect is executed.

In the special electric auditors control process (S330), in order to execute the processing related to the special electric auditors, the operating state of the condition device and the special electric auditors is inspected, and the condition device is in operation or the special electric auditors are in operation When it is determined, the processing related to the special electric accessory is executed. Depending on the operating state of the special electric accessory, processing during preparation for opening the special electric accessory, processing during operation of the special electric accessory, processing during closing of the large winning opening, processing during the jackpot end demonstration, processing during the small winning start demonstration, small winning special electric In-operation processing, small-hit big winning opening closed processing, and small-hit end demonstration processing are executed.

In order to save the result of valid period determination of the big winning opening 20 in the big winning opening valid period setting process (S332), when the value of the big winning opening valid time is 0, the big winning opening valid period flag is set. Stores the mouth invalid period data, and when it is other than 0, stores the big winning mouth valid period data in the big winning mouth valid period flag.

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is ready to start varying. When the order of digestion of the reserved balls of special symbols is the priority digestion of the second special symbol, (1) not during the big hit or the minor hit, (2) the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, (3) ) that the second special symbol is waiting for variation, and (4) that the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol is other than 0, when all are satisfied, the special symbol is in a state where variation can be started. I judge. In addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls with special symbols must be other than 0, and (6) the relevant When the judgment is satisfied with the order of execution, that is, the order of winning, it is judged that the special symbols are ready to start changing.

When it is determined that the special pattern is ready to start fluctuating, the number of operation reserved balls of the special pattern is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is requested. As a result, the sub board 300 is notified that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol has been updated.

Subsequently, the hit determination of the special symbol is executed. In the hit determination, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss based on the special symbol hit random number, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, determine the pattern. In the determination of the pattern, if the hit judgment is a big hit, the big hit pattern is decided based on the special pattern per pattern random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit pattern is decided, and if it is a loss, it is a losing pattern. is determined.

When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, based on the value of the group determination number indicating the type of the hit pattern determined in the design determination process, the operation content of the probability variation function of the special symbol is determined, and the special symbol is determined. The game state after the end of the big win is set, such as the operating contents of the variable time shortening function and the easy winning state of normal symbols. Subsequently, the settings during the big win are executed, such as the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously and the contents of the opening time of the big prize opening. Subsequently, based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the probability variation function of normal symbols, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the big win. Next, a start demonstration time and an end demonstration time are set with reference to a table selected based on the value of the group determination number indicating the game state and the type of winning symbol. Subsequently, the area of the main RAM 291 used for hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the content of the variation pattern selection state is set by selecting the variation pattern table to be referred to after the end of the small hit, the start demonstration time and the end demonstration time are set, and the hit The area of the main RAM 291 used for judgment and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start". If the result of the hit determination is a loss, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit determination and design determination is cleared, and the state of the special design is set to "variation start".

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 inspects the magnetic detection signal, disconnection/short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame opening signal, and detects any change in the error state. If there is, the error state is stored and the sub board 300 is requested to display the error state presentation of the game machine. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and display the error state rendering is not executed.

In the entering ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 monitors the continuous ON time of each switch level to detect the entering ball passing time abnormality, and measures the continuous ON time ( For example, when it is determined that the value of a counter that is incremented at each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, the setting of the entry passage time abnormality, the command transmission request, and the security information output to the external information output terminal 160 Create an output claim in order. At this time, the light emission mode of light emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled in accordance with the ball passing time abnormality. If it is determined that the continuous ON time is not abnormal, security output request is not created.

In the game state display process (S340), in order to request the display of the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error state, the number of normal symbols in operation pending balls, and the number of special symbols in operation pending balls, respective displays are displayed. Create data.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected in order to monitor the touch state of the steering wheel. Update, set the steering wheel state monitoring timer, and request to send a steering wheel state rendering command. As a result of the inspection, if it is determined that there is no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the value of the handle state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is being decremented, and the subsequent processing is not executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display of the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol, the display of the number of activated balls of the special symbol, the number of activated suspended balls of the normal symbol, the display of the game state, and the special electric accessory are displayed continuously. Initialization of the display to display the number of times it operates, display the operating state of the special electric accessory when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, display the hitting division, display errors, and display the prize ball ratio , acquisition and output of display data.

In the firing control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal for prohibiting/permitting the firing of game balls, the communication state with the payout control board 155 and the setting of prohibiting/permitting firing corresponding to the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality, and After obtaining the firing prohibition/permission data, a firing prohibition/permission signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test equipment is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 and the large winning opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid 91 is obtained, and the output data of the large winning opening solenoid 92 is obtained. Acquire and output data output. The operating flag and operating timer of each solenoid are acquired, and the output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operating flag and solenoid operating timer are acquired. Subsequently, the solenoid activation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), it is checked whether or not there is a transmission request for a command to be transmitted to the sub-board 300, and if it is determined that there is a transmission request, the requested command data is acquired, and the used command buffer is set to 0. Clear, acquire MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data, output MODE data, hold MODE data, acquire EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data, and output EVENT data in this order.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

Random numbers used in the operation process of the main substrate 200 will be described in more detail. Random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include random numbers per normal symbol and normal pattern variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to normal symbols, and random numbers per special symbol (hard random numbers) as random numbers related to special symbols. , special symbol per soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, fluctuation pattern random number. In addition, as the random number for giving the initial value of the random number per normal symbol, the random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, which is the initial value update type random number, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value per special symbol There are random numbers and soft default random numbers per special symbol.

The random number per normal symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The random number per normal symbol is, in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32, the normal number of reserved symbol variations. is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol random number is used for determination of winning and stop symbol when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value of 0 to 232, for example, is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of the interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. Normal symbol variation pattern random number, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first operation opening 31 or the second operation opening 32 in the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt processing, the normal symbol variation is suspended. If the number is less than the upper limit of 4, it is acquired from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used for determining the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined to start the normal symbol variation in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324).

The random number per special symbol is obtained when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol activated is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process. , the values of the built-in random number and the soft random number per special symbol are acquired, and the two are added and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol hit random number is used for executing the big hit determination and the small hit determination in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number per special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position of the main RAM291. The soft random number per special symbol is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). and is used to generate a random number per special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol per symbol random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 7), is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. Stored. The special symbol per symbol random number is stored in the main RAM 291 when it is confirmed that the game ball has won a prize when the number of activated balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than 4 in the start port monitoring control process (S326). , and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The special symbol per symbol random number is used to determine a big hit symbol in the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process, when the hit determination is a big hit.

The variation pattern random number takes a value of, for example, 0 to 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of FIG. 8), is updated in various random number update processing (S306) of interrupt processing, and is stored in a predetermined location of the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is set to a predetermined number in the main RAM 291 when the game ball winning is confirmed when the number of balls with the first special symbol or the second special symbol activated is less than 4 in the starting port monitoring control process (S326). It is obtained from the location and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 . The variation pattern random number is used to determine the special symbol variation pattern in the special symbol control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

Normal per symbol initial value random number, special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and special per symbol soft initial value random number are the same values as normal per symbol random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and special symbol per soft random number respectively. It is updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the normal per symbol initial value random number, the special symbol per symbol initial value random number, and the special per symbol soft initial value random number are the normal per symbol random number, the special symbol per symbol random number, and the special symbol random number. When updating soft random numbers per symbol, it is used as the initial value of each random number.

Since the interrupt process is executed at regular time intervals by timer interrupt, various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular time intervals. be. That is, the normal per symbol random number, normal per symbol variation pattern random number, special per symbol random number, special per symbol soft random number, special symbol per symbol random number, and variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. On the other hand, in the main process (S120), the period from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer is calculated. Repeated for the reduced time. Since the time required for the interrupt process varies depending on the game state, etc., the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) may be replaced with various random number update processes (S306) or initial value update type random number update process (S308). ), it is not executed at regular intervals. As a result, the initial value random number acquired when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) can be made random each time.

FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing control start processing of the sub board 300 in the pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub initial process executing means 360 , but hereafter it will be described as being executed by the sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub initial process executing means 360 . When starting to control the sub board 300, the sub CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs register setting and port initialization of the sub CPU 310. Initialize the hardware (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311. Of the various variables in the control program, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are set to zero-clear data. Thus, the sub-RAM 311 is initialized (S506). Interrupt processing in the sub-board 300 includes, as interrupt processing executed with the highest priority, processing upon power-up and reset processing upon occurrence of various abnormalities when the watchdog function is enabled. As interrupt processing of priority level 7 with the next highest execution priority, there is processing of a command received from the main substrate 200. As interrupt processing of priority level 3, which has the next highest priority, detection of CPU runaway by a watchdog timer. There is a time reset process. The interrupt processing of priority level 2, which has the next highest priority, is processing related to commands sent and received with the control CPU 320. The interrupt processing of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, is communication processing with the real-time clock. and various device control processes such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the various processes described above occur at the same time, the interrupts having the highest priority set in advance for each type of interrupt are preferentially executed. The processing shown in the figure consists of the highest priority level interrupt, which is processing at power-on and reset processing upon occurrence of various errors, and the reset processing upon detection of CPU runaway, which is priority level 3 interrupt. include.

Interrupts other than commands received from the main board 200 (priority level 7) are prohibited (S510), and various error information used in the relevant model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). . All lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and the main process is executed (S518). Normally, the main processing of S518 does not return to this flow, but when it returns, it shifts to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in FIG. In order to check whether or not the control program arranged in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 of FIG. All interrupts are permitted (S532), and devices such as motors and solenoids are initialized (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative pattern counter is updated so that the combination of the decorative patterns is random (S540), and the input port of the sub CPU 310 is monitored (S542). In addition, since S540 is a process in the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a counter, in the case of the method of determining the missing decorative symbols using a lottery sheet incorporating all the symbol combinations that are the missing symbols. , the process of S540 is not executed. The process of determining the missing decorative symbols using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating a special symbol stop symbol is received from the main board 200 in S552 as will be described later. The sub CPU 310 functioning as the sub error detection means 364 monitors the error state and, when various errors are detected, reports the error (S544), executes processing according to the input state of the effect button 109 (S546), An advance notice lottery is executed (S548). In addition, the advance notice lottery in S548 sends the notice effect command to appear immediately after the start of the pattern fluctuation to the effect control device 313 as early as possible, so that the lottery process is not processed in one loop, but multiple times. It is divided into loops, and the notice effect to appear immediately after the start of pattern fluctuation is drawn in the previous loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, solenoid, etc., the operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if the command is immediately after analysis, the process proceeds to S536. Returning (Y of S554), if it is not immediately after command analysis (N of S554), the lottery soft random numbers are updated as low-priority processing that can be performed during idle time (S556), and the processing returns to S536. In S552, when the command to be analyzed indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol variation effect pattern is determined in the processing of S552, and when the analyzed command indicates a special symbol stop symbol, a lottery sheet is drawn. In the case of the method of determining the outlier pattern of the decorative pattern by using, the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is decided in the process of S552.

FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200 . The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command of priority level 7, which has the highest priority next to reset interrupt and error interrupt. The data received from the main substrate 200 is read to the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is determined as a new command (Y of S600), and the determined command becomes the first command. If it is (MODE data) (Y of S602), the first command is stored in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606) and the original routine is returned to. By obtaining a hard random number every time there is an interrupt of a main command from the main board 200 in this manner, the randomness of the value is enhanced without generating periodicity in the timing of obtaining the random number. If the data read in S600 do not match two times in a row (up to five times can be read), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned to (N of S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N of S602), if it can be confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y of S608), the command buffer (command data (S610), and stores the first command and the second command in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. When the first command has not been received in S608, the process after S610 is skipped (N in S608), and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for transmitting a command relating to effect display from sub CPU 310 to control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data for transmission in the buffer (Y of S622), the command data is read (S624) and transmitted to the control CPU 320 (S626). The command data transmission to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 a command indicating normal reception on the control CPU 320 side. After transmission, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned to. If there is no data for transmission in the buffer (N of S622), the processing after S624 is skipped and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when sub CPU 310 receives a command from control CPU 320 . This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command transmitted from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been received normally. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, solenoid and motor control for driving the movable accessory 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a 1 ms cycle. Since the interrupt is of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and a signal indicating input from the production button 109, a signal indicating error detection, and a signal indicating power failure. , input/output of ports for inputting/outputting drive signals to devices to be controlled such as motors and solenoids (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power failure is input, the process immediately proceeds to backup processing. Data related to device control is updated (S644), such as count processing based on the control pattern of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of buffers for writing data to the port in S642, and a timer is set to measure the timing of the performance. update (S646), update the timer for managing the effective input time of the production button 109 (S648), and update the task control counter for lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320, etc. to create a 16 ms period (S650).

Note that the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integral multiple thereof as the minimum unit of lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, in the case of counting a relatively long period of time, such as error reporting for 30 seconds, if one interrupt (1 ms) cycle count is used, the count value will be longer than necessary. The count value can also be shortened by using the count value of the cycle.

The task control has 16 kinds of tasks from processes 0 to 15, one of which is lighting switching control of the decoration lamp 111 and two tasks are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 . Lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby realizing switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to, for example, processing 0 and processing 8, and when the count values of the task control counter are 0 and 8, that is, once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652). By doing so, monitoring at a period of 8 ms is realized.

Note that the control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that turns on and off every frame, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is running out of control, and the sub CPU 310 sends a reset signal to the control CPU 320, and the control CPU 320 that receives the reset signal executes the reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer for managing a relatively long error notification period, such as error notification for 30 seconds, as described above is decremented (S654), and error notification ends upon timeout.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol variation display. When the second success/failure lottery value is reserved (Y of S700), the second success/failure determination means 222 reads out the second success/failure lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 wins or fails (S702). The determination means 222 determines the stop pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second variation pattern determination means 232 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and the variation start command is issued along with the determined result. It is transmitted to the sub board 300 and the pattern variation of the second special pattern 52 is started (S716).

If the second lottery value is not reserved (N of S700) and the first lottery value is reserved (Y of S708), the first lottery determination means 221 performs the first lottery The value is read out and the validity of the first special symbol 51 is determined again (S710), the first validity determination means 221 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), and the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the first A variation pattern of one special symbol 51 is determined (S714), and a variation start command is transmitted to the sub board 300 together with the determined result to start symbol variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/fail lottery value is not reserved, the process from S710 to S722 is skipped (N of S708).

The special symbols are processed for symbol variation display (S718), S718 is repeated until the predetermined variation time elapses and the symbol display stop timing is reached (N of S720), and the symbol display is stopped after the predetermined variation time elapses. When the timing is reached (Y of S720), the variation stop command is transmitted to the sub-board 300 to stop the symbol variation being displayed at the predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the variation display of the special symbols is terminated. do.

FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the process of decorative symbol variation display. The effect determination means 303 of the sub board 300 receives a command indicating the start of variation and the contents of the effect display from the main board 200 (S750), and the decorative symbols are stopped according to the received stop symbol, variation pattern, and success/failure determination result of the special symbol. A mode is determined (S752), and a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined (S754). Here, if the premonitory setting is turned on by prior determination (Y of S756), the already determined variable effect pattern is a pattern that includes specific effect content that should be avoided from being displayed superimposed on the advance notice effect. If it is not (N of S758), and if it is not a symbol change that triggered the turning on of the precursor setting (N of S760), the setting to display a predetermined advance notice effect is executed (S764), and the precursor setting is executed. If it is the symbol variation that triggered the turn-on (Y of S760), the precursor setting is turned off (S762). If the precursor setting is not ON (N of S756), or if the specific effect content is included in the variable effect pattern (Y of S758), the processing from S760 to S764 is skipped.

After that, the variable effect display of the decorative symbols is started (S766), the variable effect display process of the decorative symbols (S768), and the display process of the advance notice effect are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated (N of S772), and when a variation stop command is received (Y of S772), the symbol variation display is stopped by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774 ), and ends the decorative symbol variation effect (S776).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts a special game effect process (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not passed (N of S804) and the number of balls entering the big winning opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N of S806), and whether the predetermined opening time has passed ( Y in S804), but the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804), but when the number of balls entering the big winning hole 20 reaches 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 opens the big winning hole. 20 is closed (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N of S810), add 1 to the number of rounds and return to S802 (S812), and if the unit game has reached the final round (Y of S810), effect display. The control means 305 terminates the effect processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 terminates the special game (S816), and starts execution of the specific game, ie, variable probability, short working hours, easy entry state (S818). ).

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the process of the small winning game. In the small winning game, a unit game executed only once is started (S819), the big winning opening 20 is opened (S820), the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time elapses (N of S822), and the opening is continued. If the time has passed (Y of S822), the big prize opening 20 is closed (S824), and if the set number of times of opening and closing has not been completed (N of S826), 1 is added to the number of times of opening and closing, and the process returns to S820. (S828), if opening and closing for the set number of times is completed (Y of S826), the small hit game is terminated.

In the base technology, the number of jackpot balls in the second game is generally larger than that in the first game. , but in another example, the first game may be designed so that the expected value of winning balls is higher than that of the second game. However, it may be designed so that the expected values of winning balls in the first game and the second game are substantially equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 7 times is executed with a probability of 100%, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed 4 times with a probability of 50%. However, a special game may be executed in which the unit game is executed 10 times with a probability of 50%. Also, in any case, a specific area is provided in the big winning opening, and if the game ball that entered the big winning opening enters the specific area or passes through the specific area, in the normal game after the special game ends It may be configured such that a specific game such as a variable probability state is implemented. In this case, the special game executed when the second game results in a big hit is more likely to enter the specific area than the special game performed when the first game results in a big win. is high, and the probability that the normal game in the variable probability state is executed after the special game is finished may be configured to be high. For example, there are a first win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively difficult to enter a specific area, and a second win in which a special game is executed in which it is relatively easy to enter a specific area. It may be configured such that the second game has a higher probability of winning the second prize than the first game. Alternatively, the probability of getting the second win in the first game is less than 100%, but the probability of getting the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Base technology 2)
Next, the basic configuration of the slot machine will be described as a prerequisite technology.
FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the basic structure of the outer surface of the slot machine 1010. FIG. The slot machine 1010 includes a housing base 1102 which is mainly a box-shaped body, a housing door 1104 provided on the front surface of the housing base 1102, and various types of slots provided on the housing base 1102 and the housing door 1104. a device; The housing door portion 1104 is a door attached to the opening of the housing base portion 1102 so as to be freely opened and closed. Form. The housing door 1104 is locked during the business hours of the amusement arcade to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the slot machine 1010 . Only when the cabinet door 1104 is unlocked by an employee of the amusement arcade, access to the interior becomes possible.

A transparent window 1132 is provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the housing door portion 1104 , and the reel rotating inside can be visually recognized through the transparent window 1132 . An effect display device 1130 for displaying effect content is provided on the front upper portion of the housing door portion 1104 . A first bet button 1112a, a second bet button 1112b, a checkout button 1113, a cross key 1118, an effect button 1120, and a medal slot 1110 are provided in an operation area provided below the transparent window 1132 in the housing door portion 1104. be done. The first bet button 1112a is a button for betting one medal (hereinafter also referred to as "bet"), and the second bet button 1112b is a so-called max bet button, which is the maximum number of bets of three. A button for hanging a medal. The settlement button 1113 is a button for instructing the player to pay out the medals inserted from the medal slot 1110 and stored as stored medals or bet medals. The cross key 1118 and the production button 1120 are operation input means for receiving the player's operation input as production. Below the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a start lever 1114 is provided for the player to instruct the start of rotation of the reels. On the right side of the start lever 1114, a left stop button 1116a, a middle stop button 1116b, and a right stop button 1116c are provided for respectively instructing stoppage of rotation of the three reels. A medal payout opening 1108 and a medal receiving tray 1106 are provided in front of the medal payout opening 1108 under the housing door portion 1104 , and speakers 1122 are provided on the left and right sides of the payout opening 1108 . A plurality of production lamps 1124 are provided at a plurality of locations such as the outer periphery of the housing door portion 1104 .

A status display lamp, a number display lamp, a stored number display lamp, and a payout number display lamp are provided on the upper portion (not shown) of the effect display device 1130 . The status display lamp lights when, for example, a bonus game or AT (assist time) starts, and turns off when finished. The number display lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of bonus games, the number of AT executions, and the like. The stored number display lamp is a 7-segment indicator that displays the number of stored (credited) game medals. The number-of-payouts display lamp is a 7-segment display that displays the number of game medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination is established. The number-of-payouts display lamp displays alphabetic characters indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1010 . For example, there are a hopper empty error, a game medal payout error, a game medal retention error, a game medal reverse flow error, an auxiliary storage compartment full error, a spinning drum stop error, a setting value error, and the like. A hopper empty error is an error when game medals in the hopper tank 1162 become empty. A game medal payout error is an error when game medals are paid out at a timing different from the original. The game medal retention error is an error when game medals are jammed inside the medal slot 1110 . The game medal backflow error is an error when the game medals advance in a direction different from the original route, such as when the game medals enter from a position different from the medal slot 1110 . The auxiliary storage full error is an error when the game medals in the hopper tank 1162 are full. Spindle stop error is an error when each reel does not stop at a predetermined position. A set value error is an error that occurs when a set value is outside a predetermined numerical range.

FIG. 31 is a rear view of housing door portion 1104 exposed when housing door portion 1104 is opened. A transparent window 1132 is provided substantially in the center. A sub-controller 1300 called a so-called sub-board is installed on the upper part to control the effects in the game. Below the transparent window 1132, a medal selector 1150, a medal guiding path 1152 on the right side thereof, and a medal return path 1154 on the lower side are provided. A medal selector 1150 distributes a medal inserted into a medal insertion slot, which will be described later, to a medal guidance path 1152 if it is ready to be received, and to a medal return path 1154 if it is not ready for reception. The medals distributed to the medal guiding path 1152 are stored in a hopper tank, which will be described later, through the medal guiding path 1152 .

FIG. 32 is a front view showing the internal structure of housing base 1102 exposed when housing door 1104 is opened. A left reel 1160 a , a middle reel 1160 b , and a right reel 1160 c are rotatably provided at substantially the center of the housing base 1102 . The left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c are rotating members having a plurality of patterns printed on their outer peripheral surfaces. visible to the player.

A main control device 1200, which is a so-called main board, is installed on the upper part of the housing base 1102 to control the progress of the game. A setting change switch 1168 is provided on the right side of main controller 1200 . The setting change switch 1168 includes a button for changing six stages of game specifications, a keyhole for inserting a setting key held by an employee of the game parlor, and a setting memory for storing set values. Of the six levels of set values associated with different game specifications, the larger the value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specifications are for the player. When an amusement store employee inserts the setting key into the keyhole and turns it, the button can be operated to change the setting.

A hopper tank 1162 is provided at the bottom of the housing base 1102 , and a payout device 1164 (hereinafter also referred to as “hopper”) for paying out medals from a payout opening 1108 is provided below the hopper tank 1162 . A power board 1166 for supplying power to each part of the slot machine 1010 is provided to the left of the hopper tank 1162 .

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a pattern arrangement on reels. Symbol rows as shown in the table are printed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c. Twenty symbols corresponding to symbol numbers 0 to 19 are arranged at equal intervals on each reel. When a combination of symbols stopped on the active line among these symbols becomes a predetermined same symbol or a predetermined combination that establishes a predetermined combination, winning of the combination is determined. On the other hand, the lines in which symbols are arranged include combination lines which are not set as effective lines and are not treated as prize winnings even if predetermined same symbols or predetermined combinations stop.

In the slot machine 1010 described above, the player inserts 1 to 3 medals from the medal slot 1110 to bet on medals. When medals are stored as credits, the player presses the first bet button 1112a, the second bet button 1112b, or the settlement button 1113 to bet one or three medals. When the player operates the start lever 1114, the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c start to rotate, and the symbol rows on the reels move vertically at high speed. When the player presses the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c in an arbitrary order, the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c stops in the order corresponding to the pressing order. One of the symbols is displayed at the stop position. If the combination of symbols stopped on a predetermined activated line corresponds to one of a plurality of types of combinations, it is determined as a ``win,'' and the number of medals corresponding to the type of the combination is paid out, or a game state is reached. migration is performed.

FIG. 34 is a functional block diagram of the slot machine 1010. As shown in FIG. The slot machine 1010 has a main controller 1200 and a sub controller 1300 . Main controller 1200 is electrically connected to reels 1160a-c, bet buttons 1112a-b, checkout button 1113, start lever 1114, stop buttons 1116a-c, and setting change switch 1168, and sub-controller 1300 is an effect lamp. 1124 , effect display device 1130 , speaker 1122 , cross key 1118 and effect button 1120 are electrically connected. The main control unit 1200 and the sub control unit 1300 each include elements such as a ROM and a RAM for storing data and programs, and a CPU used for arithmetic processing in terms of hardware. I will explain the functional blocks from this perspective.

Note that each functional block included in the main controller 1200 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the sub controller 1300 instead of the main controller 1200 . Similarly, each functional block included in the sub-controller 1300 may be configured such that one of them is mounted on the main controller 1200 instead of the sub-controller 1300 . However, since data transmission/reception between the main controller 1200 and the sub-controller 1300 is unidirectional from the main controller 1200 to the sub-controller 1300, the entire operation is realized by such unidirectional data transmission/reception. Each configuration is arranged in the main controller 1200 and the sub-controller 1300 so as to be performed. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main controller 1200 to the sub-controller 1300 is maintained in this way, it is possible to transmit data from the configuration included in the sub-controller 1300 to the configuration included in the main controller 1200. cannot request data transmission. Therefore, information generated by main controller 1200 cannot be referred to by sub controller 1300 unless main controller 1200 unilaterally transmits it to sub controller 1300 .

The main control device 1200 includes a combination lottery means 1202, a random number determination means 1204, a win flag control means 1206, a reel control means 1208, a stop position determination table 1210, an operation order detection means 1212, a winning determination means 1214, a payout means 1216, and a special game. A control means 1218 and a setting change means 1220 are provided.

Triggered by the operation of the start lever 1114 by the player, the combination lottery means 1202 executes a combination lottery for determining a winning combination from a plurality of types of combinations, and transmits the result of the combination lottery to the sub-controller 1300. do. The types of winning combinations include minor winning combinations, special winning combinations, and replay winning combinations. There are a plurality of types of small wins, and the number of medals corresponding to the types is paid out. Special roles include regular bonuses (also referred to as "RB") and big bonuses (also referred to as "BB"). A replay combination is also called a "replay", and is a combination in which the same number of medals are inserted without inserting new medals, and the game can be played again. The random number determining means 1204 acquires the value of the random number used for the combination lottery as the lottery value. It should be noted that the "random numbers" referred to in the present application may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. The combination lottery means 1202 determines a winning combination by determining whether or not the lottery value obtained by the random number determination means 1204 falls within any of the lottery value ranges assigned to each combination.

Winning flag control means 1206 turns on a flag corresponding to a winning combination among a plurality of flags corresponding to each combination. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a small combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. If the winning combination with the flag turned on is a special combination, the winning is carried over to the winning, so the flag is kept turned on until the winning, and the flag is turned off when winning. If the winning combination for which the flag is turned on is a replaying combination, the winning combination is not carried over, so the flag is turned off when the game ends.

When the start lever 1114 is operated, the reel control means 1208 controls to start rotating the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c, and sends information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114. Send to control device 1300 . The reel control means 1208 selects one of a plurality of stop position determination tables 1210 according to the result of the winning combination lottery. The reel control means 1208 stops the rotation of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b and the right reel 1160c in response to the depression of the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b and the right stop button 1116c. In addition to performing control, information indicating that the stop button has been pressed is transmitted to the sub-controller 1300 . The reel control means 1208 controls the rotation and stop of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b and the right reel 1160c by controlling the driving of the stepping motors respectively provided.

Based on the stop position determination table 1210, the reel control means 1208 selects the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c according to the timing and order of pressing the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c. to determine the stop position of the The operation order detection means 1212 detects the order in which the left stop button 1116a, the middle stop button 1116b, and the right stop button 1116c are pressed. The reel control means 1208 detects reference positions of the rotational positions of the left reel 1160a, the middle reel 1160b, and the right reel 1160c by photo sensors corresponding to each.

The stop position determination table 1210 includes the result of the lottery, the positions of the reels 1160a-c when the stop buttons 1116a-c are pressed, the order of pressing the stop buttons 1116a-c, and the plurality of reels 1160a-c. A correspondence relation is determined as to which of the symbols is to be stopped on the pay line. That is, individual stop position determination tables 1210 are prepared according to the type of small combination, the type of special combination, and the type of replay combination. It is defined in each stop position determination table 1210 . When any winning combination is won, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the winning combination, when the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 The stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is aligned on the activated line. Even if any combination is won, if the pressing timing and the pressing order of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c do not satisfy the winning conditions, the reel control means 1208 determines the stop position according to the winning combination. Based on the table 1210, the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c are determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination does not line up on the active line. If none of the wins are won, the reel control means 1208 controls the stop positions of the reels 1160a to 1160c so that the symbol combination corresponding to the win does not line up on the effective line, based on the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the win. to decide.

In this specification, the term "table" simply refers to data in which the correspondence relationship between a first parameter such as a lottery value and a second parameter such as a value indicating an option is strictly defined in a table structure. Instead, it broadly includes the case of implementation by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter as such a correspondence relationship. These are also referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate as a concept substantially synonymous with "table". When a table structure is used, substantially one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of a plurality of structurally subdivided tables. It shows the number of actual types of tables, not the number of tables that have been formatted.

Winning determination means 1214 determines that a prize has been won when the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations is aligned on the activated line, and determines the number of payout medals corresponding to the winning combination. The payout means 1216 adds the number of payout medals determined by the prize determination means 1214 to the number of stored medals. However, when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, the excess medals are paid out by the payout device 1164.例文帳に追加Also, when the winning combination is a replay combination, the same number of medals as the number of inserted medals in the previous game are placed again. Winning determination means 1214 transmits information on winning and information on the number of payout medals to sub-controller 1300 .

A special game control means 1218 performs control to shift from a normal game to a special game when a special role is won, and to shift from a special game to a normal game when a condition for ending the special game is satisfied. As the special game, there are an RB game that shifts when the RB wins and a BB game that shifts when the BB wins. The RB game ends when predetermined symbols or predetermined combinations stop eight times on the activated line, or when 12 game results are obtained. The BB game ends when the total number of medals to be paid out exceeds 465 due to the prescribed symbols or prescribed combinations stopping on the activated line.

The setting change means 1220 determines the game specification corresponding to the set value set by the setting change switch 1168 among the six stages of game specifications, and changes the winning probability of each combination in the combination lottery by the combination lottery means 1202 . In the game specifications of six stages, the winning probability is higher as the numerical value among setting 1 to setting 6 is larger. Each time the setting change switch 1168 is operated, the set value is incremented by one in the order of "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → ... → "setting 6" → "setting 1". Cycle the increments by going back from setting 6 to setting 1. Finally, by operating the start lever 1114, the setting value selected at that time is determined, and the setting change is confirmed.

The sub control device 1300 includes pattern storage means 1302 , effect determination means 1304 and effect control means 1306 . Pattern storage means 1302 stores a plurality of types of effect patterns. The effect pattern includes the effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device 1130 according to the progress of the game, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound pattern to be output from the speaker 1122, and the like. The effect determination means 1304 receives information such as information indicating the operation of the start lever 1114, information indicating the pressing of the stop button 1116, information indicating the result of the winning lottery, information on winning, information on the number of payout medals, and other information from the main controller 1200. receive. Effect determination means 1304 is triggered by the operation of start lever 1114 or stop buttons 1116a-c or the stoppage of reels 1160a-c. One of a plurality of stored performance patterns is selected. The effect control means 1306 controls the display of the effect display device 1130, the lighting of the effect lamp 1124, and the output from the speaker 1122 according to the effect pattern selected by the effect determination means 1304. The effect control means 1306 changes the display contents to the effect display device 1130, the lighting pattern of the effect lamp 1124, the sound output from the speaker 1122, etc. according to the input contents of the effect button 1120 and the cross key 1118. When the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b and the start lever 1114 are newly operated while controlling the performance by the performance pattern, the performance control means 1306 cancels the performance being displayed, and the performance determination means 1304 starts a new game. A corresponding production pattern is selected, and the production control means 1306 starts production according to the selected production pattern.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing a basic game flow in the slot machine 1010. As shown in FIG. First, it is assumed that none of the reels 1160a to 1160c have yet rotated (N of S1010) and no medals have been betted (N of S1012). In this state, if medals are accumulated as credits (Y of S1014), if either bet button 1112a or 1112b is pressed (Y of S1016), a bet of the number of medals corresponding to the pressed bet button is placed. Set (S1018). If there is no credit, the routine of this flow is exited and the rest of the processing is skipped until medals are inserted (N in S1014). Even if the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are not pressed in S1016, the routine of this flow is skipped until the bet buttons 1112a and 1112b are pressed (N in S1016). If a bet has already been made in S1012, then S1014 to S1018 are skipped (Y in S1012).

If the start lever 1114 is operated while the bet is set (Y of S1020), the winning lottery means 1202 executes the winning lottery (S1022), and the winning flag control means 1206 wins according to the result of the winning lottery. A flag corresponding to the role is turned on (S1024), and the stop position determination table 1210 corresponding to the result of the lottery of the role is selected (S1025). If 4.1 seconds have not passed since the end of the previous game, it waits (N of S1026), and if it has passed (Y of S1026), the reel control means 1208 starts rotating the reels 1160a to 1160c ( S1028), exiting the routine of this flow. If the start lever 1114 is not operated in S1020, the routine of this flow is exited and the remaining processes are skipped (N in S1020).

In S1010, when at least one of the reels 1160a to 1160c is spinning (Y in S1010), if any of the stop buttons 1116a to 1116c is pressed (Y in S1030), the state of the flag indicating the winning combination; The stop position of the reel is determined based on the stop button pressing timing, the pressing order, and the stop position determination table 1210 (S1032), and the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped (S1034). If the stop button is not pressed, S1032 and S1034 are skipped (N of S1030). When all the reels 1160a to 1160c are stopped (Y of S1036), it is determined whether the winning combination wins based on their stop positions (S1038). is paid out (S1040). If all reels are not stopped, S1038 and S1040 are skipped (N of S1036).

As the reel stop management processing, a wait time is set, a control command including information indicating that the reel is waiting for the start of rotation is generated and written in the command buffer, and an initial value of various data used for accelerating the reel is set to a predetermined value. stored in the storage area of It is determined whether or not all the reels are rotating at a constant speed, and if it is determined that they are not rotating at a constant speed, it is determined whether or not the rotation of all the reels is abnormal. Again, the initial values of various data used for accelerating the reels are stored in a predetermined storage area, and confirmation of all the reels is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reels are rotating at a constant speed, or if it is determined that the rotation is not abnormal, the confirmation of all the reels is terminated.

In addition, when the payout cannot be stored in payout of medals, hopper payout is executed. In this hopper payout process, first, the hopper is driven and waits until the payout is detected (if the payout is not detected until a predetermined time elapses, a hopper empty error occurs). When the payout is detected, the number of payouts is added, whether or not the payout is completed is determined, and if the payout is not completed, the payout process is repeated, and if the payout is completed, the driving of the hopper is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of main controller 1200 and sub-controller 1300. As shown in FIG. Main controller 1200 includes electronic components such as main CPU 1250 , main RAM 1252 , and main ROM 1254 . The main ROM 1254 stores in advance a main control program and data for controlling game operations in general. A main control program or data is read from the main ROM 1254 into the main RAM 1252 and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 1250 . Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). A signal indicating insertion of medals, a signal indicating pressing of bet buttons 1112a and 1112b, a signal indicating pressing of checkout button 1113, a signal indicating operation of start lever 1114, a signal indicating pressing of stop buttons 1116a to 1116c, and reels 1160a to 1160b. A signal indicating the position of c is acquired by the main CPU 1250 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 1250 drives and controls external devices such as stepping motors for the reels 1160a to 1160c by various drive circuits (not shown). Also, commands necessary for effect control are transmitted from the main CPU 1250 to the sub-controller 1300 together with the result of the winning combination lottery, winning information, and information indicating the operation of each button and lever.

The sub-controller 1300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 1350, sub-RAM 1352, sub-ROM 1354, effect display control unit 1360, and the like. The sub ROM 1354 is one of data storage means for holding a sub control program including effect pattern data defining the effect process and display pattern data defining the effect display process. It is a hardware configuration that functions as A sub-control program including effect pattern data and display pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 1354 into the sub-RAM 1352, and effect control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub CPU 1350. FIG. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown), and is connected by two-way communication capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from each other. For example, when a command is transmitted from the sub CPU 1350 to the effect display control unit 1360, the command is transmitted multiple times. By replying, a communication error due to noise or the like is avoided. If a plurality of commands are received in a different order than normal, the effect display control unit 1360 ignores the ACK without replying, and replies only to appropriate commands. A signal from an external device such as the effect button 1120 is acquired by the sub CPU 1350 via various interfaces (not shown), and a corresponding command is transmitted to the effect display control unit 1360 according to the reception of the signal or the number of times of reception. The sub CPU 1350 drives an external device such as the speaker 1122 by various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the effect pattern data, and controls the effect by sound output. Sub CPU 1350 also transmits display pattern data to effect display control section 1360 . The sub CPU 1350 and the effect display control unit 1360 are a hardware configuration functioning as effect determination means 1304 and effect control means 1306 in FIG. In this embodiment, an example in which the sub-controller 1300 includes the effect display control unit 1360 will be described. may be formed as separate substrates that are connected to each other as substrates.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram schematically showing the hardware configuration of effect display control section 1360. As shown in FIG. The effect display control section 1360 includes a control CPU 1362 , a control RAM 1364 , a data ROM 1366 and a display control circuit 1370 . The data ROM 1366 is one of data storage means for holding material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display, and object definition data of three-dimensional images in a data-compressed state. It is a hardware configuration that functions as means 1302 . The effect image data is an image that is used for effect display as a effect object that indicates the winning determination result, and is, for example, a material image such as a sprite image used for various effects and a moving image used for various effects. The motion data is data that defines the action when adding a dramatic action to an image used for various effects at a predetermined timing. Object definition data is data that defines the shape of a three-dimensional object.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub CPU 1350, material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data designated by the display pattern data is read from the data ROM 1366 to the control RAM 1364, and the material data is read. The effect display used is executed by the control CPU 1362 . As a result, the control CPU 1362 transmits commands and material data relating to the effect display to the display control circuit 1370, and the display control circuit 1370 performs display control. When a signal indicating the operation of the new bet buttons 1112a, b or the start lever 1114 is received during the effect display, the sub CPU 1350 determines a new effect pattern and transmits a command indicating the new effect display to the control CPU 1362. . The sub CPU 1350 and the display control circuit 1370 are a hardware configuration functioning as the effect determination means 1304 and the effect control means 1306 referred to in FIG.

The display control circuit 1370 includes a decoder 1374 , a drawing memory 1376 , a drawing circuit 1378 , a frame buffer 1380 and a display circuit 1382 which are connected via a bus 1372 . Bus 1372 in this figure is a generic representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus for convenience.

Material data such as effect image data, motion data, and object definition data sent from the control CPU 1362 are stored in the drawing memory 1376 , and compressed data among these data is decoded by the decoder 1374 . The drawing memory 1376 is a VRAM (VideoRAM) used as a work area when the decoder 1374 decodes effect image data and motion data, and used as a work area when the drawing circuit 1378 executes drawing processing and image processing. ).

The drawing circuit 1378 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 1376 to sequentially execute the commands sent from the control CPU 1362 to generate display images. Store in 1380. The frame buffer 1380 is a VRAM as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the effect display device 1130 . It should be noted that the frame buffer 1380 and the drawing memory 1376 may be configured by a single VRAM and formed by dividing the area.

The display circuit 1382 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 1380 to the effect display device 1130 in the form of video signals in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 1380 has a memory area for two frames, for example. Store in the memory area for one more frame.

The slot machine 1010 is powered by a power board 1166 that functions as a power supply. A power switch and a reset switch are connected to the power supply device, and signals from these switches are sent to the main CPU 1250 . The power switch is a switch that receives power-on and power-off operations from the power supply device to the slot machine 1010 . The reset switch is a switch for resetting each circuit or the like mounted on the main controller 1200 when an error occurs in the slot machine 1010 or the like. Power from the power supply is supplied to main controller 1200 and sub controller 1300 . On the power supply path from the power supply device to the main control device 1200 and the sub control device 1300, there is provided power monitoring means for monitoring the supply voltage and detecting a power failure in which the voltage drops below a predetermined voltage. When the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage, the power monitoring means determines that the power has been cut off, and outputs a power cut detection signal to the main CPU 1250 or the sub CPU 1350 . Note that the reference voltage value for detecting the power interruption of the main controller 1200 is set to a value higher than the reference voltage value for detecting the power interruption of the sub controller 1300, and is set to a value higher than that of the sub controller 1300. Main controller 1200 executes a programmed process (power-off process) to be executed at power-off.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing main program control processing of main controller 1200 in slot machine 1010 . In the game control process executed by the main controller 1200, first, a game start process is executed (S1100), a game medal management process is executed (S1102), and as a start condition, the number of bets matches a prescribed number, and If the operation of the start lever is accepted (Y of S1104), the lever acceptance processing is executed (S1106), and if at least one of the start conditions is not satisfied (N of S1104), the process returns to S1102. Following S1106, combination determination processing is executed (S1108), and whether or not freezing (effect) is executed as freeze lottery processing, and the effect mode during freezing is determined (S1110). When the pseudo game freeze is selected in the freeze lottery, the pseudo game is executed (S1112). A reel stop management process such as waiting for a wait time is executed (S1114), and a stop display pattern determination process is executed to determine whether or not a game combination is established (S1116). Next, a game medal payout process is executed (S1118), a game end process is executed (S1120), and the process returns to S1100 to repeat the flow of this figure.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in main controller 1200 . In this timer interrupt processing, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by the player, detection (confirmation) of the signal level, transmission of each control command, etc. It is performed every fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). First, interrupt initial processing (saving registers, inhibiting interrupts, etc.) is executed (S1200), and it is determined whether or not a power interruption has been detected. A disconnection process is executed (S1204). In the power-off processing, saving of registers, saving of stack pointer, saving of interrupt state, and the like are performed. In addition, the holding of the information on the combination determination result and the information on the RT game state stored in the predetermined storage area, the calculation and storage of the checksum, and the like are processed. If no power interruption is detected (N of S1202), timer measurement is executed (S1206). Timer measurement measures the elapsed time of any timer set in the game control process. Next, control of the display lamp (update of the display value of the display lamp based on the control data output to the output port, etc.) is executed (S1208), and reading of the input port is executed (S1020). In reading the input port, the signal level of each game operation signal inputted to the input port is read and stored, and the signal level is determined.

Next, the reel driving control (S1212) for controlling the acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc. of the rotation of the reels is repeated until all the reels are finished (S1214). Next, port output processing for exciting output of reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. is executed (S1216), and control command transmission processing is executed (S1218). Outer edge signal data stored in a predetermined storage area is read out and an outer edge signal is output (S1220), interrupt termination processing (restore of register, interrupt permission, etc.) is executed (S1222), and interrupt return is performed. do.

Another control process executed by main controller 1200 is a main control power-on process. The main control power-on process is a process that is performed when power supply to the main controller 1200 is started (when the power is turned on). A temporary stack pointer is set, a checksum is calculated, a check is performed, and the power return process is executed. processed as possible. The stack pointer is restored and an interrupt is activated, and the game is played based on the information on the winning combination determination result, the information on the RT game state, etc., which were stored in a predetermined storage area when the power was turned off.

(Example)
The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be described below. In this embodiment, when passing through a special production process, there is a "fixed expectation level production" in which the expectation level of a big hit is constant regardless of the type of subsequent production, and a "fixed expectation level production" that suggests the execution of a specific production in advance. "Pre-suggestion performance" is made executable. First, "1. Pre-suggestive effect" related to the structure of the entire effect will be described, and then "2. Expectation level fixed effect" that can be executed when going through a special effect process will be described.

(1. Pre-suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, a "preliminary suggestive effect" that preliminarily suggests execution of a specific effect is prepared, and a dedicated effect that can be executed only after execution of the preliminarily suggestive effect is prepared. The exclusive production is one of the "high-expectation productions" in which the expectation of a big hit is relatively high. The pre-suggestion effect is started at various timings during the progress of the game, and continues until the execution timing of the specific effect to be suggested. After that, the pre-suggestion performance ends at the timing at which the specific performance to be suggested can be executed, and the specific performance can be executed with the end of the pre-suggestion performance as a trigger. With the end of the pre-suggestion performance as a trigger, there are cases where the dedicated performance is executed, there are cases where the common performance that is not the dedicated performance is executed, and there are cases where neither the dedicated performance nor the common performance is executed. Here, the "common effect" refers to an effect that can be executed without execution of a pre-suggestive effect, and can include various fluctuating effects and advance notice effects.

According to this embodiment, by enabling the execution of a dedicated effect, which is one of the high-expectation effects, after the pre-suggestive effect is completed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation of winning is high at the start of the pre-suggestive effect. can. In addition, by providing a case where the dedicated performance is executed after the end of the advance suggestive performance and a case where the dedicated performance is not executed, there is a case where the dedicated performance whose execution frequency must be reduced in order to achieve a high degree of expectation is not executed. Even if it is, the pre-suggestion effect can be executed, and the execution frequency of the pre-suggestion effect can be increased. Also, even if the dedicated performance is not executed after the end of the advance suggestive performance, by making it possible to execute the common performance different from the dedicated performance, the variation of the performance is enhanced and there is a chance of winning. can be suggested to the player. Furthermore, by setting a difference in the types of effects that can be executed after the end of the pre-suggestive production according to the start timing and end timing of the pre-suggestive production, the difference in expectations due to the difference in the start or end timing of the pre-suggestive production can be reduced. It can be suggested to the player. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the production.

FIG. 40 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the variable effect. This diagram shows the flow from the start of fluctuations in the main design, through which various effects are executed via normal reach, etc., to the execution of the "strongest effect," which is set to have the highest level of expectation for a big hit. . The ``strongest effect'' is a variable effect with the highest degree of expectation that can be executed in the final stage of the variable effect, and it is possible to tell the player whether the change will result in a big hit or a loss during or after the execution of the strongest effect. Win-lose branch effect to be notified is executed. In the win-lose branch effect, for example, a display prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112 is displayed on the screen, and after the effect button 109 or the effect lever 112 is operated, the win-lose is definitely notified. An example of the winning/losing branch effect is a role product actuation effect in which the movable accessory 66 is activated. It is definitely notified that it becomes.

The left side of FIG. 40 shows the flow of common effects that can be executed irrespective of the presence or absence of the pre-suggestive effects, and the right side shows exclusive effects that can be executed only after the start of the pre-suggestive effects. In FIG. 40, an asterisk (*) is attached to the timing at which the pre-suggestive effect can be started. The pre-suggestion effect can be started at various timings from the start to the end of the pattern change, can be started with the start of the pattern change, and is executed during the change "SP development suggestion", "development mission". , “Normal Simulated Ren”, “Special Simulated Ren”, and “Battle Reach” can be started as a trigger. Triggered by the end of the pre-suggestion production, the dedicated production "full screen development" can be executed, and the "sudden strongest" in which the shift to the above-mentioned strongest production suddenly occurs after the full screen development can be executed. The sudden strongest effect is also a dedicated effect that can be executed only after execution of the prior suggestion effect, and the strongest effect is executed after the occurrence of the sudden strongest effect.

As effects executed at the beginning of the pattern variation, there are "movable character", "dedicated pattern" and "normal reach". The "movable character" is a production that can be executed in conjunction with the prior suggestion production, and is a production that suggests the end of the prior suggestion production during the continuation of the prior suggestion production. Although the details will be described later, for example, the end of the pre-suggestion effect is suggested by the small movement of the movable accessory arranged at the bottom of the screen. "Special pattern" is also a production that can be executed along with the pre-suggestion production, and by inciting whether or not a special pattern different from the normal number pattern will stop, the pre-suggestion production will be performed while the pre-suggestion production is continuing. suggest termination. Details will be described later, but for example, a display is made to incite whether or not the special pattern consisting of the characters "full screen" that suggests full screen development will stop, and if the special pattern stops, a preliminary suggestion effect will be performed. Full-screen development is executed after completion, and if the exclusive pattern does not stop, the full-screen development is not executed and the pre-suggestion presentation ends. "Normal Reach" is a common effect that can be executed regardless of whether or not the pre-suggestion effect is executed. The end of the prior suggestion effect is suggested by the high-speed fluctuating reach state.

There are "SP Development Suggestion", "SP Development (Main Role Appearance)", "Normal Development (Weak Reach)", and "Development Mission" as the variation effects executed in the middle of the pattern variation. "SP development suggestion" is a production to incite whether or not to develop into an executable SP reach first half (strong reach) at the end of the pattern fluctuation. When the SP development suggestion succeeds in developing to the first half of the SP reach, the SP development (appearance of the main character) is executed, and then develops to the first half of the SP reach (strong reach). On the other hand, when the SP development suggestion does not develop in the first half of the SP reach, the normal development (weak reach) is executed, and a weak reach performance with a relatively low degree of expectation is produced compared to the first half of the SP reach (strong reach). After execution of normal development (weak reach), it is possible to develop to the first half of SP reach (strong reach). In addition, after execution of SP development suggestion or normal development (weak reach), there are cases where the main layout is lost and the fluctuation stops without developing to the next production. The "advancement mission" is an effect that can be executed after temporary stoppage in the form of misalignment of the main layout, and that develops after the appearance of misalignment. In the development mission, a mission to be cleared is given, and if the mission can be cleared, it will develop to the first half of SP reach (strong reach), and if the mission fails, the main layout will not develop to the next production. It comes off and stops fluctuating. In addition, in the middle of the pattern fluctuation, it may go through "normal pseudo-continuous", and after a predetermined number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (for example, 3 times), "SP development (protagonist appearance)", "normal development (weak reach)" or It is possible to move to "development mission". In addition, in normal pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the main binding does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and the fluctuation stops, may come off and stop fluctuating.

There are an SP reach first half (strong reach) and an SP reach latter half (strongest effect) as a variation performance executed at the end of the pattern variation. There are two types of production patterns throughout the first half and second half of SP reach, and there are two types of "strongest ritual reach" and "battle reach". The first system "strongest ritual reach" is an effect in which the process of the ritual for the main character to obtain the title of strongest is displayed, and a continuous effect is executed from the first half of the SP reach to the latter half of the SP reach. In other words, when the “first half of the strongest ritual reach” is executed in the first half of the SP reach, it is determined that the “second half of the strongest ritual reach” will always follow. Therefore, the first half of the Strongest Ritual Reach can be called the "Strongest Reach Finalized Reach" in the sense that the strongest effect (second half of the Strongest Ritual Reach) is fixed, and the first half of the Strongest Ritual Reach is the strongest rendition of the latter half of the SP Reach. Similarly, it can be said that it is a variable production that has a very high degree of expectation that it will be a big hit. The second system, "Battle Reach", is an effect in which the process of fighting against an enemy character is displayed, and is one of the high-expectation effects with a high expectation of a big win. Battle reach also has a first half and a second half, and if it develops in the second half of battle reach, the main character (protagonist) will be in the strongest state, and the possibility of winning over the enemy character is higher than if it does not develop in the second half ( This suggests that the expectation of winning) is high. In this embodiment, six types of enemy characters A to F are prepared as battle reach opponents, and the degree of expectation of victory is configured to differ according to the types of enemy characters A to F that appear. In battle reach, the same enemy character continuously appears in the first half of battle reach and the second half of battle reach. For example, when enemy character A appears in the first half of battle reach, after a production display showing the process of attacking and defending against enemy character A is performed, the main character becomes the strongest state in the second half of battle reach, and the battle with enemy character A begins. It's settled. At the end of the latter half of the SP reach (strongest performance), a win-lose branch performance is executed in which the player operates the performance lever 112, suggesting that the expectation of a big win is higher than in the case of operating the performance button 109.例文帳に追加For example, when the battle reach does not develop in the second half, a win-lose branch effect is executed in which the player operates the effect button 109 after the end of the first half of the battle reach, resulting in a greater hit than when the strongest effect in the second half of the SP reach is executed. This suggests that expectations are low.

As dedicated effects that can be executed only after execution of the prior suggestion effect, there are "full screen development", "dedicated pseudo continuous" and "sudden strongest". "Full screen development" is an effect that can be executed when the pre-suggestion effect ends in a specific display mode, and the main character appears after the entire screen is swallowed up by a storm. After developing the full screen, it will be shifted to "normal pseudo-ren", "dedicated pseudo-ren" or "suddenly strongest". "Normal pseudo-continuation" is a pseudo-continuous variation effect that can be executed both when the full-screen development is performed and when it is not performed. Appearance)”, “Normal development (weak reach)” or “Development mission”. As described above, in normal pseudo-continuous fluctuations, the main binding is off without reaching a predetermined number (for example, 3 times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and the fluctuation stops. There may be cases where the main binding comes off and the fluctuation stops. "Dedicated pseudo-continuous" is a pseudo-continuous variation effect that can be executed only when going through the full-screen development, and the pseudo-continuous variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) while the dedicated background developed on the full screen is displayed. It is a special production form that is executed. "Sudden strongest" is a production for transitioning to the strongest production, and develops into the strongest production "last half of strongest ceremony reach" or "second half of battle reach" after execution of sudden strongest.

The types of dedicated effects that can be suggested targets of the prior suggestive effect may differ depending on the start timing and end timing of the prior suggestive effect. For example, if the pre-suggestion production starts at the start of the fluctuation, and the pre-suggestion production ends at the beginning of the pattern fluctuation, it is possible to shift to "normal simulated continuous", "dedicated simulated continuous" or "sudden strongest" after full screen development is. On the other hand, if the pre-suggestion production starts or ends in the middle of the pattern change, it is possible to shift only to "sudden strongest" after full screen development. At the end of the pattern change, the pre-suggestion effect is executed only in the "first half of battle reach", and after the full screen development, it shifts to the "second half of battle reach" without going through the strongest sudden attack. In this way, by varying the types of exclusive performances that can be suggested objects according to the timings of starting and ending the pre-suggestive performance, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit depending on the timing of the start and end of the pre-suggestive performance.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an effect pattern of a pre-suggestive effect. In this embodiment, 23 types of performance patterns (also referred to as prior suggestion performance patterns) are prepared as prior suggestion performance. Each pattern has a different combination of a start opportunity, an end opportunity, an end effect, and a suggestion target effect of the pre-suggestion effect. As described above, the type of effect to be suggested may differ depending on the start trigger and end trigger of the pre-suggestive effect. In addition, the display mode at the end of the prior suggestive effect (that is, the display mode of the end effect) is varied according to the type of effect to be suggested by the prior suggestive effect.

In the pre-suggestion production patterns 1 to 9, the pre-suggestion production is started with the start of fluctuation, and the pre-suggestion production is ended with the movement of the character, the exclusive pattern, the normal reach or the SP development suggestion. The production to be suggested is normal pseudo-continuation, exclusive pseudo-continuation, or sudden strongest. In the case of transitioning to normal pseudo-continuation, dedicated pseudo-continuation, or sudden strongest, full-screen development is executed as an ending effect. It should be noted that there is a case where a specific effect does not occur after the end of the pre-suggestive effect, and "-" indicates that there is no effect to be suggested. Three types of display colors of purple, red, and gold are set for the prior suggestion effect, and the type of effect to be suggested is suggested according to the display color of the prior suggestion effect. Specifically, in the case of gold, it is determined that it will be shifted to the strongest suddenly, and in the case of red, it is determined that it will be shifted to normal pseudo-continuous or sudden strongest. On the other hand, in the case of purple, it is suggested that the effect will not occur after the end of the pre-suggestive effect.

FIG. 42 is a diagram schematically showing the first half of the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 1. FIG. At the start of the pre-suggestion production, a tornado occurs and the screen is displayed as being swallowed by the storm. First, as shown in (a), when the main layout starts to fluctuate, thunderclouds suggesting the occurrence of a tornado appear on the left and right sides of the screen, and the pre-suggestion effect starts. The display color of the thundercloud at the start of the pre-suggestion production is purple, gray or white, and a display color different from colors such as red and gold suggesting a high degree of expectation is used. Next, as shown in (b), a tornado is generated on the left and right sides of the screen, and an effect display is performed in which the screen frame is blown away toward the back of the tornado. (b) In the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen, the main layout that is variably displayed, the variable object that suggests the degree of expectation of the variation, the pending object that suggests the degree of expectation of the pending lottery value, etc. is displayed. In the screen frame at the center of the screen in (b), the same content as the variable effect when the tornado related to the prior suggestive effect does not occur is displayed. In other words, an image obtained by reducing the normal fluctuation effect as it is when the pre-suggestion effect does not start is displayed in the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (c), a movable role imitating a dragon (lower dragon role) appears at the bottom of the screen, and the movable role is vibrated in small steps. The end of the suggestive production is suggested. After that, as shown in (d), an effect display is made in which Shimoryu roars and smokes, and the screen shifts to full-screen development.

FIG. 43 is a diagram schematically showing the latter half of the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 1. FIG. This figure shows the production process following FIG. 42(d). First, as shown in (a), the entire screen is filled with smoke exhaled by Shimoryu, and a state is displayed in which the screen is enveloped in smoke. At this time, the display color of the smoke can change to red, and the display color of the smoke suggests execution of a highly anticipated exclusive effect. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 1, since it shifts to the normal pseudo-continuity after the full screen develops, the display color of the smoke either remains purple or changes to red, and suddenly shifts to the strongest. does not change to a gold color determined by . Next, as shown in (b), a hand is displayed with the forefinger and the middle finger sticking out from behind the smoke that fills the entire screen. Subsequently, as shown in (c), the smoke filling the entire screen clears up, and the main character (protagonist) appears with his index and middle fingers sticking out and unleashes his special move. After that, as shown in (d), the normal pseudo-continuation that is the target of the pre-suggestion effect is started. At this time, a plurality of types of pseudo-continuation effects are prepared as the normal pseudo-continuation, and for example, any one of four types of normal pseudo-continuation with different expectations can be executed. Also, the type of the normal pseudo-train executed in (d) can be configured to differ according to the type of special move performed at the timing of (c). For example, three types of special moves are prepared, and in the case of the first special move (for example, special α), a relatively low-expectation normal pseudo-train is likely to be executed, and the second special move (for example, special β) and In that case, the normal pseudo-continuation with a relatively high degree of expectation is more likely to be executed. In the case of the third special move (for example, the special move γ), it can be configured to switch to the sudden strongest move instead of the normal pseudo-strike. Therefore, in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 1 that is shifted to the normal pseudo-continuation, the third special move (special move γ) cannot be executed.

FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically showing the second half of the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 2. FIG. The first half of the rendering process of the prior suggesting rendering pattern 2 is the same as the first half of the prior suggesting rendering pattern 1 shown in FIG. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 2, as shown in (a), the full screen develops, and after a hand with the index finger and the middle finger sticking out is displayed as shown in (b), the third special move is shown as shown in (c). A main character who unleashes (hissatsu γ) appears, and a sudden strongest event occurs as shown in (d). In advance suggestion effect pattern 2, since the strongest sudden event occurs, in the full screen development of (a), the display color of smoke remains purple, changes to red, and changes to gold. There is In prior suggestion effect pattern 2, for example, the probability that the display color of smoke in full screen development is maintained in purple is set lower than in prior suggestion effect pattern 1. - 特許庁

FIG. 45 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the pre-suggestive effect pattern 3. As shown in FIG. The pre-suggestion production pattern 3 is common to the first half production process of the pre-suggestion production patterns 1 and 2, but the pre-suggestion is performed without executing the production in which the dragon breathes smoke after the "role movement (lower dragon fanning)". The performance ends. FIGS. 45(a)-(c) are the same as FIGS. 42(a)-(c). As shown in (a), thunderclouds are generated at the start of fluctuation, tornadoes are generated on the left and right sides of the screen as shown in (b), and the lower dragon character moves in small steps as shown in (c). After that, the pre-suggestion effect ends without execution of the effect of Shimoryu spitting smoke, and the display mode returns to the same display mode as before the start of the pre-suggestion effect as shown in (d). Specifically, the tornadoes displayed on the left and right of (c) disappear, and the screen frame that is displayed small in the center of the screen after being swallowed by the tornado returns to the front. For example, the tornado display disappears as if the tornado loses momentum and disappears naturally. In (d) after the end of the advance suggestive effect, no effect such as an advance notice effect that raises the degree of expectation is performed, for example, the main design is lost and the fluctuation stops. It should be noted that, at the timing of (d), the stop of fluctuation may be determined and the next symbol fluctuation may be started, or after pretending to be out, the mission may be shifted to an advanced mission. In prior suggestion effect pattern 3, since there is no effect to be suggested, the display color of the tornado remains purple, which suggests a low degree of expectation, and the tornado disappears while maintaining the purple display color, resulting in a prior suggestion. The performance ends.

FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing part of the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 4. As shown in FIG. The display mode at the start of the pre-suggestive effect in the pre-suggestive effect pattern 4 is the same as the pre-suggestive effect patterns 1 to 3, and is the same as in FIGS. 42(a) to (b) and FIGS. is. In FIG. 46, as shown in (a), tornadoes are generated on the left and right sides of the screen, and after the screen frame is displayed as if blown away toward the back of the tornado, as shown in (b), "full screen" is displayed. A production display is made to incite whether or not the special pattern of the wording will be stopped. Subsequently, as shown in (c), when the "full screen" dedicated symbol is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen, full screen expansion is executed as shown in (d). The production process after full-screen development is the same as in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(d), and the main character appears from behind the smoke with his index and middle fingers sticking out, and the normal pseudo-continuation starts. Therefore, in the prior suggestion production pattern 4, the timing for ending the prior suggestion production is different from the above-mentioned prior suggestion production pattern 1 in that the trigger for ending the prior suggestion production is not the movement of the character (lower dragon) but the dedicated symbol (stop promotion). is common to the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 1.

FIG. 47 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the effect process of the pre-suggestive effect pattern 5. FIG. The first half of the performance process of the pre-suggestive performance pattern 5 is common to the pre-suggestive performance pattern 4, and after the start of the pre-suggestive performance pattern, a performance display prompting whether or not the dedicated pattern of the words "full screen" will stop is made. After that, as shown in (a), the "full screen" dedicated pattern is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen. Subsequently, when the full screen development is executed as shown in (b), instead of the main character appearing, the character is swallowed by the center of the tornado as shown in (c) and looks like the tornado from directly above. It changes to a spiral full screen display. After that, as shown in (d), the main binding is removed in front of the spiral background image, and a temporary stop display is performed. plunge into. The exclusive pseudo-run differs from the normal pseudo-run in that a pseudo-continuous variation effect is executed using a spiral exclusive background shown in (d). As a modification, instead of executing the exclusive pseudo-run, the game may enter a "special zone" in which a spiral exclusive background is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation periods. In this case, the pre-suggestion effect pattern 5 is configured to be selectable by prefetching when the lottery value corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to stay in the special zone is reserved. For example, prior suggestive effect pattern 5 is selected and transferred to the special zone in the pattern variation before the hold that allows staying in the special zone is digested, and then the hold that triggered the transition to the special zone is digested. Pattern variation is started while staying in the special zone.

FIG. 48 is a diagram schematically showing the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 6. FIG. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 6, the effect display is performed in which the dedicated pattern of "full screen" slides down without stopping. FIGS. 48(a) and (b) are the same as FIGS. 46(a) and (b), respectively, and an effect display is made to prompt whether or not the dedicated symbol of "full screen" will stop. Subsequently, as shown in (c) of FIG. 48, a performance display is performed in which the exclusive pattern does not stop at the center of the screen and slides down, and then the screen returns to the screen before starting the preliminary suggestive performance as shown in (d). At this time, the tornadoes displayed on the left and right sides of (c) disappear, and the screen frame that is displayed small in the center of the screen after being swallowed by the tornado returns to the front, and the tornado disappears naturally. The prior suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "disappearance 1".

FIG. 49 is a diagram schematically showing part of the effect process of the prior suggestive effect pattern 7. FIG. The display mode at the start of the prior suggesting effect pattern 7 is the same as the prior suggesting effect patterns 1 to 6, and is the same as in FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b). In FIG. 49, as shown in (a), "normal reach" occurs in which the main layout is in the reach mode within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. . Subsequently, as shown in (b), a hand with index and middle fingers sticking out from behind the smoke is displayed, and as shown in (c), the main character appears and unleashes a special move. For example, it is suggested that when the main character unleashes the second special move (special move β), the game will shift to a normal simulated run with a relatively high degree of expectation. After that, as shown in (d), a normal pseudo-run is started. Therefore, in the prior suggestion production pattern 7, the timing for ending the prior suggestion production is different from the above-mentioned prior suggestion production patterns 1 and 4 in that it is a normal reach instead of the movable character (lower dragon fanning) or the dedicated pattern (stop fanning). Other than that, it is the same as the production process of the prior suggestive production patterns 1 and 4. In prior suggestive effect patterns 1, 4, and 7 in which normal pseudo-runs are executed, both pseudo-run A in FIG. 43(d) and pseudo-run B in FIG. or pseudo run D may be executable. In advance suggestive production patterns 1, 4, and 7, for example, a production lottery is executed as to which one of a plurality of types of normal pseudo-runs (for example, pseudo-runs A to D) is to be executed, and a plurality of types of normal pseudo-runs are performed based on the lottery results. one of the series is executed. The selection tendencies of the plurality of types of normal pseudo-runs A to D may be common regardless of the prior suggestive performance pattern, or may differ according to the prior suggestive performance pattern. For example, it may be configured such that the pseudo-continuation A is likely to be selected in the pre-suggestive effect pattern 1, the pseudo-continuous B is likely to be selected in the pre-suggestive effect pattern 4, and the pseudo-continuous C is likely to be selected in the pre-suggestive effect pattern 7. .

In advance suggestion effect pattern 8, full screen development is executed with the occurrence of normal reach as a trigger, and then the main character unleashes the third special move (special move γ) to generate sudden strongest. Therefore, the pre-suggestive performance pattern 8 is common with the pre-suggestive performance pattern 7 in that the pre-suggestive performance ends with the normal reach as a trigger, and is common with the pre-suggestive performance pattern 2 in that the sudden strongest is generated after the full screen develops. In prior suggestive effect pattern 8 as well, similar to prior suggestive effect pattern 2, the display color of smoke can be purple, red, or gold when the full screen development is executed.

FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing part of the production process of the prior suggestive production pattern 9. FIG. In prior suggestion effect pattern 9, as shown in (a), the prior suggestion effect in which tornadoes are displayed on the left and right sides of the screen continues until "normal reach" where the main design is in the reach mode. Therefore, the pre-suggestive effect pattern 9 is common to the pre-suggestive effect patterns 7 and 8 in the effect process up to the occurrence of "normal reach". However, in the prior suggestion performance pattern 9, the prior suggestion performance does not end with the "normal reach" as a trigger, and the prior suggestion performance continues until the "SP development suggestion" is executed after the normal reach. (b) shows the state in which the pre-suggestion production continues at the start of the "SP development suggestion", and the "SP Development Suggestion" is started. After that, with the start of the SP development suggestion as a trigger, full-screen development is executed as shown in (c), a hand is displayed with the index and middle fingers sticking out from behind the smoke, and the main character appears. Unleashes the third special move (Special γ). After that, a sudden strongest occurs as shown in (d). When the full screen is developed in (c), the display color of the smoke changes to gold, so that the occurrence of the strongest sudden event may be definitely reported.

In this way, in the pre-suggestive production patterns 1 to 9 in which the pre-suggestive production is started at the start of the fluctuation, the timing for ending the pre-suggestive production may be different, and depending on the difference in the ending opportunity, there may be different types of production that can be suggested. The types can also be different. Further, the performances that trigger the end of the prior suggesting performance are executed at different timings, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation (or the start of the prior suggesting performance) to the timing that triggers the end of the prior suggesting performance can be different. For example, "movable character (lower dragon fanning)" and "dedicated pattern (stop fanning)" are relatively short time from the start of fluctuation (for example, less than 2 seconds, less than 3 seconds, less than 5 seconds) Early timing after elapse can be run with In patterns with a short elapsed time until reaching the end trigger of these pre-suggestive productions, the exclusive production may not be executed after the pre-suggestive production ends, and there is a possibility that the high-expectation production will be executed after the pre-suggestive production ends. is low, it can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is low. Furthermore, if the duration of the pre-suggestion effect is short, the dedicated effect may not be executed after the pre-suggestion effect ends, and when the character movement (lower dragon fanning) or dedicated pattern (stop fanning) occurs It can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is low. On the other hand, the normal reach and the SP development suggestion can be executed at a late timing after a relatively long time (for example, 2 seconds or more, 5 seconds or more, or 10 seconds or more) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation. In patterns with a long elapsed time until reaching the end of these pre-suggestion productions, after the pre-suggestion production ends, it will always shift to "normal pseudo-continuation" or "suddenly strongest", so the expectation of a big hit is high. is suggested. In other words, when the duration of the pre-suggestive performance is long, the special performance is always executed, so it can be suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high when the normal reach occurs while the pre-suggestive performance continues. In this way, by providing a difference in the type of performance to be suggested according to the end timing of the pre-suggestive performance, it is possible to achieve a high degree of expectation in the case where the pre-suggestive performance does not end early and continues. You can suggest to the person in advance.

FIG. 51 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the pre-suggestive effect patterns 10 and 11. FIG. In the prior suggesting performance patterns 10 and 11, the prior suggesting performance starts in the middle of the quasi-continuous variation performance, and the prior suggesting performance ends when all the three pattern rows of the main layout temporarily stop. Pseudo-continuous variation effect is to change the main design again after a temporary stop display that makes it look as if all three pattern rows of the main design are stopped, and it is as if multiple patterns are displayed within one pattern variation period. It is a variable effect that makes it look as if a change has been made. First, as shown in (a), with the start of re-fluctuation of the main layout related to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, a shake effect is executed in which the screen frame is rotated and swayed in small increments, suggesting that the screen frame will be blown away. do. The prior suggestion effect is started by this shake effect. Next, as shown in (b), a tornado is generated on the left and right sides of the screen, and an effect display is performed in which the screen frame is blown away toward the back of the tornado. (b) is an effect process similar to the above-described prior suggestion effect patterns 1-9. In the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen in (b), the main layout related to the pseudo-continuous variation effect is displayed variably, and the special pattern of the word "continue" suggesting the continuation of the pseudo-continuation stops. A display is made to incite the rejection. Subsequently, as shown in (c), when the "Continue" special symbol is temporarily stopped to suggest the continuation of the pseudo-continuation, the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuation triggers the violent movement of the tornado within the screen and disappears. The prior suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "disappearance 2". After that, as shown in (d), the display mode returns to the same display mode as before the start of the pre-suggestion effect, and the notice effect (notice A) of "chance up!", which suggests that the chance of winning a big hit will increase, is executed. be done. Therefore, in the advance suggestive effect patterns 10 and 11, execution of the advance notice effect A for increasing the chance is suggested in advance by the start of the advance suggestive effect. The advance notice effect A may not be a display effect on the screen, but may be a sound effect in which the sound of "chance up" is output, or may be a role actuation effect in which a movable role such as Shimoryu is activated. good.

Each of the pre-suggestion effect patterns 10 and 11 has a different timing to trigger the start of the pre-suggestion effect. In the prior suggestive performance pattern 10, in three pseudo continuous variations, the prior suggestive performance is started when the first pseudo continuous variation is completed and the second pseudo continuous variation is started, and the second pseudo continuous variation is performed. The advance suggestion effect ends with the end of the continuous variation (temporary stop) as a trigger. On the other hand, in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 11, the pre-suggestion effect is started when the second pseudo-continuous variation ends and the third pseudo-continuous variation starts, and the third pseudo-continuous variation ends (temporary Triggered by the stop), the prior suggestion production ends. In a series of pseudo-continuous variation effects, only one of the prior suggestive effect patterns 10 and 11 may be executed, or both may be executed. In the latter case, the prior suggestion effect is executed in both the second and third pseudo-continuous variation effects, and the advance notice effect A for chance up is executed. In the prior suggestive effect patterns 10 and 11, since the dedicated effect is not executed after the prior suggestive effect is completed, the display color of the tornado during at least one of the continuation and the end of the prior suggestive effect is purple, red, gold, or the like. There is no change to the display color suggesting that the degree of expectation is high.

FIG. 52 is a diagram schematically showing the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 12. As shown in FIG. In the pre-suggestion production pattern 12, the pre-suggestion production starts when the development mission starts after pretending that the main layout has been removed, and X seconds after the development mission starts (for example, less than 1 second or 2 seconds). Seconds), the preliminary suggestive effect ends, and the advance notice effect (notice B) is executed in which the display color of the title of the advanced mission changes to a color suggesting a high degree of expectation. First, as shown in (a), with the title display indicating the start of the development mission as a trigger, a shake effect is executed in which the screen frame is rotated and shaken in small increments, and as shown in (b), the screen frame moves to the depths of the tornado. A production display is made as if the player is blown away toward the player. Subsequently, as shown in (c), the tornado moves violently within the screen and disappears toward the center of the screen in the display mode of "disappearance 3", and the prior suggestion effect ends. After that, as shown in (d), the display mode returns to the same display mode as before the start of the pre-suggestion effect, and the characters and frames of the title display indicating the start of the development mission change to high-expectation colors such as red and gold. An announcement effect (announcement B) is executed. Therefore, in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12, execution of the pre-suggestion effect B in which the display color of the title is changed by the start of the pre-suggestion effect is pre-suggested. In addition, in the display mode of "Disappearance 3" shown in (c), the tornado disappears toward the title display in the center of the screen, so that the display color of the title changes. is pre-suggested by the display mode (disappearance 3) of . In the pre-suggestive effect pattern 12, since the dedicated effect is not executed after the pre-suggestive effect ends, the display color of the tornado during at least one of the continuation and the end of the pre-suggestive effect is purple, and red, gold, etc. are expected. The display color does not change to suggest that the degree is high.

In the prior suggesting effect pattern 13, the prior suggesting effect is started similarly to the prior suggesting effect pattern 12, but the end timing of the prior suggesting effect and the advance notice effect to be suggested are different. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 13, the pre-suggestion effect ends after Y seconds (for example, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) after the start of the development mission, and when the pre-suggestion effect ends, the variable object and the suspended object are displayed. A pending change effect (announcement C) in which the display mode (shape, pattern, color, etc.) of the object changes is executed. For example, by changing the shape of the variable object or pending object, changing it to an image that imitates the item or character that appears in a specific production, or an image that includes text, the change after the variable or pending object is digested It is suggested that a specific production is executed in . In addition, by changing the pattern of the variable object or suspended object to a giraffe pattern, or by changing the display color to red or gold, etc., it is expected that the variation will be a big hit when the variation or suspension is completed. degree is suggested. In the pre-suggestive effect pattern 13, since the pre-suggestive effect C different from the pre-suggestive effect pattern 12 is executed, the display mode at the end of the pre-suggestive effect is different from the pre-suggestive effect pattern 12, suggesting pending change. 4”, the prior suggestion effect ends. In the display mode of "disappearance 4", for example, the tornado moves violently within the screen and disappears toward the display area of the variable object and the pending object at the bottom of the screen. As a result, execution of the advance notice effect C in which the variable object or the pending object changes is suggested in advance by the display mode (disappearance 4) at the end of the advance suggestion effect. Therefore, when either of the pre-suggestive effect patterns 12 and 13 is executed, the display mode (disappearance 3 or disappearance 4) at the end of the pre-suggestive effect differs depending on the pattern, and the difference in the display mode at the end of the pre-suggestive effect is suggested. It is possible to suggest in advance whether the target announcement effect is announcement B or announcement C. In particular, by executing the pre-suggestion performance such that the tornado moves toward the place where the performance to be the suggestion is executed, it is possible to suggest to the player which performance to be the suggestion is easy to understand. In the prior suggestive effect pattern 13 as well, since the exclusive effect is not executed after the prior suggestive effect ends, the display color of the tornado during at least one of the continuation of the prior suggestive effect and the end of the prior suggestive effect is purple, instead of red, gold, or the like. The display color does not change to suggest that the degree of expectation is high.

The prior suggestive performance pattern 14 starts the prior suggestive performance in the same manner as the prior suggestive performance patterns 12 and 13, but differs in the end timing of the prior suggestive performance, and the suggestive object suddenly becomes the strongest after the development of the full screen. different in In advance suggestion production pattern 14, the advance suggestion production ends after Z seconds (10 seconds or more, 20 seconds or more, etc.) from the start of the development mission, and the above-mentioned title change production (notice B) or pending change production (notice C) is performed. The pre-suggestion effect ends after the timing at which is executed. The end timing of the pre-suggestion effect may be in the second half of the advanced mission, after the advanced mission is completed, or after the mission is failed and the main layout is removed and the game is temporarily stopped. In this case, it may be a production process in which full-screen development is executed after the mission fails, so that the player appears to be out of the game and then resurrects to suddenly become the strongest. The production process after the full screen development is the same as the pre-suggestive production pattern 9, etc. For example, as shown in FIG. After the hand with the middle finger sticking out is displayed, the main character appears and the third special move (special move γ) is unleashed, and then the strongest sudden attack occurs as shown in FIG. In addition, when the full screen is developed in FIG. 50(c), the display color of the smoke changes to gold, so that the occurrence of the strongest sudden event can be definitely notified.

FIG. 53 is a diagram schematically showing the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 15. As shown in FIG. In the prior suggestion production pattern 15, the prior suggestion production starts when the SP development suggestion starts, and the prior suggestion production ends when the SP development suggestion does not develop to the SP reach but becomes normal development (weak reach). do. First, as shown in (a), at the timing when the SP development suggestion to instigate SP reach or normal development is started, the screen frame is rotated and shaked in small increments. . Next, as shown in (b), a tornado is generated on the left and right sides of the screen, and an effect display is performed in which the screen frame is blown away toward the back of the tornado. After that, as shown in (c), it is suggested that it normally develops within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (d), the tornado disappears with the start of the weak reach, which is the normal development destination, and the display mode returns to the same display mode as before the start of the prior suggestion effect. In the pre-suggestion performance pattern 15, the tornado display is extinguished so that the tornado loses momentum and disappears naturally. In the prior suggestion effect pattern 15, since there is no effect to be suggested, the display color of the tornado remains purple, which suggests a low degree of expectation, and the tornado disappears while the purple display color is maintained, resulting in a prior suggestion. The performance ends.

In the pre-suggestion production patterns 16 to 18, as in the pre-suggestion production pattern 15, the pre-suggestion production starts with the start of the SP development suggestion, and the SP development suggestion does not develop into the SP reach, but the normal development (weak reach). Become. However, the prior suggestion production does not end at the start of the weak reach, but after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the weak reach (after X seconds, after Y seconds, after Z seconds), the prior suggestion production ends and the advance notice production B, announcement effect C or sudden strongest after full screen development occurs. The end timing of the prior suggestive effect, the end effect, and the effect process after the end of the prior suggestive effect patterns 16 to 18 are the same as those of the prior suggestive effect patterns 12 to 14 relating to the advanced missions, respectively. In the pre-suggestion production pattern 16, as in the pre-suggestion production pattern 12, the pre-suggestion production ends after X seconds (for example, less than 1 second or less than 2 seconds) from the start of the weak reach, and the title display is red or gold. An announcement effect (announcement B) that changes to the expected color is executed. In the pre-suggestion production pattern 17, as in the pre-suggestion production pattern 13, the pre-suggestion production ends after Y seconds (for example, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) after the start of the weak reach, and the pre-suggestion production ends. Triggered by this, a pending change effect (announcement C) is executed in which the display mode (shape, pattern, color, etc.) of the variable object or the pending object changes. In the pre-suggestive performance pattern 18, as in the pre-suggestive performance pattern 14, the pre-suggestive performance ends after Z seconds (10 seconds or more, 20 seconds or more, etc.) from the start of the weak reach, and the sudden strongest occurs after the full screen develops. . In the pre-suggestion performance pattern 18, the pre-suggestion performance may end in the second half of the weak reach or after the end of the weak reach, and the continuation failure occurs after the weak reach, the main layout is disengaged, and the performance is temporarily stopped and then revived. It may be a production process in which a sudden strongest occurs.

FIG. 54 is a diagram schematically showing the production process of the pre-suggestion production pattern 19. As shown in FIG. In the prior suggestion performance pattern 19, the prior suggestion performance starts when the SP development suggestion starts, and the prior suggestion performance ends when the SP development suggestion develops into the SP reach and the main character appears. First, as shown in (a), at the timing when the SP development suggestion to instigate SP reach or normal development is started, the screen frame is rotated in small increments to shake, and then a shake effect is executed. As shown in (b), it is suggested that the SP develops within the screen frame that is displayed small in the center of the screen with tornadoes occurring on the left and right sides of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (c), the tornado disappears at the timing when the main character (protagonist) appears, and the display mode returns to the same display mode as before the prior suggestion effect started. At this time, the pre-suggestion effect ends in the display mode of "disappearance 2" in which the tornado moves violently within the screen and disappears with the appearance of the main character as a trigger. After that, as shown in (d), the battle ready-to-win is started, and an announcement effect (announcement A) of "chance up!" suggesting that the chance of winning a big hit is high is executed. The ending effect of the prior suggesting effect and the advance notice effect A in the prior suggesting effect pattern 19 are similar to the prior suggesting effect patterns 10 and 11 .

FIG. 55 is a diagram schematically showing the rendering process of the prior suggestive rendering pattern 20. As shown in FIG. The prior suggestion performance pattern 20 is different from the prior suggestion performance pattern 19 in that the prior suggestion performance starts with the start of the SP development suggestion, and the prior suggestion performance continues even after the SP reach develops and the main character appears. . First, the pre-suggestion effect is started with the start of the SP development suggestion, and as shown in (a), the SP is developed within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen with tornadoes occurring on the left and right sides of the screen. is suggested. Subsequently, as shown in (b), the main character (protagonist) appears, but the tornadoes on the left and right sides of the screen do not disappear, and the main character appears while the pre-suggestion effect continues. In other words, the protagonist appears within the screen frame that is displayed small in the center of the screen. After that, as shown in (c), full-screen development is executed, and after the main character appears from behind the smoke sticking out his index and middle fingers and unleashes the third special move (special γ), as shown in (d). A sudden strongest occurs. When the full screen is developed in (c), the display color of the smoke changes to gold, so that the occurrence of the strongest sudden event may be definitely reported. 54(b) or 55(a), in which the development of the SP is suggested, is common to the prior suggestive effect pattern 19, while the prior suggestive effect pattern 20 is shown in FIG. 54(c) or 55(b). It is different from the prior suggestion production pattern 19 in that tornadoes remain on the left and right sides of the screen at the timing of the appearance of the main character in (1) and suddenly develop to the strongest. As a result, if the pre-suggestion effect continues and the tornado remains at the time when the main character appears after the development of the SP, the pre-suggestion effect pattern 20 is determined, so that the continuation of the pre-suggestion effect makes the sudden strongest event. It can be suggested in advance that Further, when either of the pre-suggestive effect patterns 19 and 20 is executed, whether or not to continue the pre-suggestive effect at the point of appearance of the main character becomes the turning point of the effect. At the point of time when the main character (b) appears, it is possible to arouse expectations as to whether the tornado will continue or not.

The pre-suggestive performance patterns 21-23 differ from the pre-suggestive performance patterns 12-14 in that the pre-suggestive performance is started at the start of the battle reach, but are otherwise the same as the pre-suggestive performance patterns 12-14. configured to In advance suggestive effect patterns 21 to 23, the advance suggestive effect ends after a predetermined time (after X seconds, after Y seconds, after Z seconds) from the start of the battle reach, and advance notice effect B, notice effect C or full screen development is performed. The strongest performance later occurs. That is, the end timing of the pre-suggestive effect, the end effect, and the effect process after the end of the pre-suggestive effect patterns 21 to 23 are the same as those of the pre-suggestive effect patterns 12 to 14 related to the advanced missions, respectively. In the pre-suggestion effect pattern 21, as in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 12, the pre-suggestion effect ends after X seconds (for example, less than 1 second or less than 2 seconds) from the start of the battle reach, and the title is displayed in red or gold. An announcement effect (announcement B) that changes to the expected color is executed. In the pre-suggestion production pattern 22, as in the pre-suggestion production pattern 13, the pre-suggestion production ends after Y seconds (for example, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) after the start of the battle reach, and the pre-suggestion production ends. Triggered by this, a pending change effect (announcement C) is executed in which the display mode (shape, pattern, color, etc.) of the variable object or the pending object changes. In the pre-suggestive effect pattern 23, as in the pre-suggestive effect pattern 14, the pre-suggestive effect ends after Z seconds (10 seconds or more, 20 seconds or more, etc.) from the start of the weak reach, and the full screen development is executed. In the case of the pre-suggestion production pattern 23, the strongest production (the second half of Battlereach) is executed after the development of the full screen, rather than the sudden strongest production occurring after the development of the full screen. In the pre-suggestion production pattern 23, since the pre-suggestion production ends in the middle of the first half of the battle reach, rather than the strongest production suddenly occurring, the production process that becomes the strongest production in the second half of the battle reach without any pre-suggestion production. does not change. Therefore, the pre-suggestion effect pattern 23 is different from other pre-suggestion effect patterns in that the strongest effect is executed instead of the sudden strongest effect. Further, in the pre-suggestion effect pattern 23, the types of enemy characters appearing in the first half of the battle reach before full screen development are configured to be the same as the types of enemy characters appearing in the latter half of the battle reach after full screen development. It is configured so that it will not be shifted to the second half of the strongest ritual reach after the screen development. On the other hand, in advance suggestion production patterns 2, 8, 9, 14, 18, and 20 that are "suddenly strongest", the "strongest ceremony reach second half" and the "battle reach second half" are executed after the sudden strongest event occurs. Any of the enemy characters A to F can appear in the second half of the battle reach.

In this way, even in the pre-suggestive performance patterns 10 to 23 in which the pre-suggestive performance is started in the middle of the pattern variation, the timing for ending the prior-suggestive performance may differ, and depending on the difference in the timing for ending, the performance that can be suggested. types can also be different. Further, the performances that trigger the end of the prior suggesting performance are executed at different timings, and the elapsed time from the start of the prior suggesting performance (or the start of variation) to the timing that triggers the end of the prior suggesting performance can be different. For example, in a pattern in which advance notice effects A, B, and C are subject to suggestion, it can be executed at an early timing after a relatively short period of time has elapsed from the start of the advance suggestion effect. In a pattern with a short elapsed time until reaching the end opportunity of the prior suggesting performance, the exclusive performance is not executed after the end of the prior suggesting performance, so it can be suggested that the expectation of a big win is low. In other words, if the duration of the pre-suggestive performance is short, the exclusive performance may not be executed after the pre-suggestive performance ends, suggesting that the expectation of a big hit at the end of the pre-suggestive performance is low. . On the other hand, in a pattern in which the strongest sudden effect or the strongest effect is a suggestion target, it can be executed at a late timing after a relatively long time (for example, 10 seconds or more) has elapsed from the start of the pre-suggestive effect. In patterns with a long elapsed time until reaching the end of these pre-suggestion productions, the expectation that it will be a big hit is high because it will always shift to "sudden strongest" or "strongest production" after the end of the pre-suggestion production. It is suggested. In other words, if the duration of the pre-suggestion production is long, the special production will always be executed, so if the development mission, weak reach, or battle reach progresses while the pre-suggestion production continues, it will be a big hit at that point. It can be suggested that there is a high degree of expectation for In this way, by providing a difference in the type of performance to be suggested according to the end timing of the pre-suggestive performance, it is possible to achieve a high degree of expectation in the case where the pre-suggestive performance does not end early and continues. You can suggest to the person in advance.

The above-mentioned advance notice effects A to C are configured so that the degree of expectation of chance up differs between when the advance suggestion effect is ended and when it is executed without the advance suggestion effect ending. may be For example, when the advance notice effects A to C are executed with the end of the advance suggestive effect as a trigger, the probability of the advance notice effect suggesting a high degree of expectation becomes relatively high. On the other hand, when the advance notice effects A to C are executed without being triggered by the end of the advance suggestive effect, the probability of the advance notice effect suggesting high expectations may be relatively low. .

In addition, the probability that the full-screen development is executed with the end of the pre-suggestion production as a trigger and the sudden strongest or the strongest production is executed becomes higher as at least one of the start timing and end timing of the pre-suggestion production approaches the end of the pattern fluctuation. may be set. For example, the probability that the prior suggestion performance patterns 2, 8, and 9 that suddenly become the strongest after the prior suggestion performance is started with the start of fluctuation as a trigger may be set relatively low. On the other hand, the probability that the pre-suggestion effect pattern 23, which is the strongest effect, is selected after the pre-suggestion effect is started with the start of the battle reach, may be set relatively high.

The above-mentioned advance suggestion effect patterns 1 to 23 can be executed, for example, during a normal game in a normal probability state (low probability state) and a normal ball entry state (low ball entry state), and one symbol during the normal game. The pre-suggestion performance starts and ends within the variable period, and the performance targeted for suggestion is executed. Only one of the aforementioned pre-suggestive effect patterns may be executed within one symbol variation period, or a plurality of them may be executed within one symbol variation period. For example, after the pre-suggestive performance patterns 3 and 6 having no performance to be suggested are executed at the beginning of the variable performance, any one of the pre-suggestive performance patterns 12 to 23 may be executed after the middle stage of the variable performance. Further, at least one of the prior suggesting effect patterns 10 and 11 may be executed after the prior suggesting effect patterns 1, 4, and 7 are executed and shifted to the normal pseudo-run. Similarly, at least one of the prior suggestive effect patterns 10 and 11 may be executed after the prior suggestive effect pattern 5 is executed and shifted to the dedicated pseudo-continent. Further, after the end of the normal pseudo-continuation or the dedicated pseudo-continuation, any of the pre-suggestion production patterns 12 to 23 may be executed after the middle of the variable production. Further, after the pre-suggestive performance patterns 12, 13, 15 to 17, 19 without sudden transition to the strongest are executed in the middle of the variable performance, any of the pre-suggestive performance patterns 21 to 23 is executed at the end of the variable performance. may be performed. In other words, after the first prior suggestion performance starts and ends within one symbol variation period, the second prior suggestion performance may start and end within the same symbol variation period.

The pre-suggestion effect may be executable during the normal game in the probability variable state (high probability state) or easy-ball-entering state (high-ball-entering state). Also, the start and end of the pre-suggestion effect and the execution of the specific effect to be the suggestion target may be executed over a plurality of symbol variation periods during the normal game. For example, if one pattern change time is extremely short due to the easy-to-enter state, the pre-suggestion effect ends with a pattern change different from the pattern change at which the pre-suggestion effect starts, and the target is identified as a suggestion target. production may be executed. In other words, the pre-suggestion effect may be continued over a plurality of symbol variations, or the pre-suggestion effect may be continuously displayed when the symbol variation is stopped.

FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing the first half of the rendering process of prior suggestive rendering over multiple variations. First, as shown in (a), the pattern variation is started, and with the start of the pattern variation as a trigger, a tornado is generated on the left and right sides of the screen as shown in (b), and the screen frame is blown away toward the back of the tornado. A performance display is performed. At this time, the main layout is superimposed and displayed at a position in front of the screen frame, not within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (c), the main design stops changing while the tornado display on the left and right sides of the screen continues, and while the tornado display on the left and right sides of the screen continues, the next pattern changes as shown in (d). be started. At this time, by superimposing and displaying the main layout in front of the screen frame, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the main layout has stopped fluctuating in (c).

FIG. 57 is a diagram schematically showing the second half of the effect process of the prior suggestive effect over multiple variations. This figure shows the continuation of the production process of FIG. 56, and shows the production process in which the advance suggestive production is completed with the start of the pattern variation, and the high-expectation-level production to be suggested is executed. First, as shown in (a), while the tornado display continues on the left and right sides of the screen, the main design starts to change, and then, as shown in (b), the tornado disappears and the entire screen turns into smoke. Full screen development wrapped is performed. After that, as shown in (c), an image simulating the production button 109 is displayed in the center of the screen to prompt the player to perform an input operation. When an input operation to the effect button 109 is performed or an operation period in which the input operation of the effect button 109 is valid ends, a specific effect to be suggested is executed as shown in (d). In the example shown in this figure, a win-lose branch effect is executed for definitively informing that the main character will appear and a big win will occur. As another example, the appearance of an enemy character at the timing of (d) may suggest development to battle reach. Also, at the timing of (c), an image simulating the effect lever 112 may be displayed in the center of the screen in order to prompt the operation of the effect lever 112, and after the effect lever 112 is operated, a win-lose branch effect may be executed. The degree of expectation of a big win after the effect lever 112 is displayed at the timing of (c) may be higher than the degree of expectation of a big win after the effect button 109 is displayed at the timing of (c). In the example of this figure as well, by changing the display color of the smoke to red or gold when the full screen is developed in (b), it may be suggested that there is a high expectation of a big win in the win-lose split effect.

FIG. 58 is a diagram schematically showing an effect process in which a specific effect does not occur after the end of the pre-suggestive effect. In this figure, the pre-suggestion effect does not continue over a plurality of pattern variations, and the pre-suggestion effect ends when the main design stops changing. First, as shown in (a), the pattern variation is started, and with the start of the pattern variation as a trigger, a tornado is generated on the left and right sides of the screen as shown in (b), and the screen frame is blown away toward the back of the tornado. A performance display is performed. At this time, the main layout is superimposed and displayed at a position in front of the screen frame, not within the screen frame displayed small in the center of the screen. Subsequently, as shown in (c), at the timing when the main layout stops fluctuating, the tornadoes on the left and right sides of the screen disappear, the display returns to the display mode before the start of the pre-suggestive effect, and the main layout stops fluctuating. In this way, the prior suggestion performance is terminated without continuing the prior suggestion performance as if nothing had happened.

The effect process shown in FIGS. 56 to 58 may be executed triggered by prefetching of the pending lottery value. For example, when a specific hold corresponding to a lottery value that enables execution of a win-lose branch effect is read in advance, a prior suggestion effect is started with a pattern variation before the pattern change in which the specific hold is digested, and the specification is performed. The pre-suggestion production may be continued until the pattern variation in which the suspension is digested. After that, the pre-suggestion effect may be terminated with the pattern variation that the specific suspension is completed, and then the win-lose branch effect may be executed.

The start timing and end timing of the pre-suggestion effect are not limited to during the normal game with symbol variation, and the pre-suggestion effect may be started and ended during the special game. For example, the pre-suggestion performance may be started during the special game, and the pre-suggestion performance may be ended with the end of a specific number of rounds during the special game as a trigger, and then the continuation performance of round continuation may be executed. For example, when there are a 4R jackpot including 4 unit games and a 10R jackpot including 10 unit games as the types of special games, the prior suggestion performance is ended with the end of the 4th unit game as a trigger, and 5. An effect may be executed to encourage the execution of the unit game after the first time. In this case, the display mode of the end performance of the pre-suggestion performance is made different between the case of the 4R big win and the case of the 10R big win, for example, in the case of the 10R big win, the display color of the pre-suggestion performance is gold or rainbow. By changing the color, it may be suggested in advance that there is a high degree of expectation that the fifth and subsequent unit games will be continued. In addition, before the start of the special game, for example, before the stop display of the symbol for the big win, the prior suggestion performance is started, and the prior suggestion performance is continued when the symbol indicating the big win is stopped and displayed, and the prior suggestion after the start of the special game. By ending the effect, it may be suggested in advance that there is a high degree of expectation that the unit game will continue after the fifth time. In addition, instead of ending the pre-suggestion production during the execution of the special game, the pre-suggestion production is ended in the special game end demonstration, and after the special game is finished, the production that arouses whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state. may be executed. In addition, if the lottery value withheld during the execution of the special game is in a so-called "suspended inner renso" state corresponding to a big hit, the prior suggestion performance is continued without ending the prior suggestion performance at the end demonstration of the special game. Then, the pre-suggestion performance may be ended during the normal game after the end of the special game, and the win-lose branch performance may be executed.

According to a certain aspect of the present embodiment, there may be a plurality of effects that can be executed during the progress of the game, and it may be possible to execute a pre-suggestion effect that pre-suggests execution of the plurality of effects. Triggered by the execution of the pre-suggestion effect, one of the plurality of effects may be executed, and none of the plurality of effects may be executed. When there are a first effect and a second effect as a plurality of effects, it is possible to execute a pre-suggestive effect that preliminarily suggests execution of the first effect or the second effect, and with the execution of the pre-suggestive effect as a trigger, the first There may be a case where the effect is executed, a case where the second effect is executed, and a case where neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed. The display mode at the start of the pre-suggestion performance is the same when the first performance is executed, when the second performance is executed, and when neither the first performance nor the second performance is executed. There may be The display mode at the end of the preliminary suggestive effect may differ depending on whether the first effect is executed, the second effect is executed, or neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed. may Here, various effects may correspond to the plurality of effects to be suggested by the pre-suggestive effect.

As an example of the effect to be suggested in the pre-suggestion effect, a temporary stop display that makes it look as if the decorative pattern has been displayed in a pseudo continuous variation effect, and a pseudo continuous dedicated symbol that suggests the content of the effect after the temporary stop in the temporary stop display is displayed as a temporary stop. In addition, in the reach variation production with the reach mode of the decorative pattern, the pre-reach notice executed at the timing before reaching the reach mode and the post-reach notice executed after reaching the reach mode also fall under the production to be suggested. sell. Specific examples of pre-reach notices and post-reach notices include a cut-in effect in which words suggesting expectations or character images are displayed for a relatively short period of time (about a few seconds), or entering or developing a state of higher expectations. It is a specific zone rush effect that suggests to do. In these advance notice effects, a type of character corresponding to the degree of expectation may be displayed, or characters, window frames, and the like may be displayed in display colors corresponding to the degree of expectation. In addition, changing the background display, adding a belt-like display that indicates the zone during stay, and displaying an object image that suggests high expectations on the screen, etc. state) may be shown, or a role product actuation effect for activating the movable accessory 66 may be executed. In addition, when a decorative lamp is applied to the movable accessory 66, the movable accessory may be operated while being lit in a display color corresponding to the degree of expectation.

Examples of effects to be suggested by the pre-suggestive effect include various effects that are executed during a so-called super ready-to-win effect. Variation production accompanied by super reach production includes production before reach, production after reach, and development production after reach (so-called super reach production), and super reach production is composed of multiple stages of development production executed after reach. Sometimes. In addition, in the pre-reach production and post-reach production before the development to the super reach production, the pre-suggestion production may be completed and the production to be suggested may be executed, and in the development production after the reach, the pre-suggestion production may be completed. A presentation to be suggested may be executed. The after-reach production may include a common production that is at least partially common to the production content executed in the so-called normal reach production, which is not a super reach production, and development to the next stage after the execution of the common production (that is, super It is also possible to produce an effect that raises expectations by executing a notice effect suggesting development to reach effect). When the development production has multiple stages, at least one of the multiple stages may be the suggestion target of the prior suggestive presentation, or two or more of the multiple stages or each stage may be the suggestion target of the prior suggestion presentation. In this case, the start and end of the prior suggestion effect may be repeated multiple times according to the multiple stages of effect. Furthermore, a wide variety of super ready-to-win effects may be realized by preparing multiple types of development effects, varying the number of stages of the development effects, or changing the display order of the multiple types of development effects. For example, a reach-up effect may be executed in which the development effect after the reach is stepped up by continuously executing a plurality of types of development effects in order. Also, during the execution of the development effects of each stage, and at the timing between the development effects of each stage, even if the above-mentioned cut-in effects, temporary stop display of decorative symbols, temporary stop display of pseudo consecutive exclusive symbols, etc. are executed. good. In addition, in the variable effect accompanying the super reach effect, high-expectation display colors such as gold and giraffe patterns may be used as the display mode of the cut-in effect and the pseudo-continuous exclusive pattern. If the performance to be suggested by the pre-suggestion performance is a high-expectation performance with a high expectation of winning, the display mode at the end of the pre-suggestion performance is changed to a display mode suggesting the high expectation. good too.

The effect to be suggested in the pre-suggestive effect may be executed at the timing immediately before the pattern fluctuation stops. Therefore, the pre-suggestion effect may be continued until the timing immediately before the pattern fluctuation stops. The effect executed immediately before the change is stopped may be an effect that definitely notifies the result of the change. may be a specific operation effect that can be started with the This specific operation effect is, for example, a role product actuation effect in which the movable accessory 66 is activated, and when the role product actuation effect is executed in a lighting color such as rainbow color, the win/loss result is accompanied by a big hit or a certainty. A big hit is definitely reported. On the other hand, if the performance is performed in lighting colors other than rainbow colors, such as white, blue, green, red, etc., it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation that the winning result will be a big hit. It may be suggested that the lighting color of the role object in which the degree of expectation is activated increases in order of white, blue, green, and red, and in the case of these lighting colors other than rainbow color, the winning result is a big hit. It may be suggested that it is not certain that A display that prompts the player to perform an input operation (for example, display of a button image simulating an operation button, display of the words "Press!", etc.) and a specific operation effect that can be executed after that are performed under the situation where the pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. It may be executed, or it may be executed under a situation in which the symbols are temporarily stopped in a losing mode or a winning mode. When the specific operation performance is executed under the condition that the pattern is temporarily stopped in the missing mode, it may be a resurrection performance or a relief performance that gives a big win after making the player think that the game has failed. When the resurrection effect or relief effect is executed, the pattern in the temporarily stopped state may be accompanied by a pseudo-continuous change after that. In other words, when the specific operation effect is executed under the condition that the symbols are temporarily stopped in a disengaged state, a pseudo-continuous variation in which the symbols in the temporarily stopped state are changed again after that may be executed. Further, when the specific operation effect is executed under the condition that the games are temporarily stopped in the win mode, the promotion effect may be such that the game is promoted to a more advantageous type of jackpot. The promotion effect may be, for example, a promotion from a symbol type or symbol combination suggesting a big hit without a probability change to a symbol type or symbol combination suggesting a big hit with a probability change, or a real round of a special game shifted after the big hit. It may be promotion to a symbol type or symbol combination that suggests a higher number of jackpots. The specific operation performance may be a performance that does not involve the actuation of the movable accessory. The specific operation effect may be started according to the player's input operation, or may be started regardless of the player's input operation. The execution of the specific operation effect may be skipped when the player does not perform an input operation, or may be executed even when the player does not perform an input operation.

In addition, the effect that is the target of the prior suggestion effect is the variable object change effect that changes the display mode of the variable object that suggests the degree of expectation for the big hit related to the change, and the pending object that suggests the degree of expectation for the big hit related to the suspension. It may be a pending change effect or the like that changes the display mode of. In this specification, both the change effect of the variable object and the change effect of the pending object may be collectively referred to as "suspended change effect". The variable object or pending object is a spherical object image displayed in the lower center portion of the screen. Reservation object is an object image for effectively showing the reservation number of the lottery value reserved by the special figure reservation means, and the same number of reservation number and spherical object images (reservation ball image) are displayed, and the reservation ball image The displayed number of indicates the pending number. The variable object is an object image having a display mode similar to or similar to that of the suspended object. displayed in different positions. The variable object and the pending object further suggest the degree of expectation for a big win related to the variable or pending by its display mode. For example, the display color of the display image of the variable object or the pending object, the display wording, the additional decorative display such as the aura image or the character image suggests the degree of expectation for the big win related to the variable or pending. In the hold change effect, the display of the object changes from a relatively low-expectation display mode to a high-expectation display mode, and depending on the change in the display mode and the display mode after the change, the expectation for the big hit related to the change or the hold is increased. suggested to be high.

According to a mode of the present embodiment, the display mode of the specific effect that can be displayed on the effect display device during the progress of the game is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode suggesting that the expectation of winning is high. It may be possible to execute a specific change effect to cause It is possible to execute a pre-suggestion effect that preliminarily suggests execution of a specific change effect, and the specific change effect may be executed with the execution of the pre-suggestion effect as a trigger. Depending on at least one of the time value from the start of the production process with the execution of the prior suggestion production to the start of the prior suggestion production and the time value from the start of the production process with the execution of the prior suggestion production to the end of the prior suggestion production , the execution probability of the specific change effect triggered by the execution of the pre-suggestion effect may be different. Here, the “specific change effect” may correspond to any effect that can suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode or the display mode, among the various effects to be suggested by the above-described pre-suggestive effect. The specific change effect is not limited to a display effect that accompanies a change in the display on the screen, and may be a character actuation effect that accompanies a change in lighting color or form of a movable character. Here, "the start of the effect process accompanied by the execution of the pre-suggestive effect" may be the start timing of the pattern variation or the start timing of the specific effect. For example, it may be the start timing of a specific effect (SP development suggestion, development mission, first half of battle reach, normal simulated sequence, dedicated simulated sequence, etc.) that triggers the start of the prior suggestion effect.

According to a certain aspect of the present embodiment, the specific effect can be executed during the progress of the game, and the advance suggestion effect that pre-suggests changes in the specific effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during the progress of the game. good too. When the pre-suggestive performance is executed under the condition that the specific performance is the first mode, the second mode suggests that the specific performance is expected to be more successful than the first mode with the execution of the pre-suggestive performance as a trigger. There may be a case where the specific effect does not become the second mode with the execution of the pre-suggestive effect as a trigger. When the specific performance does not become the second mode with the execution of the pre-suggestive performance as a trigger, the case where the subsequent specific performance becomes the first mode, and the third mode suggesting that the expectation of winning is higher than the second mode. There may be cases where Here, the “specific effect” refers to any effect that can suggest the degree of expectation by changing the effect mode or the display mode, among the various effects that are the target of the above-mentioned pre-suggestive effect, and at least three types. Any production that can take the above production mode or display mode can be applicable. An example of the specific performance is a pending change performance, the first mode is a normal pending display, the second mode is a pending display suggesting a high degree of expectation, and the third mode suggests a confirmed big win or a certain variable big win. It may be a hold display.

(2. Fixed expectations)
As described in the above "1. Preliminary Suggestion Effect", there is a "battle reach effect" as an effect that can be executed during the progress of the game, and there are multiple battle reach effects with different enemy characters that are opponents in the battle. be prepared. When the battle ready-to-win effect is executed, it is suggested that the player will be in an advantageous state by performing the process of effecting victory over the enemy character. For example, different strengths are set for a plurality of enemy characters appearing in the battle reach production, and the expectation of victory is low when a strong enemy character appears, and the expectation of victory is low when a weak enemy character appears. get higher Therefore, depending on which of the plurality of enemy characters appears, the degree of expectation for victory in the subsequent battle reach production will differ, and the subsequent battle will be won depending on which enemy character appears at the start of the battle reach production. It suggests the degree of expectation to do.

In such a battle reach production, the enemy characters that are popular with the players are often strong characters. Situations can arise. As a result, a situation may arise in which it is suggested that the player is likely to be in a disadvantageous state despite the execution of an effect of great interest to the player. In order to avoid such a situation, it is also possible to determine the production tendency so as to increase the degree of expectation for victory when a popular enemy character appears. However, in this case, when a weak enemy character appears, the degree of expectation for victory is low, so the strength in battle and the degree of expectation for victory do not match. Also, it is impossible to meet the expectations of players who like weak enemy characters.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a special presentation process is prepared in which the degree of expectation for winning the subsequent battle is the same regardless of which of a plurality of enemy characters having different strengths appears. Specifically, when the battle ready-to-reach effect is executed via the special effect, the expectation level of winning the battle is the same regardless of the type of the enemy character. On the other hand, when the battle reach effect is executed without going through the special effect, the degree of expectation for winning the battle is varied according to the type of enemy character. Specifically, in the case of a special route, an enemy character selection screen is displayed before execution of the battle ready-to-win effect, so that an arbitrary enemy character can be selected according to the player's taste. Furthermore, in the battle reach production via the special production, the degree of expectation of victory is set to be higher than the battle reach production through the normal route without the special production. The content of the battle reach effect is common between the special route and the normal route. As a result, in the special route battle ready-to-win production, the player can select his or her favorite enemy character, and at the same time, it is possible to provide the double advantage of increasing the possibility of winning the battle. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the production as compared with a game machine in which only the normal battle ready-to-win production is prepared without going through the special production.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation of the battle ready-to-win effects for normal and special routes. In this figure, there are 6 types of enemy characters A to F that appear in the battle reach production, and 6 types of battle reach production are prepared. The battle ready-to-win effect is one of the variable effects that can be executed during the pattern change, and is one of the super ready-to-win effects (SP effects) that can be executed after the main design becomes the ready-to-win. When the player wins in the battle ready-to-win production, it is determined that the game will be a big hit, and the main design is stopped and displayed in the big win mode. Therefore, the degree of expectation for victory in the battle ready-to-win production can be the same as the degree of expectation (probability) for a big win afterward. It should be noted that, when winning in the battle ready-to-win production, the big win does not have to be confirmed, and the degree of expectation for winning in the battle ready-to-win production may be different from the degree of expectation for the subsequent big win. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win is increased by winning in the battle ready-to-win production. In other words, it is desirable that the expectation of a big win after winning in the battle ready-to-win production is higher than the expectation of a big win after losing in the battle ready-to-win production.

In the battle ready-to-reach effect of “normally” without going through the special effect, the degree of expectation of victory differs according to the types of the enemy characters A to F. In the normal route, the expectation of victory of the enemy character A is 3%, the expectation of victory of the enemy character B is 5%, the expectation of victory of the enemy character C is 8%, and the expectation of victory of the enemy character D is is 10%, the expectation of victory of the enemy character E is 12%, and the expectation of victory of the enemy character F is 15%. The battle reach effect via normal is, for example, the "battle reach" of the variable effect flow in FIG. Battle reach may be executed. On the other hand, in the battle ready-to-win effect of "via special effect" via the special effect, the degree of expectation for victory is the same regardless of the types of enemy characters A to F. In the special route, all of the enemy characters A to F have a 50% chance of winning. Battle reach production via special is executed without being associated with the above-mentioned prior suggestion production. The battle reach effect via a special route is also called a “50% challenge effect” because it has a 50% probability of being a big hit.

When the battle ready-to-reach effect is executed via a special route, the degree of expectation for victory is the same regardless of which battle ready-to-reach effect is executed for any of the enemy characters A to F. For example, the degree of victory expectation (50%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character A is executed via a special route is the degree of victory expectation (50%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character B is executed via a special route. is the same as On the other hand, when the normal battle ready-to-win effect is executed, the degree of expectation for victory differs depending on which of the enemy characters A to F battle ready-to-reach effect is executed. For example, the degree of victory expectation (3%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character A is executed normally is the degree of victory expectation (5%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character B is executed normally. different from

Also, the degree of expectation of victory when the battle ready-to-reach effect via special is executed is higher than the degree of expectation of victory when the battle ready-to-reach effect via normal is executed. More specifically, when the battle reach effect for a specific enemy character (any of A to F) is executed, the expectation of victory via special (50%) is reduced to the expectation of victory via normal (3% to 15%). For example, the degree of expectation of victory (50%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character A is executed via special route is the degree of expectation of victory (3%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character A is executed via normal route. higher than Similarly, the degree of victory expectation (50%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character B is executed via the special route is the same as the degree of victory expectation (5%) when the battle reach effect of enemy character B is executed via normal route. ).

In addition, the expectation level (50%) that becomes a big hit when the battle ready-to-win production is performed via a special route is performed with a high expectation level production (for example, the strongest ritual ready-to-win in FIG. 40) different from the battle ready-to-win production. Higher than expected (for example, 25%) to be a big hit in the case. On the other hand, the expectation level (3% to 15%) that becomes a big hit when the battle reach production via normal is executed is performed with a high expectation level production (for example, the strongest ritual reach) different from the battle reach production. It is lower than the expectation (25%) that it will be a big hit if

In addition, when the battle ready-to-win effect is executed through the normal route, the respective victory expectations of the enemy characters A to F may have different values as shown in the figure, or some characters may have victory expectations may be common. For example, the expectation of victory for enemy characters A and B is 5%, the expectation of victory for enemy characters C and D is 10%, and the expectation of victory for enemy characters E and F is 15%. may be

The probability that each of the enemy characters A to F will appear when the normal battle ready-to-win effect is executed may be the same (16% to 17%), or may be different for each character. For example, when a battle ready-to-win production is executed via normal, characters with relatively high expectations of victory (for example, enemy characters E and F) have a relatively high appearance probability (for example, 6% to 10%). A relatively high appearance probability (18% to 25%) may be set for characters with a relatively low degree of expectation for victory (for example, enemy characters A and B) when the via battle ready-to-win effect is executed.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a display example of an effect selection screen. On the left side of the screen, 6 types of enemy characters A to F that can appear in the Battle Reach production are displayed in order. In the illustrated example, six types of enemy characters A to F serving as selection candidates are arranged along a ring, and the enemy character to be selected is displayed relatively large in the lower center. (a) is the effect selection screen in the initial state, and the enemy character A is displayed as an initial candidate to be selected. By pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110, the enemy characters to be selected are switched one by one. (b) is an effect selection screen when the right button of the cross key 110 is pressed once, and the selection target in the lower center is switched to the enemy character B. FIG.

On the right side of the screen in FIG. 60, there is displayed an explanatory text "No matter who you choose, your chances of winning are 50%!!" It is shown that there is no chance of winning and the degree of winning expectation is very high. This makes it easy for the player to understand that it is not the battle reach production via the normal route in which the degree of expectation for victory differs depending on the type of the enemy characters A to F, but the battle reach production via the "special route" that is different from the normal route. be In addition, the remaining time until the end of the period during which the selection operation on the effect selection screen is valid is displayed at the bottom right of the screen in this drawing. On the effect selection screen, when one of the enemy characters A to F is selected, the effect button 109 is pressed to confirm the character selection, or when the effective period of the selection operation expires after a predetermined time has passed, the selected character is selected. A battle reach production is started in which the enemy character appears. The content of the subsequent battle reach production is the same as that of the normal route. Instead of the input method of confirming the selection by operating the effect button 109 after making a selection with the cross key 110, the selection may be switched one by one each time the effect button 109 is pressed. In this case, there may be no input operation to confirm the selection, and the selection may be confirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In the effect selection screen of FIG. 60, the display order of the six types of enemy characters A to F is not particularly limited. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the degree of expectation for victory in the battle ready-to-win production via normal route is A→B→C→D→E→F from the lowest to lowest, the enemy characters on the effect selection screen in FIG. The display order is also A->B->C->D->E->F. In addition, at the initial position (bottom center of the screen) when the effect selection screen is displayed, enemy character A, which has the lowest degree of expectation of victory (3%) when the battle reach effect is executed via normal, is displayed. be. In the special Battle Reach production where the production selection screen is displayed, a very high expectation of victory (50%) is set, giving you the opportunity to see a rare production that wins against enemy characters that are difficult to win through normal routes. It can be said that Therefore, it is highly advantageous to select a character with a low degree of expectation of victory in the normal route, in that there is a high possibility that a rare effect can be seen. Therefore, the enemy character A, which has a low probability of winning in the normal route, is arranged at the initial position to facilitate the selection operation of the enemy character A, which is considered to be highly likely to be selected by the player.

On the effect selection screen shown in FIG. 60, the words "expectation of victory 50%" may be highlighted on the upper right of the screen for each operation of switching the enemy character as an option. Although the enemy character is switched, the numerical value of the degree of victory expectation in the upper right of the screen is updated and displayed with the same numerical value (50%) without being changed, so that the degree of victory expectation is displayed regardless of the enemy character. It can be shown emphatically by the player that the .

The display example of the effect selection screen is not limited to the illustrated one, as long as a plurality of options corresponding to each of a plurality of types of battle reach effects are displayed, and any one of the plurality of options can be selected by the player's operation. Any display mode may be used. For example, multiple options may be arranged in a vertical or horizontal row, 2×3=6 squares of options may be arranged in order, or fan-shaped options divided into 6 like a pie chart. may be arranged in order.

When an operation to select an enemy character is not performed on the effect selection screen, the enemy character A placed at the initial position may be selected, and a battle ready-to-win effect in which the player fights against the enemy character A may be executed. In addition, when an operation to select an enemy character is not performed on the effect selection screen, the 50% challenge may end, and a battle ready-to-win effect with the same degree of expectation as the normal route may be executed. In other words, a battle ready-to-win effect may be executed in which the degree of expectation for victory differs according to the types of enemy characters A to F.

The effect selection screen may be configured so that the player can select any one of a plurality of options voluntarily, or may be configured so that the player cannot necessarily select voluntarily. For example, the options to be selected may be automatically switched like roulette, and one of the options may be selected by the player's input operation. In this case, since the options to be selected are switched at high speed, it may be difficult for the player to reliably select the option intended by the player. In addition, although the options to be selected on the effect selection screen are predetermined by the effect pattern and the player cannot freely select them, the effect selection screen is displayed as if the player has made a selection. good too. Therefore, the effect selection screen in this embodiment may be a screen that displays that one of the options has been selected after displaying a plurality of options.

Prior to the start of the “50% challenge” of the special route, a preliminary effect may be executed to encourage whether or not the route will be the special route. This preliminary effect may be executed within the symbol variation period during which the 50% challenge is performed, or even if it is a pre-reading effect performed with symbol variation prior to the symbol variation during which the 50% challenge is performed. good. An example of a pre-production that prompts whether or not the game will be a special route is a “chance-like production” in which the main layout is stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific combination of symbols in a missing mode. For example, the 50% challenge is entered by stopping or temporarily stopping with the symbol combination of "135" in the main design, and the 50% challenge does not occur when stopping or temporarily stopping with other off-mode symbol combinations. is suggested. In the chance presentation, for example, three symbol rows are temporarily stopped in the order of left, right, and center, and the left symbol is temporarily stopped at "1" to start the chance presentation. Next, when the right pattern is "5" and the game is temporarily stopped, the chance game performance continues, and when the right pattern is "5" and the game is temporarily stopped at "6" without being temporarily stopped, the chance game fails. Also, when the right symbol is "5" and the game is temporarily stopped and the center symbol is "3", the game is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, if the center symbol is not temporarily stopped at "3" but temporarily stopped at "4", the second chance will fail. In addition, as another example of pre-staging to incite whether or not a special route will be taken, a panel with the words "?% challenge" is displayed, and the panel changes to "50% challenge" or "0% challenge". A panel inciting effect may be executed to incite the change.

At the start of or after the start of the "50% challenge" through the special route, a promotion effect that further increases the expectation of a big win may be executed, for example, the player may be promoted to the "77% challenge". In addition, a "33% challenge" with a low expectation for a big hit may be prepared, and a promotion effect may be executed in which the expectation for a big hit is promoted from 33% to 50% or 77%. The promotion effect may be executed after the title indicating the start of the 50% challenge is displayed, that is, before the effect selection screen is displayed. The promotion effect may be executed immediately after the effect selection screen is displayed, and the numerical value of the degree of expectation displayed on the right side of the screen in FIG. 60 may be switched from 50% to 77%. The promotion effect may be executed after selecting one of the options on the effect selection screen, or may be executed before the start of battle reach after that.

When the battle ready-to-win effect via the special route is executed, a specific effect that can be executed in relation to the battle ready-to-reach effect via the normal route may be executable. For example, even in the battle ready-to-win effect via the special route, the title change effect (notice B in FIG. 41) and the pending change effect (notice C in FIG. 41) may be executed. On the other hand, when the battle ready-to-win effect via the special route is executed, another specific effect that can be executed in relation to the battle ready-to-reach effect via the normal route may not be executable. For example, in the battle ready-for-hire effect via a special route, the aforementioned pre-suggestion effect, full-screen development, sudden strongest, etc. may not be executable.

In the course of the variable presentation of the special route and the normal route, a "very hot notice" suggesting that the degree of expectation for a big win is extremely high, or a "fixed notice" for confirming that a big win will occur may be executed. The intense heat notice may suggest that the degree of expectation for a big hit is 50% or more or 80% or more, for example. An example of a hot notice is a notice effect with a specific display mode (for example, a giraffe pattern) that indicates that the expectation is very high, and various effects such as a cut-in effect with a giraffe pattern and a pending change effect are applicable. I can. The intense heat notice may be a special illumination effect (giraffe flash effect) in which the decorative lamp 111 flashes in yellow or gold with the image of a giraffe pattern. In addition, an example of a confirmation notice is a notice effect with a specific display mode (for example, rainbow color) indicating that the big hit is confirmed, and a cut-in effect with rainbow color, a pending change effect, a role actuation effect, or an illumination Various performances such as performances may correspond.

The above-mentioned intense heat notice and fixed notice may be executable in both the special route and the normal route. In the event of an intense heat notice or a confirmed notice, regardless of whether it is a special route or a normal route, the expectation of a big hit is very high (for example, the expectation is 50% or more or 80% or more) or the big hit is confirmed. It may be implied in advance. For example, when the 50% challenge performance is executed through a special route, the expectation of the big hit is 50%, but when the 50% challenge performance is executed due to the intense heat notice, the expectation of the big hit is 80%. may be Similarly, when the battle reach effect is executed via the normal way, the expectation of the big hit is 3% to 15% depending on the type of the enemy characters A to F. When the ready-to-win effect is executed, the big hit expectation may be 80% regardless of the types of the enemy characters A to F. Therefore, even if the big hit expectation level (80%) in the case of a special route due to an intense heat notice is the same as the jackpot expectation level (80%) in the case of a normal route due to an intense heat notice good. Also, the degree of expectation for a big win (80%) in the case of a normal route due to the occurrence of a notice of intense heat may be higher than the degree of expectation of a big win (50%) through a special route in which the notice of intense heat does not occur. Similarly, the jackpot expectation (80%) in the case of a specific high-expectation production (for example, the strongest ritual reach) due to the occurrence of a hot notice, is a special way that the hot notice does not occur. ). In addition, the jackpot expectation level (80%) when the intense heat notice occurs and goes through the normal route is the jackpot expectation level ( for example 25%). In the above example, the same thing can be said even if the intense heat notice is read as a fixed notice.

It should be noted that when the intense heat notice or final notice is executed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for the big hit will be 80% or 100%, so if the special 50% challenge effect is executed after that, it will be a big hit. There is a risk that the player will be given the impression that the degree of expectation has dropped, and that the consistency of the presentation cannot be obtained. Therefore, when the special performance is executed after the intense heat notice or the fixed notice is executed, it may be notified that the degree of expectation for a big hit is 80% or 100% when the special performance is executed. For example, when the intense heat notice is executed before the title of the 50% challenge effect is displayed, the promotion effect may be executed to change the expectation displayed in the special effect from 50% to 80%. In addition, when a jackpot fixing notice is executed before the title of the 50% challenge performance is displayed, a promotion performance may be executed to change the degree of expectation displayed in the special performance from 50% to 99% or 100%. In addition, by applying prohibition processing such as preventing special passages when intense heat notices and confirmed notices are executed, and preventing intense heat notices and confirmed notices from occurring when special passages are performed, You may make it maintain the consistency of production|presentation. Also, in the case of a special passage, prohibition processing may be applied so as to prohibit the execution of any advance notice effect, and in the case of a special passage, prohibition processing may be performed so that only a specific notice effect cannot be executed. You can call For example, in the case of a special route, it is not possible to execute a notice effect that exceeds the expectation of a big hit (50%) suggested by the special route, while in the case of a special route, the big hit suggested by the special route is disabled. It is also possible to make it possible to execute an advance notice effect that is less than the expected degree (50%).

According to one aspect of the present embodiment, there are at least a first effect and a second effect as effects that can be executed during the progress of the game, and the player can execute the first effect or the second effect during the progress of the game. may be selectable. When the first performance or the second performance is executed with the player's selection as a trigger, the degree of expectation of winning after the execution of the first performance and the degree of expectation of winning after the execution of the second performance are the same. good too. When the first effect or the second effect is executed without being triggered by the player's selection, the degree of expectation of winning after the execution of the first effect and the degree of expectation of winning after the execution of the second effect are different. good too. Here, an example of the first effect and the second effect is a battle reach effect with different opponents (enemy characters), but the first effect and the second effect may be other effects. For example, the first effect may be "development mission" or "weak reach", and the second effect may be "first half of battle reach" or "strongest ritual reach". In other words, any combination of effects that can have different expectations depending on the type of effect corresponds to the combination of the first effect and the second effect, and at least part of the effect that is the target of the above-mentioned pre-suggestive effect is the first effect. It can correspond to a production or a second production.

According to an aspect of the present embodiment, there are at least a plurality of specific effects and a special effect as effects that can be executed during the progress of the game, and the player can execute any one of the plurality of specific effects during the progress of the game. may be selectable. When one of a plurality of specific performances is executed with selection by a player as a trigger, the degree of expectation of winning after execution of the specific performance may be higher than the degree of expectation of winning after execution of special performance. When one of a plurality of specific performances is executed without being triggered by a player's selection, the degree of expectation for winning after execution of the specific performance is lower than the degree of expectation for winning after execution of special performance. good. Here, an example of a plurality of specific effects is a battle reach effect with different opponents (enemy characters), and an example of a special effect is a strongest ritual reach effect, but various other effects may include a plurality of specific effects and effects. It can be a special performance. For example, at least a part of the effects to be suggested in the pre-suggested effects can be a plurality of specific effects or special effects. As a modification, even if one of a plurality of specific effects is executed without being triggered by selection by the player, the degree of expectation of winning after execution of the specific effect is higher than the degree of expectation of winning after execution of the special effect. may be higher. An example of the special effect in this case is a development mission or a weak reach, but various other effects can correspond to the special effect.

According to one aspect of the present embodiment, there are at least a first effect and a second effect as effects that can be executed during the progress of the game, and at least the first effect and the second effect are candidates for selection during the progress of the game. A displayed effect selection screen may be displayed. The degree of expectation for winning when the first performance is executed after displaying the performance selection screen may be higher than the degree of expectation for winning when the first performance is executed without displaying the performance selection screen. . Here, an example of the first production and the second production is a battle reach production with different opponents (enemy characters). At least a part of the effect to be suggested by the suggestive effect can correspond to the first effect or the second effect.

According to one aspect of the present embodiment, the first effect process in which the specific effect is executed after the execution of the special effect and the specific effect is executed without executing the special effect as the effect processes that can be executed during the progress of the game. There may be a second effect process to be performed, and a first notice effect and a second notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation to be successful may be executable in the first effect process and the second effect process. The degree of expectation to hit after execution of the second effect process in which the first notice effect is executed and the second notice effect is not executed is the degree of expectation of the first effect process in which the first notice effect is not executed and the second notice effect is not executed. It may be higher than the expectation of winning after execution and lower than the expectation of winning after execution of the first performance process in which the first notice performance is executed and the second notice performance is not executed. The degree of expectation to hit after execution of the second effect process in which the first notice effect is executed and the second notice effect is executed is the second effect process in which the first notice effect is executed and the second notice effect is executed. It may be the same as the expected degree of hit after the execution of . Here, an example of the special effect is the 50% challenge accompanied by the display of the effect selection screen, and an example of the specific effect is the battle ready-to-win effect. In addition, an example of the first notice effect is a notice effect such as a cut-in effect that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is very high, and an example of the second notice effect is a movable that notifies that it is a big hit. It is a role performance. Note that examples of the special effect, the specific effect, the first notice effect, and the second notice effect are not limited to these, and at least a part of the effects to be suggested in the above-described advance suggestive effect can correspond to these effects. For example, the first notice effect may be the above-mentioned intense heat notice, and the second notice effect may be the above-mentioned jackpot determination notice.

According to one aspect of the present embodiment, the first effect process in which the specific effect is executed after the execution of the special effect, and the specific effect is executed without executing the special effect as the effect processes that can be executed during the progress of the game. In the first production process, the first advance notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning is executable, and in the second production process, the second notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation of being successful is executable. is executable, and the second advance notice effect may not be executable in the first effect process. The degree of expectation of winning after execution of the second effect process in which the second notice effect is executed is higher than the degree of expectation of win after execution of the first effect process in which the first notice effect is not executed, and the degree of expectation of win after execution of the first effect process without executing the first notice effect is It may be lower than the expected degree of winning after the execution of the first effect process to be executed. Here, an example of the special effect is the 50% challenge accompanied by the display of the effect selection screen, and an example of the specific effect is the battle ready-to-win effect. In addition, an example of the first notice effect is a movable character effect that notifies that a big hit is confirmed, and an example of the second notice effect is a cut-in effect that suggests that the expectation of a big win is very high. It is a preview performance of. Examples of the special effect, the specific effect, the first notice effect, and the second notice effect are not limited to these, and at least a part of the effect to be suggested in the above-described advance suggestive effect can correspond to these effects. For example, the second notice effect may be the above-mentioned intense heat notice, and the first notice effect may be the above-mentioned jackpot confirmation notice.

In this embodiment, when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and a special game is executed, the state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state or the normal probability state after the special game, while the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is played. is executed, it may be applied to a pachinko game machine that is always shifted to the probability variation state after the special game. In this case, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the probability change state depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area in the big winning opening opened during the special game after the big hit. That is, it may be a configuration called "ball definite" or "V definite" in which the transition to the probability variable state is confirmed by entering a specific area (V winning) during the special game. As the big winning openings that can be opened during the special game, a first big winning opening having no specific area inside the big winning opening and a second big winning opening having a specific area inside the big winning opening are provided. A first unit game in which the first big winning opening is opened and a second unit game in which the second big winning opening is opened may be executed during the special game of the round. In this case, it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the opening mode and the opening time of the second big prize opening are different depending on the type of the big winning pattern, and it is possible to execute a second unit game in which the easiness of entering the specific area is different. In this way, the probability of transition to the probability variation state may differ according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when a special game is executed as a result of a big win with a big win pattern A, a second unit game in which the opening time of the second big prize opening is relatively long is executed to facilitate entry of a ball into a specific area. You may do so. On the other hand, when a special game is executed as a big win with the big win pattern B, a second unit game is executed in which the opening time of the second big prize opening is relatively short, and it is difficult to enter the specific area. You may make it In addition, by varying the opening timing of the big winning hole and the operation timing of a distribution mechanism for allocating game balls to either a specific area or a non-specific area in the big winning hole according to the type of the big winning pattern, A special game (jackpot symbol A) in which it is easy or possible to enter a specific area or a special game (jackpot symbol B) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter a special area may be executed. In addition, only a large winning opening with a specific area is provided, and a distribution mechanism for distributing game balls to either the specific area or the non-specific area in a specific number of unit games (for example, the 4th round) is operated. , a special game that makes it easier or possible to enter a specific area by changing the operation mode according to the type of the jackpot pattern (jackpot pattern A, the allocation time value that allows the ball to enter the specific area is 10) seconds) and a special game in which it is difficult or impossible to enter the specific area (jackpot pattern B, allocation time value that allows the ball to enter the specific area is 0.05 seconds). good.

In the configuration of the above-mentioned "V definite", the execution mode of the second unit game when the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed, and the second special symbol becomes a big hit and the special game is executed. The transition probability to the probability change state may be made different by making the execution mode of the second unit game different. For example, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning hole in the second unit game is relatively shortened, and the ball entering the specific area is relatively shortened. On the other hand, when the second special pattern is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning port in the second unit game is relatively lengthened to allow the player to access the specific area. You may make it relatively easy to enter a ball. As a specific example, when the first special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of entering a specific area in the second big winning hole is set to about 50%, while the second special symbol is set to about 50%. The probability of a ball entering the second big winning hole when the symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed may be about 80%. In addition, when the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the opening time of the second big winning opening in the second unit game is lengthened (for example, 5 seconds or more, 10 seconds or more, or 20 seconds or more). By doing so, the second unit game may be constructed such that if the game ball is shot toward the second big winning hole during the special game, the ball almost certainly enters the second big winning hole. Thereby, when the second special symbol is a big hit and the special game is executed, the probability of the ball entering the specific area in the second big winning hole may be substantially 100%. In other words, the probability of transition to the probability change state when the second special symbol becomes a big hit may be substantially 100%. In this case, the probability of transition to the probability variation state when the first special symbol is a big hit may be less than 100%, and the probability of transition to the probability variation state when the first special symbol is a big hit is 50%. It may be up to about 80%. That is, in the configuration of "V definite", the special figure 1 may be less than 100% probability variation and the special figure 2 may be 100% probability variation.

The characteristic configuration of this embodiment will be further described below. In this embodiment, "3. operation effect (also called button effect)" for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the operation input means such as the effect button 109 and the effect lever 112 can be executed. When the button performance is executed, a ``button-flicking performance'' suggesting the occurrence of the button performance can be executed before the button performance is executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a "time adjustment effect" for absorbing the deviation of the effect execution time due to the difference in the input operation timing of the player in the button effect. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a continuation suggestion effect that suggests the continuation of the effect accompanying the pattern change multiple times, and "4. make it possible. In addition, it is possible to move to "5. special pseudo-continuous zone" in which the pseudo-continuous variation effect can be continuously executed over a plurality of symbol variations.

(3. Button production)
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an effect process when a button effect is executed. Each of FIGS. 61(a) to 61(c) shows a variation effect process over one symbol variation period from the start of symbol variation to the stop of variation. First, the normal effect is executed when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and then the "button push effect" suggesting the occurrence of the button effect is executed. After the execution of the button-flicking effect, a button effect is executed for instructing the player to perform an input operation to operation input means such as the effect button 109 and the effect lever 112.例文帳に追加In the button effect, an operation valid period (also referred to as a button valid period) during which an input operation to the operation input means is valid is determined. In the button effect, an image simulating the operation input means to be operated is displayed, and it is shown in effect that the button valid period is valid. In the button presentation, the remaining time until the expiration of the button valid period may be shown in a dramatic manner. time is indicated.

The button effect ends when an input operation is performed within the button valid period, or when the button valid period ends. After the end of the button effect, a specific effect that can be executed with the termination of the button effect as a trigger is executed. An example of the specific effect is a development effect suggesting a high degree of expectation, for example, a super ready-to-win effect that can be executed after the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win mode. In addition, after the button production is finished and before the specific production is executed, a movable accessory production (simply referred to as a role production) accompanied by the operation of the movable accessory 66 can be executed. After the execution of the specific effect, all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and the combination of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols suggests a winning result. After the decorative patterns are displayed in the temporarily stopped state, all of the decorative patterns are confirmed and stopped, and the result of success or failure is definitely indicated by the combination of the decorative patterns decided and stopped. In the example shown in FIG. 61, a special effect is executed indicating that the specific effect is completed before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the transition to the normal effect is performed. is fixed and stopped. The special effect is also called an “eye-catching effect” for switching between effects without discomfort by attracting the player's attention.

FIG. 61(a) shows the effect process when no input operation to the effect button is performed within the button effective period during which the button effect is executed. In FIG. 61(a), the execution time t1 of the button-pump effect is, for example, about 5 to 10 seconds, and for example about 6, 7, or 8 seconds. Also, the time t2 of the button valid period in the button effect is, for example, about 3 seconds to 8 seconds, and for example, about 4 seconds, 5 seconds, or 6 seconds. Therefore, the execution time t1 of the button stimulation effect may be longer than the time t2 of the button valid period in the button effect. In FIG. 61(a), when an input operation to the effect button is not performed within the button effective period, the accessory effect is executed with the expiration of the button effective period as a trigger. The execution time t3 of the performance of the character is, for example, about 1 to 2 seconds. In FIG. 61(a), the time t4 from when all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped until the special effect is started is, for example, about 2 to 4 seconds, and the execution time t5 of the special effect is, for example, 0.5 seconds. It is about 5 to 2 seconds, and the time t6 from when the special effect ends to when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in the normal effect is, for example, about 1 to 3 seconds. In an embodiment, the time t4 from the temporary stop of the decorative design to the start of the special effect may be the same as the time t6 from the end of the special effect to the final stop of the decorative design, or the time t6. It may be longer or shorter than time t6. In FIG. 61(a), the execution time t5 of the special effect may be shorter than the time t6 from when the special effect ends to when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped.

FIG. 61(b) shows an effect process when an input operation to the effect button is performed in the middle of the button valid period. In FIG. 61(b), an input operation is triggered to execute the performance of the character, and then the performance of the character is continuously executed until the timing when the specific performance can be started. In FIG. 61(b), the input operation is performed when the time t2' has elapsed from the start of the button effect, and the input operation is performed under the condition that there is a remaining time Δt until the button effective period ends. As a result, the performance of the character is executed at a timing earlier than in the case of FIG. 61(a) by the remaining time Δt of the button effective period. In FIG. 61(b), the duration of the character effect is longer than in the case of FIG. 61(a) by the remaining time .DELTA.t of the button valid period. The performance of the character is continuously executed for the time t3'=t3+Δt which is obtained by adding the time Δt. By adjusting the execution time of the performance of the role product in this way, it is possible to absorb the deviation of the performance execution timing according to the input operation timing. That is, regardless of the difference in input operation timing, the specific effect can be started at the same timing as in FIG. 61(a) where no input operation is performed. As a result, in FIG. 61(b), the performance time from when the pattern starts to fluctuate to when it is fixed can be set to the same time as in FIG. 61(a). In the case of FIG. 61(b), the character performance corresponds to the "time adjustment performance". In FIG. 61(b), the time t4 from when all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped until the special effect starts, the execution time t5 of the special effect, and the time until the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped after the special effect ends. Time t6 is the same as in FIG. 61(a).

FIG. 61(c) shows another production process when an input operation to the production button is performed in the middle of the button effective period. In FIG. 61(c), similarly to FIG. 61(b), an input operation is performed when time t2' has elapsed from the start of the button presentation, and the input operation triggers the performance of the character product. However, the time at which the character effect is executed in FIG. 61(c) is the same time t3 as in FIG. 61(a), and the time at which the character effect is executed in FIG. is also short. As a result, in FIG. 61(c), the start timing of the specific effect is earlier than in FIGS. 61(a) and (b), and the remaining time Δt of the button valid period is earlier than in FIGS. A specific effect is executed at . In FIG. 61(c), since the start timing of the specific effect is early, the timing at which the decorative symbols temporarily stop is earlier than in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). Therefore, in FIG. 61(c), the execution time of the special effect that is executed after all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped is increased by Δt compared to FIGS. 61(a) and (b). Absorbs the shift in performance execution timing. Specifically, in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the special effect is continuously executed for the time t5'=t5+Δt, which is the time t5 at which the special effect is executed plus the remaining time Δt of the button effective period. By adjusting the execution time of the special effect in this way, the end timing of the special effect can be aligned with the timing shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). As a result, in FIG. 61(c), the performance time from when the pattern starts to fluctuate to when it is fixed can be made the same as in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b). In the case of FIG. 61(c), the special effect corresponds to "time adjustment effect".

According to the production process of FIG. 61(c), the execution time t3 of the character production is the same as that of FIG. 61(a), so the execution time of the character production is t3′=t3+Δt can be prevented from becoming long. As a result, it is possible to prevent the performance process from giving the player a dull impression due to the execution of a long character performance in the middle of the performance process in which the result of success or failure is not determined. On the other hand, according to the production process of FIG. 61(c), after all the decoration patterns are temporarily stopped and the winning result is suggested, a special production that is a time adjustment production is executed, so it is possible to win. It is possible to prevent the performance from becoming slow in the performance process in which the sense of expectation is heightened.

In one embodiment, if an input operation is performed within the button valid period, the production process of FIG. 61(c) may be executed. In this case, the duration of the special effect (eye-catching effect) may differ depending on whether or not there is an input operation within the button valid period during execution of the button effect. Specifically, if there is no input operation within the button effective period, the duration of the special effect (eye-catching effect) is relatively short, and if there is an input operation during the button effective period, the special effect (eye-catching effect) The duration of the catch effect) may be relatively short. Also, the duration of the special effect (eye-catching effect) may differ according to the input operation timing within the button valid period. Specifically, the shorter the elapsed time from the start of the button valid period to the input operation, the longer the duration of the special effect (eye-catching effect) may be. In other words, the later the input operation timing in the button valid period, the shorter the duration of the special effect (eye-catching effect).

In an embodiment, the execution mode of the character object effect or the specific effect after execution of the button effect may be changed according to the presence or absence of the input operation within the button effective period. Also, a special effect (for example, a premium effect) may be executed only when the button is not operated within the button valid period. In this case, a special effect can be provided to the player who finds button operations to be troublesome. This special performance may be made executable only when the variation results in a big win, and may be made unexecutable when the variation results in a loss. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the option of not intentionally operating the button during the button presentation in order to generate a special presentation after the button presentation. For example, when an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed in the effect process from the start of the variation to the occurrence of the button effect, the player has an expectation that a special effect that will definitely result in a big win may occur. While increasing , you can take action not to operate the button in the button production. In this way, it is possible to provide a game with an increased degree of freedom of choice for the player.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the effect process of the button push effect and the button effect. FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b) show screen examples of the button push effect. First, as shown in FIG. 62(a), two dragons 508 appear, and the process of intertwining the two dragons 508 is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(b), two dragons 508 face each other and roar. FIG. 62(c) shows an example of a button effect screen, in which a button image 510 imitating the effect button 109 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the message "Press!!" prompting the player to operate the effect button 109 is displayed. be done. The display of the button image 510 suggests to the player that the button operation is valid within the button validity period. A timer image 512 for indicating the button effective period is displayed below the button image 510. By gradually shortening the length of the bar 513 of the timer image 512, the remaining time until the button effective period ends is displayed. is suggested. FIG. 62(d) shows an execution example of a movable accessory presentation, in which a movable accessory 514 imitating two dragons appears in front of the screen. In this embodiment, by making two dragons appear in the button-flickering effects shown in FIGS. 62(a) and (b), the generation of the button effects is suggested in advance, and the two dragons are simulated after the button effects. Occurrence of a role production in which the movable role 514 appears is suggested in advance. The button-flashing effect is a type of generation suggestive effect that suggests the occurrence of a button effect or the occurrence of a movable accessory effect after the button effect. 62(a) to 62(d), the simple symbols 500 composed of three rows of symbols are variably displayed at the bottom right of the screen, suggesting that the symbols are changing.

In this embodiment, the execution time t1 of the button effect shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b) is configured to be longer than the execution time (button effective period) t2 of the button effect shown in FIG. 62(c). be. Since the button effect is an effect that can trigger the occurrence of a notification effect that notifies the winner of the variation, it is an effect of extremely high importance for the player, and it can be said that it is the moment when the degree of expectation is highest. By lengthening the execution time of the button-pumping effect that arouses the occurrence of the button-pumping effect toward such a tense moment when the degree of anticipation increases, it is possible to more effectively arouse the player's sense of expectation. In recent years, in order to optimize the ball output rate per hour, it is necessary to lengthen the average value of the variation time of one symbol variation. is required to be longer. If the execution time of the normal effect or the ready-to-win effect is simply lengthened in accordance with the lengthening of the variable time, the effect may give the impression that the effect is lengthy and the player may avoid it. In this regard, since the above-described button push effect is executed at the timing when the player's sense of expectation is high, even if the execution time of the button push effect is lengthened, it is difficult to give the impression that the effect is slow. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by lengthening the execution time of the button push effect, the average value of the pattern fluctuation time is lengthened while avoiding giving the impression that the effect is slow. can be optimized.

A plurality of types of operation effects may be prepared. For example, as the operation effects, a "button effect" commanding to press the effect button 109 and a "lever effect" commanding to pull the effect lever 112 may be executable. The “lever effect” may be a effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher than the “button effect”. Further, as the "button effect", a first button effect in which a normal button is displayed and a second button effect in which a chance button indicating high expectation is displayed may be prepared. The effect may be an effect with a higher degree of expectation than the first button effect. Furthermore, as the "lever effect", a first lever effect in which a normal lever is displayed and a second lever effect in which a hot lever indicating high expectations may be displayed may be prepared. Expectations of effects may be higher in the order of first button effect<second button effect<first lever effect<second lever effect. The time value from the start of fluctuation to the start of the operation effect may tend to be longer for the operation effect with a higher degree of expectation. For example, the second time value from the start of variation to the start of the first lever effect may be longer than the first time value from the start of variation to the start of the first button effect. On the other hand, the button valid period for each of the plurality of types of operation effects may be common, and may be shorter than the execution time of the occurrence suggestion effect (button push effect) executed before the start of the operation effect.

A plurality of types of generation suggesting effects (button pushing effects) for suggesting the generation of operation effects may be prepared. For example, the type of button effect to be executed after the end of the button effect may be suggested according to the type of button effect. For example, a first type of button push effect and a second type of button push effect with a higher degree of expectation than the first type may be prepared. When the second type of button pull effect is executed, the degree of expectation for execution of the lever effect may be higher than when the first type of button pull effect is executed. A second time value from the start of variation to the start of the second type of button actuation effect may be longer than the first time value from the start of variation to the start of the first type of button actuation effect. The execution time of the second type of button push performance may be the same as the execution time of the first type of button push production, or may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first type of button push production. may Further, the time value for executing the button-pumping effect may differ according to the time value from the start of the fluctuation until the button-pumping effect is started. For example, a button when the button push effect is executed after a second time longer than the first time from the start of the fluctuation than the execution time of the button push effect when the button push effect is executed after the first time from the start of the fluctuation. The execution time of the stimulating effect may be long.

FIG. 63 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process in which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped after execution of the special effect, and shows an example of the screen when the winning result is wrong. FIG. 63(a) shows an example of the screen before all the decorative patterns 502 composed of three pattern rows are temporarily stopped, and the right and left pattern rows of the decorative pattern 502 are temporarily stopped with the same pattern "3". At the same time, the pattern row in the center of the decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped at the pattern "3" and becomes a big hit, or is temporarily stopped at the pattern "4" and is lost. . At the bottom right of the screen, a simple symbol 500 composed of three rows of symbols is variably displayed, suggesting that the symbol is in the process of being varied. In FIG. 63(a), an image used in the specific effect is displayed as the background display 520 of the decorative pattern 502 and the simple pattern 500. In FIG. A display example of the background display 520 is, for example, a background image used in a high-expectation effect such as a battle effect or the strongest effect, which is different from a background image of a normal effect that can be executed at the start of fluctuation.

FIG. 63(b) shows an example of a screen in which all of the decorative symbols 502 are temporarily stopped after the display of FIG. 63(a). At this time, the decorative pattern 502 is not fixedly stopped, and is displayed in a temporary stop state in which slight shaking is maintained. At this time, the simple pattern 500 at the bottom right of the screen is displayed in a variable manner, suggesting that the pattern is in the process of being varied. The background display 520 of the decorative pattern 502 and the simple pattern 500 is the same as the background display 520 of FIG. 63(a), and the specific effect continues.

FIG. 63(c) shows a screen example of a special effect suggesting transition to normal effect after the display of FIG. 63(b). In the special effect (eye-catching effect), the decorative pattern 502 is temporarily hidden, and an image dedicated to the special effect is displayed on the full screen. In the special effect, an image 516 of the main character (protagonist) appearing in the effect and an image 518 representing the title of the game machine, "CR Dragon II" are displayed. The background display 522 in the special effect is different from the background display 520 in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b). The simple pattern 500 at the bottom right of the screen is displayed in a variable manner, suggesting that the pattern is in the process of being varied.

FIG. 63(d) shows a screen example in which the decorative pattern 504 is fixed and stopped after the display of FIG. 63(c), and shows a screen example of normal effect. The decorative symbol 504 is determined and stopped at the symbol combination of "343", which is the same as the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 502 in FIG. At this time, the simple pattern 500 on the lower right of the screen also stops fluctuating, suggesting that the pattern is stopped. The simple symbols 500 are stopped and displayed at the symbol combination of "343" which is the same symbol combination as the decorative symbols 504, and the simple symbols 500 also show that the win/loss results are out. In the normal effect, a background display 524 for normal effect is used, and for example, an image displaying scenery such as a townscape or wilderness during the daytime is used as the background display 524 . The background display 524 for the normal effect is different from the background display 520 for the specific effect shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), and is also different from the background display 522 for the special effect shown in FIG. 63(c).

The decorative pattern 502 shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b) is composed only of a portion indicating the type of pattern, starting with a portion indicating a number (for example, "3" or "4") for identifying the type of pattern. It has a different display mode. On the other hand, the decorative pattern 504 in the normal effect shown in FIG. 63(d) shows a first portion 504a showing the number "3" or "4" for identifying the type of pattern, and a character displayed accompanying the number. It has a display form combined with the second portion 504b. The type of the second portion 504b indicating the character differs according to the type of the first portion 504a indicating the number identifying the pattern type. That is, the character type differs according to the symbol type. In the example shown in FIG. 63, the display form of the decorative pattern 502 used in the specific effect and the decorative pattern 504 used in the normal effect are different.

The display form of the decorative symbols used in the specific effect may be the same as the display form of the decorative symbols used in the normal effect. Specifically, in both the specific effect and the normal effect, a display that combines a first part indicating the type of pattern and a second part that is additionally displayed, such as the decorative pattern 504 shown in FIG. 63(d). A decorative design having a form may be used. Conversely, in both the specific effect and the normal effect, a decorative pattern having a display form consisting only of a part indicating the pattern type, such as the decorative pattern 502 shown in FIG. 63(a), may be used. In addition, the display form of the decorative pattern may differ according to the game state. For example, in the normal effect in the left-handed state, a decoration having a display form that combines a first part indicating the type of the pattern and a second part that is additionally displayed, such as the decorative pattern 504 shown in FIG. A graphic may be used. On the other hand, in the normal effect in the right-handed state, a decorative pattern consisting only of a portion indicating the type of pattern, such as the decorative pattern 502 shown in FIG. 63(a), may be used. Further, in the specific effect, the display form of the decorative symbols may be different depending on the game state as in the normal effect, or the display form of the decorative symbols may be common regardless of the game state. For example, in the specific effect, a decorative pattern consisting only of a portion indicating the type of pattern is used, such as the decorative pattern 502 shown in FIG. may

The effect process accompanied by the special effect (eye-catching effect) described above may be executable only in a specific game state. For example, an effect process accompanied by a special effect (eye-catching effect) may be executable only in the left-handed state, and not executable in the right-handed state.

FIGS. 64(a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of variation of the rendering process of FIG. 61(c). FIG. 64(a) shows a case where the decorative pattern is lost and the game is fixed and stopped. After a predetermined time t6 has elapsed after the end of the special effect, the decorative pattern is lost and the game is stopped. It shows the flow in which the next fluctuation starts after the elapse of . The time t7 from when the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped until the next variation is started is, for example, about 0.5 to 1 second, and is longer than the time t6 from when the special effect is finished to when the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped. It can be short. In the case of FIG. 64(a), the normal effect is started after the end of the special effect, and then the normal effect is continued even when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the normal effect is continued even when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate after that. Continued, for example, the background display 524 shown in FIG. 63(d) continues to be displayed.

FIG. 64(b) shows a case where the decorative pattern is a hit and the game is fixed and stopped. In FIG. 64(b), after starting the specific effect, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a win mode, and then the special effect is executed. After the end of the special performance, it shifts to the normal performance, and the decoration pattern is determined and stopped in a winning mode. After that, the start demonstration of the special game is started, and the special game with the opening of the big winning opening is executed. In FIG. 64(b), the time t6' from when the special effect ends to when the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped in the win mode is the time t6' when the special effect ends in FIG. It may be the same as the time t6 until the final stop, or may be longer than the time t6. In the latter case, by setting a longer time t6' in which the decorative pattern becomes a temporary stop state in a winning mode after the special performance is finished, the player can be provided with a longer time for realizing the winning.

FIG. 64(c) shows a case where after the special effect is finished, the decorative symbol is not fixed and stopped, and the resurrection effect is executed. In the case of FIG. 64(c), the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols is continued for a time t6'' longer than the time t6 until the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped after the end of the special effect in FIG. 64(a). The temporary stop state continues even at the timing when the decorative symbols should be fixed and stopped after a predetermined time t6 has elapsed from the end of the effect. By lengthening the duration t6'', it is possible to suggest that the performance will continue further by continuing the temporary stop state, and after that, the decorative pattern is changed again to execute the resurrection performance, so that the degree of expectation is high. It can be a stage production process. In FIG. 64(c), the duration t6″ of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols after the end of the special effect is, for example, about 3 to 5 seconds. In FIG. 64(c), the decoration after the end of the special effect The duration t6'' of the temporary stop state of the symbol may be longer than the execution time t5' of the special effect. On the other hand, in FIG. 64(a), the duration t6 of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols after the end of the special effect may be shorter than the execution time t5' of the special effect. The duration t6'' of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols after the end of the special effect in FIG. 64(c) is the same as the duration t6' of the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols after the end of the special effect in FIG. 64(b). , may be longer than time t6', or may be shorter than time t6'.

The resurrection effect in FIG. 64(c) may be common to at least part of the effect process that can be executed as the specific effect. As the resurrection effect in FIG. 64(c), a super ready-to-win effect such as a battle effect or the strongest effect may be executed. As the resurrection effect in FIG. 64(c), a button pushing effect or a button effect may be executed. In this case, the time adjustment effect may be executed according to the input operation timing in the button effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the time adjustment effect may be executed in the character production, or as shown in FIG. 61(c), the time adjustment effect may be executed in the special effect. good. In the latter case, the special effect may be executed again after the resurrection effect executed after the special effect.

A plurality of types of special effects (eye-catching effects) may be prepared. For example, a plurality of types of eye-catching effects with different display colors may be executable. When the eye-catching effect is executed, the degree of expectation for development of the effect after the end of the eye-catching effect may be suggested according to the type of the eye-catching effect. For example, compared to the case where the first type of eye-catching effect with the normal color is executed, the revival effect is more effective after the eye-catching effect when the second type of eye-catching effect with the red display color is executed. likely to be executed. In addition, when the third type of eye-catching effect with a gold display color is executed, the revival effect may always be executed after the eye-catching effect. That is, the third type of eye-catching effect with a gold display color may definitely suggest that the resurrection effect will be executed after that. As a result, the time during which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped after the end of the eye-catching effect of the third type may be a relatively long time t6''. Compared to the time (for example, t6) for which the decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state after the end of the eye-catching production of the two types, the time (for example, t6) for which the decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state after the third type of eye-catching production is completed. ”) may be longer.

FIG. 65 is a diagram schematically showing the production process in which the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped after execution of the special production, and shows an example of the screen when the winning result is winning. FIG. 65(a) shows an example of a screen in which the decorative pattern 502 becomes a winning mode in a specific effect and is temporarily stopped, and after the display of FIG. indicates a temporary stop state. FIG. 65(b) shows a screen example of a special effect suggesting transition to normal effect after the display of FIG. . FIG. 65(c) shows an example of a screen in which the display of FIG. 65(b) shifts to the normal effect, and the decorative pattern 504 temporarily stops in the normal effect in the winning mode. In FIG. 65(c), an animation display of the decorative pattern 504 is executed to emphasize that the win has been achieved. An animation display (also referred to as a pattern action display) accompanied by an action is performed. FIG. 65(d) shows a screen example in which the decorative design 504 is confirmed and stopped after the display of FIG. 65(c). In FIG. 65(d), the character portion of the decorative pattern 504 is displayed in the normal size, and the decorative pattern 504 is confirmed and stopped at the pattern combination of "333" which is a winning mode. At this time, the simple pattern 500 displayed at the bottom right of the screen is displayed stopped at the pattern combination of "333" which is the same pattern combination as the decorative pattern 504, suggesting that the pattern is stopped.

FIG. 66 is a diagram schematically showing the production process in which the decorative symbols change again after execution of the special production. FIG. 66(a) shows an example of a screen in which the decorative pattern 502 is removed in a specific effect and is temporarily stopped, and after the display of FIG. indicates a temporary stop state. FIG. 66(b) shows a screen example of a special effect suggesting a transition to normal effect after the display of FIG. . In FIG. 66(b), the display colors of the character image 516, the title image 518, and the background display 522 are different from those in FIG. 63(c). be. By setting the display color of the image dedicated to the special effect to the high-expectation color, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the resurrection effect will be executed after the end of the special effect, or that the occurrence of the resurrection effect is confirmed. FIG. 66(c) shows an example of a screen in which the display of FIG. 66(b) shifts to the normal effect, and the decorative pattern 504 is removed in the normal effect and temporarily stopped. In FIG. 66(c), the decorative pattern 504 maintains the temporary stop state, and the simple pattern 500 at the bottom right of the screen also continues to variably display. FIG.66(d) shows the example of a screen which the decorative design 504 changes again after the display of FIG.66(c). The re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern 504 suggests that the resurrection effect will be executed while the effect continues.

In an embodiment, it may be possible to execute an operation effect (button effect) for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the operation input means (effect button or effect lever) during the variable display of the symbols. It may be possible to start the specific effect with an input operation to the operation input means during execution of the operation effect as a trigger, or with an end of the operation effect as a trigger. A special effect (eye-catching effect) suggesting a transition to a normal effect may be displayed on the effect display device after the end of the specific effect and before the stopped display of the symbols. It may be possible to start the normal effect after the special effect ends. The duration of the special effect differs depending on whether or not there is an input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect, or according to the timing of the input operation to the operation input means during the execution of the operation effect. good too.

In an embodiment, when there is no input operation to the operation input means during execution of the operation performance, the time during which the decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state after the end of the special performance may be longer than the continuation time of the special performance. On the other hand, when there is an input operation to the operation input means during execution of the operation performance, the time during which the decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state after the end of the special performance may be shorter than the duration of the special performance.

In an embodiment, a first type of special effect (eye-catching effect) and a second type of special effect (eye-catching effect) may be executable. The time during which the decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state after the end of the second kind of special performance may be longer than the time during which the decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state after the end of the first kind of special performance.

In an embodiment, it may be possible to execute an operation effect (button effect) for instructing the player to perform an input operation to the operation input means (effect button or effect lever) during the progress of the game. The player may be shown that the input operation to the operation input means is valid within the effective period when the operation effect is started. It may be possible to execute an occurrence suggestion effect (button pushing effect) that suggests the occurrence of an operation effect before the start of the operation effect. The elapsed time from the start of the occurrence suggestion effect to the start of the effective period may be longer than the elapsed time from the start to the end of the effective period.

In some embodiments, multiple types of operation effects may be executable. The length of validity period of each of the plurality of types of operation effects may be the same. The time from the start of symbol variation to the start of one of the plurality of types of operation effects may differ according to the type of operation effect to be executed. The longer the time from the start of symbol variation to the start of the operation effect, the easier it is to execute a type of operation effect with a relatively high degree of expectation.

In an embodiment, it may be possible to execute multiple types of occurrence suggestion effects (button push effects). The execution time of each of the plurality of types of generation suggestive effects may be longer than the effective period of the operation effects. The execution time of each of the multiple types of generation suggesting effects may be different. The longer the time from the start of symbol variation to the start of any of the plurality of types of occurrence suggestion effects, the easier it is to execute a type of occurrence suggestion effect with a relatively long execution time.

(4. Step-up effect)
FIG. 67 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the step-up effect. The “step-up effect” in this embodiment means that a continuous suggestive effect that suggests the continuation of the effect accompanying the pattern change can be executed multiple times, and the effect progresses in stages according to the number of times the continuous suggestive effect is executed. Say things. As a step-up production in this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous variation production that suggests continuation of production by temporarily stopping and re-fluctuation of decorative patterns, and a special production that suggests continuation of production by production different from temporary stop and re-variation of decorative patterns There is a step-up production. In the special step-up effect, continuation of the effect is suggested by a special screen effect such as a cut-in effect, or a movable accessory effect in which the movable accessory 66 is operated.

FIG. 67(a) shows the effect process of the pseudo-continuous variation effect in which the continuation of the effect is suggested by the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols. FIG. 67(a) shows a case where three stages of pseudo-continuous variation are executed before the decorative pattern becomes ready-to-win. When the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the normal performance is executed, and the first stage of the pseudo-continuous variation performance is started in the course of the performance. The decorative patterns are temporarily stopped at the end of the first stage, and the first continuation suggesting performance is executed to suggest whether or not the performance is continued depending on whether the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are changed again. When the performance continues in the second stage, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the end of the second stage, and the second continuation suggestive performance is executed depending on whether the temporarily stopped decorative pattern changes again. When the performance continues in the third stage, the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state at the end of the third stage, suggesting the continuation of the performance, and the development performance such as the super ready-to-win performance is executed. At the end of the first stage, the second stage, or the third stage, the decoration pattern may be determined and stopped, and the performance may not continue.

In the pseudo-continuous variation effect of FIG. 67(a), one-step or two-step pseudo-continuous variation may be performed according to the progress of the effect, or four-step or more pseudo-continuous variation may be performed. In the pseudo-continuous variation effect, a display may be made to indicate to the player which stage of the pseudo-variation effect is being executed. For example, during the execution of the first stage effect, "first time", "first stage", etc. are displayed, and during the execution of the second stage effect, "second time", "second stage", etc. are displayed. may be done. During the execution of the third stage effect, "third time" or "third stage" may be displayed, or "final stage" or "MAX" may be displayed to indicate that it is the final stage effect. An indication may be made. It should be noted that during execution of the first stage effect, the player may not know whether or not the pseudo-continuous variation effect will be performed, so during the execution of the first stage effect, the display indicating the stage of the effect is not performed. may In other words, ``○th time'', ``○th stage'', etc. may be displayed only during the performance of the second and subsequent stages, and these displays may not be performed during the performance of the first stage. In other words, the display indicating the performance stage may not be performed until the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time, and the display indicating the performance stage may be performed after the decorative symbols are changed again after the first temporary stop.

In the pseudo-continuous variation effect of FIG. 67(a), the start effect may be executed at the start of the first stage effect. The start effect may be a cut-in effect suggesting transition from the normal effect to the pseudo-continuously variable effect, or may be a character effect in which a movable character is activated. When the start effect is executed, the background display of the effect may change before and after the start effect. Specifically, the background display for normal effects may be changed to the background display for pseudo-continuous-variation effects. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous variation effect may be executed in a display mode in which the normal effect continues, or the background display may not change before and after the start effect. In other words, the background display of the pseudo-continuous-variation effect may be the same as the background display of the normal effect. When the background display of the pseudo-continuous variation performance is the same as the background display of the normal performance, the start performance may not be executed, and the performance display is not switched between the normal performance and the first stage of the pseudo-continuous variation performance. It may be performed continuously. In other words, the normal effect at the start of the variation may be the first stage of the pseudo-continuous variation effect.

In the continuous suggestive effect in the pseudo-continuous variable effect shown in FIG. 67(a), the decorative pattern in the display form that can be displayed in the normal effect at the start of the change may be temporarily stopped, or it will not be displayed in the normal effect. A special symbol may be temporarily stopped. As the special symbol, for example, a symbol indicating words such as "Continue", "Continued", and "NEXT" suggesting that the effect will continue may be used. In the continuation suggestive performance in the pseudo continuous variation performance, only one special pattern may be temporarily stopped, or all three rows of decorative patterns may be temporarily stopped in a mode including at least one special pattern. In the continuation suggestive effect in the pseudo-continuous variation effect, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped in the off mode without being in the ready-to-reach mode. As a pattern combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative patterns, a "shifted pattern" may be used in which one or two of the three decorative patterns are out of the winning mode.

FIG. 67(b) shows the effect process of the special step-up effect in which the effect continuation is suggested by the dedicated screen effect. The special step-up effect is a dedicated effect different from the normal effect, and the effect progresses with a background display different from the background display of the normal effect. As a special step-up effect, for example, a "street battle effect" is executed in which the main character (protagonist) advances while kicking off a large number of small fish characters in the city. In the special step-up production shown in FIG. 67(b), there is a three-stage production process similar to the pseudo-continuous variation production shown in FIG. 67(a). The performance becomes executable. At the start of the special step-up effect, a start effect is executed that suggests entering into a "street battle".

In the first stage of the street battle production, a display indicating that the player is staying in the first stage such as "first stage" is displayed, and the street battle production continues. After that, at the end of the first stage, the continuation to the second stage is suggested by a continuation-suggestion production in which the words "second stage" are displayed on the full screen. After that, the second stage of the street battle effect is executed, and a display indicating that the player will stay in the second stage such as "second stage" is displayed on the screen. At the end of the second stage, the continuation to the third stage is suggested by a continuation suggestion effect in which the words "third stage" are displayed on the full screen. After that, the third stage of the street battle effect is executed, and a display indicating that the player will stay in the third stage such as "third stage" is displayed on the screen. At the end of the third stage, by displaying on the full screen a message indicating that the final stage has been reached, such as "final stage", a development suggestive production is executed that suggests continuation to the subsequent development production. In addition, when the special step-up effect ends in the middle, the decorative pattern is removed and the stop display is performed without executing the continuation suggestive effect at the end of the specific stage.

FIG. 67(c) shows the production process of the special step-up production in which the continuation of the production is suggested by the performance of the character. As the special step-up effect of FIG. 67(c), for example, an "episode effect" is executed in which episodes related to appearing characters are sequentially displayed in a story format. In the special step-up production shown in FIG. 67(c), there is a three-stage production process similar to the pseudo-continuous variation production shown in FIG. This makes it possible to execute subsequent development effects. At the start of the special step-up production, a start production is executed that suggests entering into an episode production. In the first stage of the special step-up effect, a display indicating that the player is staying in the first stage such as "first story" is displayed, and the story progresses. After that, at the end of the first stage (first story), a continuation suggestion effect for activating the movable accessory is executed, and continuation to the second stage (second story) is suggested. After that, the episode production of the second stage is executed, and at the end of the second stage (second episode), the continuation to the third stage (third episode) is suggested by the continuation suggestion production of activating the movable accessory. After that, the episode production of the third stage is executed, and at the end of the third stage (the third episode), the continuation of the subsequent development production is suggested by the development suggestive production of activating the movable role.

FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing the effect process of the special step-up effect, and shows an example screen of the "street battle effect" of FIG. 67(b). FIG. 68(a) is an example of a screen showing the start of a street battle, in which the words "Street Battle Enters!!" are displayed in the center of the screen. FIG. 68(b) shows a screen example of the street battle production in the first stage, and displays the production process in which the main character defeats a large number of enemy characters. At the upper right of the screen in FIG. 68(b), the words "1st STAGE" indicating that the player is staying in the first stage are displayed. FIG. 68(c) shows a screen example of a continuation suggestion effect to the second stage, and the words "2nd STAGE" suggesting the transition to the second stage are displayed in the center of the screen. FIG. 68(d) shows a screen example of the street battle effect in the second stage, and displays the effect process in which the main character battles an enemy character different from that in the first stage. At the upper right of the screen in FIG. 68(d), the words "2nd STAGE" indicating that the user is staying in the second stage are displayed. In the special step-up effects shown in FIGS. 68(a) to (d), the decorative symbols are not displayed, and the simple symbols 500 displayed at the bottom right of the screen are changed to indicate that the symbols are changing.

The step-up effects shown in FIGS. 67(a) to (c) may be configured to have the same effect time. In other words, the effect time of the special step-up effect shown in FIGS. 67(b) and (c) may be configured to be the same as the effect time of the pseudo continuous variation effect shown in FIG. 67(a). Also, the presentation time of each stage of the special step-up presentation of FIGS. 67(b) and (c) is configured to be the same as the pseudo-variation time of each stage of the pseudo-continuous variation presentation of FIG. 67(a). good too. As a result, a special step-up effect can be executed in which the stages of the effect progress at the same timing as when the pseudo-variation is repeated a plurality of times in the pseudo-continuous-variation effect. As a result, in the special step-up performance, it is possible to provide a performance process that gives the player an impression as if the pseudo-fluctuations were repeated a plurality of times, even though the decorative symbols are not temporarily stopped or changed again. . The performance time from the start performance of the special step-up performance and the pseudo-continuous variation performance to the development suggestion performance may be the same, while the performance time of each stage of the special step-up performance and the pseudo-continuous variation performance may be different. . For example, the start or end timing of the specific stage of the special step-up production and the pseudo continuous variation production (the end of the first stage, the start of the second stage, the end of the second stage, or the start timing of the third stage) You may allow

The development effect that can be transferred after the special step-up effect shown in FIGS. 67(b) and (c) may be the same as the development effect that can be transferred after the pseudo-continuous variation effect shown in FIG. 67(a). This makes it possible to prepare a performance pattern in which a special step-up performance or a pseudo-continuous variation performance is executed before the start of the specific development performance in the pattern variation in which the specific development performance is executed, thereby increasing the variation of performance. be able to. Further, the degree of expectation of performance of the special step-up performance and the degree of expectation of performance of the quasi-continuous variation performance are made to differ, for example, the degree of expectation of performance of the special step-up performance is higher than the degree of expectation of performance of the quasi-continuous variation performance. You may do so. As a result, depending on whether the special step-up effect or the pseudo-continuous change effect is executed before the specific development effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the effect over one pattern change period from the start of the change to the stop of the pattern It is possible to make a difference and prepare a large number of production variations with different expectations.

The step-up effects shown in FIGS. 67(a) to (c) may be executed after the decorative symbols become the ready-to-win state, not before the decorative symbols become the ready-to-win state. For example, the pseudo continuous variation effect or the special step-up effect may be started when the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode. In this case, the start effect of the pseudo-continuous variation effect of FIG. 67(a) is executed by the effect display in which the right and left pattern rows of the three pattern rows of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same pattern and become the ready-to-win mode. may The start effect of the special step-up effect in FIGS. 67(b) and (c) may be executed immediately after the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and is different from the effect display in which the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. may suggest the start of a special step-up effect. Further, the continuation-suggesting effect of the pseudo-continuous-variation effect shown in FIG. 67(a) may be a effect display in which the special symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle symbol row of the decorative symbols in the ready-to-win mode. Further, when the step-up effect shown in FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c) is executed after the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the button effect may be executed as the development suggestive effect, and is executed with the button effect as a trigger. A possible character movement production may suggest development to a development production. In addition, the button stimulation effect may be executed before the button effect executed as the development suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 69 is a diagram schematically showing the rendering process of the pseudo-continuous variation rendering. Each of Figure 69 (a) ~ (c), by executing the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative design twice in one design fluctuation period from the start of the fluctuation of the design to the stop of the fluctuation, three pseudo-fluctuations is a quasi-continuous variation rendition that executes In the third pseudo-fluctuation, which is the final round, a high-expectation development effect is executed, and it is possible to execute a effect to arouse whether or not the decorative pattern will win. Each of FIGS. 69(a) to (c) differs in the timing when the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state.

FIG. 69(a) shows an example of an effect process in which the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win state in the third pseudo-fluctuation. The normal performance is executed at the start of the variation, and the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time during the execution of the normal performance. After that, the decorative pattern changes again during execution of the normal effect, and the second pseudo-change is started. After that, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the second time during execution of the normal effect. After that, during execution of the normal performance, the decorative pattern changes again, and the third pseudo-change is started. After that, during the third pseudo-fluctuation, the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win state, and with the ready-to-win as a trigger, the development effect is executed. At the end of the development performance, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and then fixed and stopped. FIG. 69(a) shows the case where the normal effect is continuously executed until the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, but a specific effect different from the normal effect may be executed at any timing. . When executing the specific effect, a background display different from the background display used in the normal effect may be used.

FIG. 69(b) shows an example of an effect process in which the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state in the second pseudo-fluctuation. The rendering process in the first pseudo-fluctuation of FIG. 69(b) is the same as the rendering process in the first pseudo-fluctuation of FIG. 69(a). In FIG. 69(b), after the first temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win state, and the ready-to-win state is used as a trigger to execute a special effect. The special effect has an effect process with a relatively long effect time, and has an effect time longer than the second pseudo-fluctuation period of FIG. 69(a) in which the special effect is not executed. Examples of special effects include a battle effect in which the process of the main character battling an enemy character is displayed, and a mission effect in which the process of the main character completing a specific mission is displayed. At the end of the special performance, a performance is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo-continuous variation performance is to be continued. For example, an effect is executed to incite whether the special symbol suggesting the continuation of the effect is temporarily stopped, or whether the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the mode of removal. In the special production, it is suggested that the decorative pattern will change again after the temporary stop due to the victory in the battle production or the achievement of the mission in the mission production. Therefore, the special effect of FIG. 69(b) can be said to be an effect suggesting whether or not the pseudo-continuous variation effect can be continued. When the decorative pattern changes again after the end of the special performance and the third pseudo-variation is executed, the development performance is executed with the re-variation of the decorative pattern as a trigger. At the end of the development performance, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and then fixed and stopped.

FIG. 69(c) shows an example of an effect process in which the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode in the first pseudo-fluctuation. In FIG. 69(c), when the decorative symbols start to fluctuate, the normal effect is executed, after which the decorative symbols become the ready-to-win mode, and the special effect is executed with the ready-to-win state as a trigger. The special effect shown in FIG. 69(c) is similar to the special effect shown in FIG. 69(b), and has an effect process with a relatively long effect time. The special effect of FIG. 69(c) has a longer effect time than the first pseudo-fluctuation period of FIG. 69(a) in which the special effect is not executed. After execution of the special performance, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time corresponding to the end of the special performance. After that, the decorative pattern changes again, the second pseudo-change is executed, and the special effect shifts to the normal effect. A chance-up effect suggesting that the degree of expectation increases corresponding to the start of the second pseudo-variation may be executed. After that, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the second time during execution of the normal effect. After that, when the decorative symbols change again and the third pseudo-change is executed, the development effect is executed with the re-change of the decorative symbols as a trigger. At the end of the development performance, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and then fixed and stopped.

According to the pseudo-continuous variation performance including the special performances of FIGS. 69(b) and (c), the special performance is not executed by making it possible to execute the special performance in the pseudo-variation other than the final round. A performance with a higher degree of expectation than the pseudo-continuous variation performance can be achieved. In addition, instead of suggesting whether or not to continue the pseudo-continuous variation effect by simply temporarily stopping and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern during execution of the normal effect, the decorative pattern is set in a ready-to-win mode and a special effect is performed with the reach as a trigger. By starting and suggesting whether or not to continue the production, the production process can be made with a higher degree of expectation.

In an embodiment, there may be a first effect (quasi-continuous variation effect), a second effect (special step-up effect), and a third effect (development effect). In one symbol variation, the third effect may be executed after the first effect is executed. In one symbol variation, the third effect may be executed after the second effect is executed. The first effect and the second effect include a continuous suggestive effect that suggests whether or not the displayed effect will continue, and have a directing process in which the effect progresses in stages according to the number of times the continuous suggestive effect is executed. good too. The first effect may suggest continuation of the effect by a first continuation suggestive effect of re-fluctuation after temporarily stopping the decorative pattern. The second effect may suggest the continuation of the effect by a second continuation suggesting effect (dedicated screen effect, character movable effect) different from the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative pattern. The third effect may be a ready-to-win effect including a process in which decorative symbols are variably displayed in a ready-to-win mode.

In an embodiment, the effect time of the first effect (quasi-continuous variation effect) and the effect time of the second effect (special step-up effect) may be the same. In an embodiment, after the first continuous suggestive effect (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of decorative symbols) is executed in the first effect (pseudo continuous fluctuation effect), the next first continuous suggestive effect (temporary stop and re-fluctuation of decorative symbols) The time value until the re-fluctuation) is executed, and the second continuation suggestion after the second continuation suggestion production (dedicated screen production or character movable production) is executed in the second production (special step-up production) The time value until the production (dedicated screen production or character object movable production) is executed may be the same. In one embodiment, the decorative symbols may be displayed during execution of the first effect, while the decorative symbols may be hidden during execution of the second effect.

In an embodiment, even if it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous variation performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in one symbol variation and then re-varied to make it appear as if the symbol variation has been performed a plurality of times. good. It may be possible to start the special effect when the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode in the pseudo continuous variation effect. The special performance may include a performance process of suggesting whether or not the decorative symbols are changed again after the temporary stop of the decorative symbols to continue the pseudo-continuous variation performance. As the pseudo-continuous-variation performance, there may be a first pseudo-continuous-variation performance in which a special performance is executed and a second pseudo-continuous-variation performance in which no special performance is executed. The time value from when the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode before the start of the special effect in the first pseudo continuous variation effect to when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped after the start of the special effect is It may be longer than the time value of one pseudo-fluctuation period from the re-fluctuation to the next temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

(5. Special simulated continuous zone)
FIG. 70 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a game flow. In the game flow of FIG. 70, "Normal mode", "First time saving mode" and "Second time saving mode" are prepared as production modes during the normal game. be. The normal mode is an initial mode executed at the start of the game. The normal mode is executed in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (so-called low probability and low ball entry state), which is a so-called left-handed state. Therefore, in the normal mode, the game aims to make the special figure 1 a big hit. In the normal mode, for example, the game progresses along the flow of the variable production shown in FIG. "Direction" etc. can be executed. When the special figure 1 becomes a big hit in the normal mode, a special game is executed, and after finishing the special game, the game is shifted to the "first time saving mode" or "second time saving mode". In the game flow of FIG. 70, the transition destination is determined according to the type of big hit, and when it becomes "3R big hit", it shifts to the first time saving mode, and when it becomes "10R big hit", it goes to the second time saving mode. migrated.

The ratio of special figure 1 to be "10R big hit" is set very low, for example, the ratio of "10R big hit" in special figure 1 is 5%, and the ratio of "3R big hit" in special figure 1 is 95%. is. The "10R jackpot" always has probability variation, and is shifted to the probability variation state after execution of the 10R special game. On the other hand, the "3R jackpot" includes a "3R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to the probability variable state and a "3R normal jackpot" that does not shift to the probability variable state. In the case of "3R probability variable jackpot", the state is shifted to the probability variable state after the execution of the 3R special game. On the other hand, in the case of a "3R normal jackpot", the normal probability state is entered after the 3R special game is executed. The probabilities of "3R variable probability big hit" and "3R normal big hit" are almost the same, for example, the ratio of "3R variable probability big hit" is 50%, and the ratio of "3R normal big hit" is 45%.

The first time-saving mode is shifted to the normal mode when "3R probability variable big win" or "3R normal big win" is achieved. The first time-saving mode is executed in an easy-entering state (high-entering state), which is a so-called right-handed state. Therefore, in the first time-saving mode, the game aims to make the special figure 2 a big hit. 1st time reduction mode is performed in the state where whether it is a probability change state or a normal probability state was concealed, and becomes what is called a latent probability change state. The end period is set in the first time saving mode, and when the symbol variation is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the first time saving mode is shifted to the normal mode. When a big hit is achieved in the first time-saving mode, a special game is executed, and after the special game ends, the game is shifted to the "second time-saving mode". As the special figure 2 big hits, similarly to the special figure 1, ``10R probability variable big hit'', ``3R probability variable big hit'', and ``3R normal big hit'' are prepared. In the special figure 2, the ratio of "10R jackpot" is set higher than the special figure 1. For example, the ratio of "10R big hit" in special figure 2 is 50%, the ratio of "3R probability variable big hit" is 25%, and the ratio of "3R normal big hit" is 25%.

The second time-saving mode is shifted to when a 10R big win is achieved in the normal mode or when a big win is made in the first time-saving mode. It should be noted that even when the big hit is achieved in the second time saving mode, the game is shifted to the second time saving mode. Like the first time-saving mode, the second time-saving mode is executed in an easy-to-enter state (high-entering state), becomes a so-called right-handed state, and becomes a game aiming for the special figure 2 to become a big hit. In addition, in the second time saving mode, it can be said that it is a "continuous mode" because it has a game property aiming to loop the second time saving mode by repeatedly generating a special figure 2 big hit. In the second time-saving mode, the probability variation state or normal probability state is set according to the type of the jackpot that triggered the shift to the second time-saving mode. When the 10R big hit is transferred to the second time saving mode, the second time saving mode is executed in a manner in which the player can understand that the probability changing state is established because it is confirmed that the state is changed to the probability changing state. may be On the other hand, when the 3R big hit is made and the transition is made to the second time-saving mode, the player does not necessarily know which one of the ``3R probability variable big hit'' and the ``3R normal big hit'' has been hit. The second time saving mode may be executed in a latent probability variable state in which the player does not know whether or not there is. The end period is set in the second time saving mode, and when the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of pattern variations is completed, the second time saving mode is shifted to the normal mode.

The second time-saving mode is composed of two stages of production modes, "special pseudo continuous zone" and "RUSH zone". The special pseudo-run zone is executed until a predetermined number of symbol variations (for example, 20 times) are completed after shifting to the second time-saving mode. In the special pseudo-continuous zone, the pseudo-continuous variation effect with the number of pseudo-variations of 3, 6, 12, or 18 can be executed, and the pseudo-variation period of one time is set to a short time of about 1 second or less than 1 second. As a result, it becomes a performance process that makes it appear as if the pattern fluctuations are executed very many times at high speed. It should be noted that, in a predetermined number of pattern variations (for example, 20 times) at the end of the special pseudo-continuous zone, the pseudo-continuous variation effect may not be executed, and either the special pseudo-continuous zone becomes a big hit or the special pseudo-continuous zone is closed. An effect may be executed to prompt whether the game will end and move to the RUSH zone.

The RUSH zone is shifted to the second time-saving mode at the end of the special pseudo-continuous zone, and is executed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of pattern variations are completed. If the end of the second time-saving mode is 100 pattern changes and the end of the special pseudo-continuous zone is 20 pattern changes, the RUSH zone can be continued until 80 pattern changes are completed in the RUSH zone. . In the RUSH zone, a background display different from that in the special pseudo-continuous zone is used, and the production process is not accompanied by pseudo-continuous variation. The RUSH zone may be composed of multiple stages of production. For example, the first half of the RUSH zone (for example, until the end of 60 times of pattern fluctuation) is "chance mode", while the second half of the RUSH zone (for example, until the end of the remaining 20 times of pattern fluctuation) is "pinch mode" may be configured. For example, in the chance mode, the presentation process proceeds in a situation where there are few enemy characters, whereas in the pinch mode, the presentation process may proceed in a situation where there are many enemy characters.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the production process of the special pseudo-continuous zone. Each of FIGS. 71(a) to (d) shows an example of the screen when the decorative pattern 506 is temporarily stopped in the pseudo-continuous variation effect. For example, FIG. 71(a) is a screen example of the first temporary stop state, FIG. 71(b) is a screen example of the second temporary stop state, and FIG. This is an example of the screen in the temporary stop state, and FIG. 71D is an example of the screen in the temporary stop state for the fourth time. An image 536 of the main character is displayed in the center of the screen, and the appearance of the main character deciding various poses according to the pseudo-variation of the decorative pattern 506 is displayed. A decoration pattern 506 composed of three rows of patterns is displayed in the lower center of the screen. The decorative pattern 506 is composed only of a portion indicating numbers for identifying the type of pattern, and has a display form that does not include a portion that is additionally displayed such as a character. On each of the left and right sides of the screen, band images 532 with the words "special zone" indicating that the user is staying in the special pseudo-zone are displayed. The band image 532 extends in the vertical direction of the screen, and can be displayed so that the words "special zone" are scrolled in the vertical direction. At the top right of the screen, the words "Right Hit" and an image 534 showing a right-pointing arrow are displayed. is displayed variably.

In the special pseudo-run zone, 1) the pattern combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506, 2) the display color of the band image 532, and 3) the display mode of the main character image 536 suggest a high degree of expectation. Also, by changing the display modes of 1) to 3) in accordance with the execution of the pseudo-variation, it is suggested that the degree of expectation that the variation will result in a big hit is high. For example, by changing the display mode of 1) to 3) step by step to a high-expectation display mode according to the increase in the number of times of pseudo-variation within one pattern variation period, the variation becomes a big hit. This suggests a high level of expectations. In the special pseudo-run zone, 4) the scroll display mode of the band image 532 is changed according to the win/fail result or the predictive result of the fluctuation pattern, thereby suggesting a high degree of expectation for a big win. For example, it is suggested that the band image 532 is scrolled at a low speed in normal times, and the band image 532 is scrolled at a high speed, or the band image 532 is emphasized and scrolled at a high speed, thereby increasing the expectation. make it possible.

FIG. 72 is a table showing an example of a symbol combination when the decorative symbols 506 are temporarily stopped. As pattern combinations at the time of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506 in the special pseudo-continuous zone, there are five types: be prepared. The decorative patterns 506 used in the special pseudo-continuous zone are number patterns "1" to "9", and the even number patterns "2", "4", "6" and "8" are blue, and "1" and "5". The odd patterns of "9" are green, and the odd patterns of "3" and "7" are red. a) A loose stitch is a pattern combination in which all three rows of decorative patterns 506 have different numbers. For example, in the pattern combination of "174" shown in FIG. . b) The white order is a pattern combination in which the numbers of the three rows of decorative patterns 506 increase by one in order, for example, the pattern combination of "345" shown in FIG. 71(b). In order to emphasize that the b) white pattern combination is different from the a) random pattern combination, the pattern color is different from the usual blue, green and red colors, for example, a white pattern. The same color of c) to e) is a pattern combination in which the pattern colors of the decorative patterns 506 in the three rows are the same. For example, the symbol combination of "468" shown in FIG. It is a pattern. The degree of expectation of the pattern combination is set so that the degree of expectation increases step by step in the order of a) to e). Highest expectations are set.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol combination when the decorative symbol 506 is fixed and stopped. The pattern combinations at the time of fixed stop of the decorative pattern 506 in the special pseudo-continuous zone are: f) blue same color false, g) green same color false, h) red same color false, i) out of blue, j) out of green, k) blue Eight types are prepared for each figure, l) per green figure, and m) per red figure. f) Blue Same Color Gusset is a pattern combination in which the left and right symbols are different numbers and are the same color blue, but the middle symbol is green or red. g) Green Same Color Gusset is a pattern combination in which left and right patterns are green with different numbers and are the same color, but the middle pattern is blue. h) Red Same Color Gusset is a pattern combination in which the left and right symbols are different numbers and the red color is the same color, but the middle symbol is blue. The same color falsehoods of f) to h) are selected when the ready-to-win state does not occur before the decorative pattern 506 is fixed and stopped. i) Blue figure loss is a symbol combination in which the right and left symbols are blue symbols with the same numbers and reach mode, but the middle symbols are different numbers from the left and right symbols and are out. j) The green figure loss is a symbol combination in which the right and left symbols are green symbols with the same number and reach state, but the middle symbol has a different number from the left and right symbols and is out. k) A winning blue pattern is a winning pattern combination in which blue patterns of the same number are formed in three rows. l) The green pattern win is a pattern combination in which three rows of patterns are green patterns with the same number. m) The red figure hit is a combination of symbols in which red symbols with the same numbers in three lines become a hit. The symbol combinations i) to m) are selected when the ready-to-win state occurs before the decorative symbols 506 are fixed and stopped. Note that a) loose stitches may be used as the symbol combination at the time of finalization stop. Further, as a symbol combination at the time of temporary stop, the same color falsehoods of f) to h) may be used.

There are four types of display colors for the band image 532 in the special pseudo-continuous zone: white, blue, green, and red. The display colors of the strip image 532 are set so that the degree of expectation increases stepwise in the order of white, blue, green, and red, with white having the lowest degree of expectation and red having the highest degree of expectation. The display color of the belt image 532 in the special pseudo-continuous zone can change when the decorative pattern 506 starts to change or starts to change again. For example, the display color of the band image 532 in FIG. 71(a) is "white", but the display color changes with the subsequent re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern 506, and the display color of the band image 532 in FIG. 71(b) changes. The color is "blue". In some cases, the display color does not change when the decorative pattern 506 changes again. For example, as shown in FIG. The display color of the band image 532 may change after the display color of the band image 532 is maintained over a plurality of pseudo-variations. For example, as shown in FIG. There is also In this way, by changing the display color of the band image 532 step by step to a display color with a higher degree of expectation, it is suggested that the degree of expectation that the variation will be a big hit is high. Note that "golden" may be used as the display color of the band image 532, and when the display color of the band image 532 is gold, the change is a big win, or the reserved lottery value is a big win. It may be determined that In other words, the gold band display may be a hit-probability effect suggesting that the big win is confirmed.

A main character image 536 displayed in the center of the screen in the special pseudo-continuous zone is displayed so as to continue dancing while deciding a plurality of types of poses. For example, about 6 types of fixed poses are prepared, and the production progresses by sequentially determining a plurality of types of poses. At this time, the chance-up effect may be executed in response to the occurrence of a specific type of fixed pose, and the chance-up effect may suggest continuation of the pseudo-continuous variation effect. For example, when the sixth pseudo-variation or the 12th pseudo-variation results in a specific type of fixed pose, it may be suggested that the pseudo-variation after the seventh or the thirteenth pseudo-variation will continue.

FIG. 74 is a diagram schematically showing effect patterns that can be executed in a special pseudo-continuous zone. In the special pseudo-run zone, effect patterns are prepared in which the pseudo-variation is executed 1 time, 3 times, 6 times, 12 times or 18 times. FIG. 74(a) is a pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation is not performed and one symbol variation is performed. The performance time of the pattern in FIG. 74(a) is about 2 to 3 seconds, and after 1 to 2 seconds from the start of variation of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and fixed. FIG. 74(b) is a pattern in which three pseudo-fluctuations are executed, and after the start of the fluctuation of the decorative design, the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative design are executed twice, and the decorative design is changed in the third pseudo-fluctuation. A temporary stop state is established, and the stop is determined. One pseudo variation period in FIG. 74(b) is about 1 second, which is shorter than one symbol variation time in FIG. 74(a). The rendering time of the pattern in FIG. 74(b) is about 4 to 5 seconds. FIG. 74(c) is a pattern in which 6 pseudo-fluctuations are executed, and after the start of the decorative design fluctuation, the decorative design is temporarily stopped and re-fluctuation is executed 5 times, and the decorative design is changed in the 6th pseudo-fluctuation. A temporary stop state is established, and the stop is determined. One pseudo-fluctuation period in FIG. 74(c) is about 1 second, which is the same as one pseudo-fluctuation period in FIG. 74(b). The rendering time of the pattern in FIG. 74(c) is about 7 to 8 seconds.

Figure 74 (d) is a pattern in which the pseudo-variation is executed six times. different from the pattern. The pattern of FIG. 74(d) is constructed in the same way as the pattern of FIG. 74(c) in the rendering process until the sixth pseudo-fluctuation starts. On the other hand, in the pattern of FIG. 74(d), it is configured to be in the ready-to-win mode corresponding to the timing when the decorative symbols stop changing in the pattern of FIG. 74(c). In the pattern of FIG. 74(d), the button effect is executed when the decorative pattern reaches the ready-to-win state in the sixth pseudo-fluctuation, and after the button effect ends, the decorative pattern is lost and the button is fixed and stopped. There is prepared a case where a development performance with a high degree of expectation is executed after the performance is finished, and a case where a direct hit big win is announced after the button performance is completed. In FIG. 74(d), when the development effect is executed, a pattern that becomes a big hit and a pattern that becomes a loss are prepared after that.

FIG. 74(e) is a pattern in which 12 pseudo fluctuations are performed. 1 to 6 pseudo fluctuations in the first half of FIG. 74(e) are similar to the pattern of FIG. It differs from the pattern in FIG. 74(c) in that it remains as it is. The time during which the decorative symbols remain temporarily stopped in the sixth pseudo-fluctuation in FIG. 74(e) may be longer than the time during which the decorative symbols remain temporarily stopped in the first to fifth pseudo-fluctuations. A time of about 1 to 2 seconds may be secured. During the period during which the decorative symbol maintains the temporary stop state in the sixth pseudo-fluctuation shown in FIG. 74(e), a continuation suggesting effect suggesting that the pseudo-fluctuation of the seventh and subsequent times will continue may be executed. For example, a character in the center of the screen may take a pose of a particular type, thereby executing a chance-up effect suggesting continuation of the pseudo-variation. It should be noted that the continuation-suggestion effect may not be executed at the sixth pseudo-fluctuation in FIG. 74(e).

The 7th to 12th pseudo fluctuations in the latter half of FIG. 74(e) are similar to the pattern of FIG. 74(d). After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped by the sixth pseudo-fluctuation, the decorative symbols fluctuate again and the seventh pseudo-fluctuation is performed. After that, temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbols are executed five times, and the twelfth pseudo-variation is executed. In the pattern of FIG. 74(e), the decoration pattern becomes the ready-to-win state at the twelfth pseudo-fluctuation, and the button effect is executed with the ready-to-win as a trigger. When the decorative pattern is removed after the end of the button effect, and it stops, when the development effect with a high degree of expectation is executed after the end of the button effect, When it becomes a direct hit jackpot where the big win is announced after the end of the button effect is prepared. Also in FIG. 74(e), when the development effect is executed, a pattern that becomes a big hit and a pattern that becomes a loss are prepared after that.

FIG. 74(f) is a pattern in which 18 pseudo fluctuations are executed. The 1st to 6th pseudo fluctuations and the 7th to 12th pseudo fluctuations in FIG. 74(f) are the same as the 1st to 6th pseudo fluctuations in the first half of FIG. 74(e). In the pattern of FIG. 74(f) as well, the period during which the decorative symbols remain in the temporary stop state in the 6th and 12th pseudo-fluctuations is the It may be longer than the time to maintain the stopped state. In addition, during the period during which the decorative pattern maintains the temporary stop state in the 6th and 12th pseudo-fluctuations in FIG. may be performed. It should be noted that the continuation suggestion effect may not be executed in at least one of the sixth and twelfth pseudo fluctuations. The 13th to 18th pseudo fluctuations in FIG. 74(f) are similar to the pattern in FIG. 74(d). After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped by the 12th pseudo-fluctuation, the decorative symbols are again fluctuated and the 13th pseudo-fluctuation is performed, after which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-flushed 5 times, and 18 A second pseudo-variation is performed. At the 18th pseudo-variation, the decorative pattern becomes a ready-to-win state, and the button effect is executed with the ready-to-win as a trigger. The pattern shown in FIG. 74(f) is selected only when the hit/fail result is a big hit, and there is a pattern in which a high-expectation development effect is executed after the end of the button effect, and a big win after the end of the button effect. A pattern of a direct hit big hit, in which confirmation is announced, is prepared.

In the special pseudo-continuous zone, the basic pattern is 6-time pseudo-variation, and 12-time and 18-time pseudo-variation, which are multiples of 6, can be executed. In other words, if the number of pseudo fluctuations of the basic pattern is N times (N is an integer of 2 or more), M times the basic pattern such as 2 × N times and 3 × N times (M is an integer of 2 or more) M × A multiple pattern for performing N pseudo-variations is prepared. In the basic pattern, pseudo-variation is executed N times by executing temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative pattern N-1 times. In the multiple pattern, temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern are executed M×N−1 times to execute pseudo-fluctuation M×N times.

In the special pseudo-running zone, the pseudo-variation presentation of the basic pattern can be executed in a plurality of continuous pattern fluctuations, and it is possible to make it look as if the pseudo-variation of the multiple pattern is executed. In other words, by executing the multiple pattern in one pattern variation, it is possible to make it appear as if the pseudo-variation effect of the basic pattern is executed multiple times and the pattern variation is executed multiple times. do. For example, when 6 pseudo variation patterns are executed twice in succession, it can be seen as if 12 pseudo variation patterns have been performed. In addition, when the pseudo fluctuation pattern is executed three times in succession six times, it can be seen as if the pseudo fluctuation pattern has been executed eighteen times. Furthermore, when the pseudo fluctuation pattern of 6 times and the pseudo fluctuation pattern of 12 times are continuously executed, it can be seen as if the pseudo fluctuation pattern of 18 times has been executed.

FIG. 75 shows an effect pattern in which 12 pseudo fluctuations are executed. (1) is a pattern in which 12 pseudo fluctuations are executed in one symbol fluctuation period, and the pattern of FIG. 74(e) is executed. (2) is a pattern in which 12 pseudo variations are performed in two symbol variation periods, and the pattern of FIG. 74(d) is performed after the pattern of FIG. 74(c) is performed. In both patterns (1) and (2), an interval is provided at the end of the sixth pseudo-fluctuation, and in the 12th pseudo-fluctuation, it becomes a reach mode and the development effect can be executed. Common. The difference between the patterns of (1) and (2) is that the decoration pattern can be executed after the temporary stop of the decoration pattern in the sixth pseudo-variation, and the continuous suggestion effect can be executed without stopping, or the decoration in the sixth pseudo-variation It is whether or not the symbol is to be fixedly stopped after the temporary stop. Therefore, it can be said that it is difficult to distinguish between the pattern (1) and the pattern (2) unless one carefully observes the effect at the end of the sixth pseudo-fluctuation.

FIG. 76 shows an effect pattern in which 18 pseudo fluctuations are executed. (1) is a pattern in which 18 pseudo variations are performed in one symbol variation period, and the pattern of FIG. 74(f) is performed. (2) is a pattern in which 18 pseudo variations are performed in two symbol variation periods, and the pattern of FIG. 74(e) is performed after the pattern of FIG. 74(c) is performed. (3) is a pattern in which 18 symbol variations are executed in 3 symbol variation periods, and after the pattern of FIG. 74(c) is performed twice consecutively, the pattern of FIG. 74(d) is performed. be done. In any of the patterns (1) to (3), an interval is provided at the end of the 6th and 12th pseudo fluctuations, and in the 18th pseudo fluctuation, it becomes a reach mode and the development effect can be executed. The production process is common. The difference between the patterns (1) to (3) is that the 6th and 12th pseudo-fluctuations make it possible to execute a continuous suggestive effect without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern after the temporary stop, or the 6th and 12th times It is determined whether the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped after the temporary stop. Therefore, it can be said that it is difficult to discern the patterns (1) to (3) unless one carefully looks at the effects at the end of the 6th and 12th pseudo fluctuations.

In the special pseudo-run zone, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the pseudo-variation of 12 times or 18 times, which is a multiple pattern, is performed than when the pseudo-variation of 6 times, which is the basic pattern, is performed. configured to be In such a configuration, by enabling the performance patterns shown in FIGS. 75 and 76 to be executed, it is possible to determine whether the multiple pattern pseudo-variation is being executed even though the basic pattern pseudo-variation is being executed. Such an impression can be given to the player, and the degree of expectation of the player can be increased. Also, the number of times of variation of special symbols in the special pseudo-run zone can be made difficult for the player to understand, and the remaining number of variations until reaching the end of the special pseudo-run zone can be made difficult to understand. As a result, it is possible to create an effect that arouses a sense of frustration that it is unknown how long the special pseudo-continuous zone will last. It should be noted that in the special pseudo-run zone, the number of symbol changes may be concealed without being displayed on the screen, thereby making it difficult to understand the end of the special pseudo-run zone. On the other hand, in the RUSH zone, the end of the RUSH zone may be clarified by displaying the number of symbol variations on the screen. For example, by counting down the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the end of the high-ball-entering state in the pinch mode, it is possible to create an effect that arouses the frustration that the high-ball-entering state may end soon.

FIG. 77 is a diagram schematically showing a pseudo-fluctuation scenario. The pseudo-fluctuation scenario determines the detailed contents of the effect in one symbol fluctuation period of the special pseudo-continuous zone. Pseudo-fluctuation scenarios are prepared for each of the patterns in FIGS. 74(a) to (f). 74(a) to (d), one type of pseudo fluctuation scenario is prepared for each pattern in which the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 6 or less. Specifically, in the pattern of FIG. 74(a), a) a one-time variation scenario is selected, and in the pattern of FIG. 74(b), b) a three-time variation scenario is selected. In the pattern of FIG. 74(c), c) the scenario without 6-time variation development is selected, and in the pattern of FIG. 74(d), the scenario d) with 6-time variation development is selected. On the other hand, in the pattern of 12 pseudo fluctuations in FIG. 74 (e), e-1) scenario with 12 fluctuations and e-2) "no 6 fluctuations" and "with 6 fluctuations" Two types of scenarios are prepared by combining The pseudo fluctuation scenario e-2) corresponds to a combination of the pseudo fluctuation scenarios c) and d). In addition, in the pattern of FIG. 74(f) where the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 18, f-1) scenario with 18 fluctuation development and f-2) "6 fluctuation without development" and "12 fluctuation development" , and f-3) a scenario combining "6 times without fluctuation development" twice and "with 6 times fluctuation development". The f-2) pseudo-variation scenario corresponds to a combination of c) and e-1) pseudo-variation scenarios, and the f-3) pseudo-variation scenario is a combination of c) and d) pseudo-variation scenarios. equivalent to

As "scenario elements" that constitute pseudo-variation scenarios corresponding to each of the patterns in FIGS. There are six types available, namely, "with", "with 12 times variable development", and "with 18 times variable development". A pseudo-fluctuation scenario is realized by using either one of the six types of scenario elements alone or by using two types of scenario elements in combination. Furthermore, for each type of scenario element, there are a "symbol change pattern" that defines the pattern combination change pattern when the decorative pattern 506 is temporarily stopped, and a "band color change pattern" that defines the change pattern of the display color of the band image 532. be prepared. A plurality of pattern change patterns and a plurality of band color change patterns are prepared according to the types of scenario elements, and a lottery for determining the pattern change pattern and a lottery for deciding the band color change pattern are separately performed. be executable. Thus, for one scenario element, the number of performance patterns obtained by multiplying the number of types of pattern change patterns by the number of types of band color change patterns can be executed, and a wide variety of performances can be executed.

FIG. 78 shows an example of a symbol change pattern and a band color change pattern in "1-time variation", "3-time variation" and "6-time variation without development". FIG. 78(a) shows the symbol change pattern and the band color change pattern corresponding to the scenario element of "one time variation". In the one-time variation, only one type of pattern change pattern is prepared in which the pattern combination when the decorative pattern 506 is fixed and stopped is "a) loose eyes", and one type in which the display color of the band image 532 is "white". only the band color change pattern of . FIG. 78(b) shows the symbol change pattern and the band color change pattern corresponding to the scenario element of "three times variation". In the case of 3-time fluctuation, at the 1st and 2nd temporary stops, it will be "a) loose eyes" or "b) white order", and at the 3rd fixed stop, "a) loose eyes" or "f) blue same color" Two types of pattern change patterns are prepared. Further, in the three-time variation, only one type of strip color change pattern is prepared in which the display color of the strip image 532 is “white” throughout the one to three pseudo-variations. In FIG. 78(b), "ba" means "a) loose stitches", and "normal" means "b) white regular stitches".

FIG. 78(c) shows an example of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern without 6 times variation development. Five kinds of pattern change patterns are prepared for the scenario element of "no change in 6 times". In the case of "no development of 6 times fluctuation", since it does not become a reach mode in the 6th pseudo fluctuation, the pattern combination of the decorative pattern 506 that is fixed and stopped in the 6th pseudo fluctuation is f) ~ h) same color false (blue false, green false, and red false). In FIG. 78(c), "blue" means "c) blue same color", and "blue/green/red false" is f) to h) same color false (blue false, green false, red false) means to be either

In the symbol change patterns 1 to 4 of "no development of 6 times variation" in FIG. 78(c), the symbol combination at the time of the first and second temporary stop is the symbol change pattern of "3 times variation" in FIG. 78(b). Same as 1-2. Therefore, when the symbol change patterns 1 to 4 are executed, at the timing of the second temporary stop of the decorative symbols, it is configured such that it cannot be determined whether the number of times of pseudo fluctuation is 3 or 6. In the symbol change pattern 5 of FIG. 78(c), the symbol combination at the time of the second temporary stop is "a) loose eye", which is a different symbol combination from the symbol change patterns 1 and 2 of "three times variation". . Therefore, in the case of pattern change pattern 5, it is determined that the pseudo change will occur six times or more. In addition, in the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 of "No change in 6 times", the symbol combination at the time of the third temporary stop is "a) loose eyes", "b) white eyes" or "c) blue same color eyes". , and the symbol combination at the time of the fourth temporary stop is "b) white order" or "c) blue same color". The symbol combination at the time of the fifth temporary stop is "c) blue same color".

In the pattern combination at the time of the temporary stop of the 1st to 5th times of the decorative pattern, it can change to a pattern combination with a relatively high degree of expectation as the number of temporary stops increases, but a pattern combination with a relatively low degree of expectation. does not change to Specifically, after becoming "b) white order", it does not change to "a) loose stitch", and after becoming "c) blue same color", "a) loose stitch" or " b) There is no change to "white order". Also, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop is configured to change step by step. For example, although "a) loose stitches" may change to "b) white order", "a) loose stitches" and then "b) white order" are skipped and "c ) does not change to “blue eyes”. In addition, in the symbol change pattern, the symbol combination does not always change for each temporary stop, and the same type of symbol combination can be obtained at a plurality of consecutive temporary stop timings. For example, like pattern change pattern 2, the order of white is repeated 3 times, or like pattern change pattern 3, the same blue color is repeated 3 times, or like pattern change pattern 5, the random order is repeated 3 times. It may be dropped. In addition, different types of symbol combinations may occur at three consecutive temporary stop timings. The pattern combination may change in order of the same color.

In FIG. 78(c), "6 times no variation development", two types of band color change patterns are prepared. In band color change pattern 1, the display color of the band image 532 is "white" in the 1st to 3rd pseudo fluctuations, and the display color of the band image 532 is "blue" in the 4th to 6th pseudo fluctuations. The display color of the 1st to 3rd band image 532 of the 1st to 3rd band color change pattern 1 of "no development of 6 times change" is the same as the color change pattern of "3 times change", so we paid attention to the color change pattern. In this case, it is configured so that it cannot be determined whether the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or 6. In the band color change pattern 2 of “no development of 6 times fluctuation”, the display color of the band image 532 in the 1st to 2nd pseudo fluctuations is “white”, and the display color of the band image 532 in the 3rd to 6th pseudo fluctuations is “white”. The display color is "blue". According to the band color change pattern 2, the display color of the band image 532 changes in the third pseudo-fluctuation, suggesting that the pattern is different from the band color change pattern of the "three-time fluctuation". It can be suggested that the pseudo-fluctuation of

FIG. 79 shows an example of a symbol change pattern and a band color change pattern in "with 6 times variation development". 22 types of symbol change patterns are prepared for the scenario element "with 6 times variation development". In the scenario element of "with 6 times variation development", since it becomes a reach mode at the 6th pseudo variation, the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped at the pattern combination that becomes a reach out or hit. In symbol change patterns 1 to 5, the symbol combination at the temporary stop of 1st to 5th times is the same as the symbol change pattern of "6 times no fluctuation development" in FIG. Only the pattern combinations are different. The symbol combination at the 6th fixed stop of the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 is i) blue figure out, j) green figure out, k) blue figure hit, l) green figure hit, m) red figure hit. Become. When the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 79 are executed, it can be said that it cannot be determined whether or not the decorative symbol is in the ready-to-win mode at the timing of the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

The pattern change patterns 6 to 12 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the pattern combination at the time of the fifth temporary stop of the decorative pattern is "d) Same color as green", and has a higher degree of expectation than the pattern change patterns 1 to 5. suggest that It can be said that it is determined that the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode when "d) same color as green" is obtained when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the fifth time. The symbol combinations at the 6th fixed stop of the symbol change patterns 6 to 12 are j) off the green chart, l) hit the green chart, m) hit the red chart, k) hit the blue chart or i) hit the blue chart. Don't be left out. The symbol change patterns 13 to 20 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the symbol combination at the time of the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbols is "e) Same color as red", and has a higher degree of expectation than the symbol change patterns 1 to 12. suggest that The symbol combination at the time of the sixth fixed stop of the symbol change patterns 13 to 20 is m) red figure only. Therefore, it can be said that when "e) the same color as red" occurs at the fifth temporary stop of the decorative symbols, it is determined that the red symbols will win the jackpot.

The pattern change patterns 21 to 22 in FIG. 79 are premier patterns in which the decoration pattern is "golden" or "giraffe pattern" at the time of the 1st to 5th temporary stops. Since the symbol combination at the sixth fixed stop of the symbol change pattern 21 is "l) green figure hit" or "m) red figure hit", the symbol combination of "gold" at the time of the first temporary stop. If it is, it is determined that the green symbol or the red symbol will win. In addition, since the symbol combination at the sixth fixed stop of the symbol change pattern 22 is only "m) red figure win", when the symbol combination of "giraffe pattern" is obtained at the first temporary stop, It is decided that the red pattern will win (for example, it will be a 10R jackpot). In addition, these premium patterns can be executed only with the scenario element "with 6 times variable development", and are configured not to be executed with the scenario elements "with 12 times variable development" and "with 18 times variable development", which will be described later. be done. In the premium pattern, it is confirmed that a big hit will occur at the first temporary stop, so if it is applied to a production pattern with a large number of simulated stops such as 12 times or 18 times, the production until the winning pattern is confirmed and stopped will be delayed. This is because, on the contrary, it may become a troublesome performance.

In the symbol change pattern of "with 6 times variation development" in FIG. 79, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop may not change by one step, and may be configured to change by two steps or more at a time. For example, in the symbol change pattern 10, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the third time, "a) separate stitches" are displayed, and when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the fourth time, "d) the green same color stitches" are displayed, and "b) the white stitches are displayed. It is configured to skip "first eye" and "c) blue same color eye". In addition, in the symbol change patterns 13 to 16, after the fourth temporary stop of the decorative pattern is "c) the same blue color", the fifth temporary stop of the decorative pattern is "e) the same red color". d) configured to skip "green eyes". Since such a pattern change pattern does not exist in the pattern change patterns shown in FIGS. 78(a) to (c), if the pattern combination changes by two stages or more at once, the decorative pattern may be in the ready-to-win mode. It can be said that it is suggested that it will be confirmed and that there will be high expectations.

In the symbol change pattern of "6 times variation development" in FIG. 79, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbol 506 from the first pseudo-variation is the same color as "c) blue same color" or "d) green same color". There are patterns 11, 12, 19, and 20 that serve as eyes. Such a symbol change pattern does not exist in the symbol change patterns of FIGS. 78(a) to (c). Therefore, when the symbol combination at the time of the first temporary stop is of the same color, it can be said that the decorative symbol is determined to be in the ready-to-reach mode, suggesting a high degree of expectation.

In FIG. 79, "with 6 times variation development", 13 kinds of band color change patterns are prepared. The band color change patterns 1 and 2 in FIG. 79 are the same as the band color change patterns 1 and 2 in FIG. Band color change patterns 3 to 6 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the display color of the band image 532 changes to green, suggesting a higher degree of expectation than the band color change patterns 1 and 2. FIG. A pattern in which the display color of the band image 532 is green suggests that the decorative design will be the ready-to-win. Band color change patterns 7 to 13 in FIG. 79 are patterns in which the display color of band image 532 changes to red, suggesting a higher degree of expectation than band color change patterns 1 to 6. FIG. A pattern in which the display color of the band image 532 is red suggests that after the decorative pattern becomes a reach and the button performance is executed, the development performance is executed or it is determined that a direct hit will be a big hit. In other words, when the display color of the band image 532 is red, it is confirmed that there will be no failure immediately after the button effect after the reach, suggesting a high degree of expectation.

In the band color change pattern of "with 6 changes" in FIG. 79, there are patterns 5, 6, 9 to 13 in which the display color of the band image 532 becomes blue or higher after the first pseudo change. Such a band color change pattern does not exist in the band color change patterns of FIGS. 78(a) to (c). Therefore, it can be said that when the display color of the strip image 532 in the first pseudo-variation is not white, it is suggested that the decorative pattern will be the ready-to-win.

FIG. 80 is a table showing an example of a combination of premium patterns. FIG. 80 shows a symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of decorative symbols 1 to 5 times in the symbol change patterns 21 and 22 of FIG. In the premium pattern in which the decoration pattern is a gold pattern or a giraffe pattern, the combination of patterns at the time of temporary stop makes a pun, suggesting a high degree of expectation. In the example of FIG. 80, nine types of puns for the gold pattern and puns for the giraffe pattern are prepared, each of which has a left pattern of "1" to "9". In the premium pattern, not only is the decorative pattern of the pattern combination used as a pun displayed temporarily stopped, but a message indicating the meaning of the pun may also be displayed. For example, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped by the symbol combination of "129" in the gold symbol, the wording of "a break" may be displayed. In addition, in order to more clearly indicate that the numbers in the symbols are puns, a word such as "one shot (129)" may be displayed, which includes both the meaning of the puns and the combination of symbols.

FIG. 81 shows an example of a symbol change pattern and a band color change pattern in "with 12 times variation development". FIG. 81(a) shows 12 kinds of symbol change patterns of "with 12 times variation development". The symbol change patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 81(a) are patterns in which the symbol combination at the 11th temporary stop of the decorative symbols is "d) Same color as green", and the symbol combination at the 12th fixed stop is , j) off the green map, l) hit the green map, or m) hit the red map. The symbol change patterns 6 to 12 in FIG. 81(a) are patterns in which the symbol combination at the time of the 11th temporary stop of the decorative symbols is "e) Same color as red", and the symbol combination at the time of the 12th fixed stop is , "m) per red figure" only. In the scenario element of "with 12 times fluctuation development", the decorative pattern does not stop at the 6th pseudo-fluctuation, and after the 6th temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuates again, and the pseudo-fluctuation after the 7th time executed. Therefore, in the pattern change patterns 1 to 12 of "with 12 times fluctuation development", the pattern combination at the time of the 6th temporary stop will be the same color c) to e), f) to j) The same color false or out of reach It is not a symbol combination. Also, the symbol change patterns 1 to 12 are configured so that the symbol combinations at the time of the temporary stop of the 6th time and the 7th time are of the same kind, and the pseudo variation does not end at the 6th time, but continues from the 7th time onwards. is suggested.

In the symbol change patterns 1 to 12 of FIG. 81(a) "with 12 times fluctuation development", the symbol combination at the time of the first temporary stop is "b) white order", and at the time of the first temporary stop It is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher than the case where the symbol combination is "a) loose eyes". The symbol combinations at the 3rd to 5th temporary stops are "b) white order" or "c) blue same color", suggesting high expectations "d) green same color" and "e). It is configured so as not to be "red same color eyes". Conversely, "d) green same color" and "e) red same color" suggesting high expectations are used as a symbol combination at the time of temporary stop after the 6th time, pseudo fluctuation after the 7th time is used after the timing at which the player understands that the will continue. As a result, it is possible to provide an effect process in which it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the pseudo-fluctuation will continue after the seventh time, just by looking at the symbol combination at the temporary stop of the 1st to 5th times. However, like symbol change patterns 5 and 10, the pattern combination at the time of temporary stop of 1 to 4 times is "b) white order" is a pattern change pattern with the number of pseudo fluctuations of 6 times or less. does not exist. Therefore, it can be said that when the symbol change patterns 5 and 10 are executed, it is suggested that 12 or more pseudo fluctuations are determined.

FIG. 81(b) shows 11 kinds of zonal color change patterns "with 12 times fluctuation development". Band color change patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 81(b) are patterns in which the display color of the band image 532 changes to green. Suggests that it is determined to be a reach. Band color change patterns 6 to 11 in FIG. 81(b) are patterns in which the display color of the band image 532 changes to red. Or, it suggests that it will be confirmed that it will be a direct hit big hit. In the band color change pattern of "with 12 times fluctuation development" in FIG. 81(b), there are patterns 5, 10, and 11 in which the display color of the band image 532 becomes blue or higher after the first pseudo change. Since such a band color change pattern does not exist in the band color change patterns of FIGS. It can be said that it is suggested that it is decided that the pattern becomes the reach.

FIG. 82 shows an example of a symbol change pattern and a band color change pattern in "with 18 times variation development". FIG. 82(a) shows 10 kinds of symbol change patterns of "with 18 times variation development". The symbol change patterns 1 to 5 in FIG. 82(a) are patterns in which the symbol combination at the 17th temporary stop of the decorative symbols is "d) Same color as green", and the symbol combination at the 18th fixed stop is , ``l) hit the green map'' or ``m) hit the red map''. The symbol change patterns 6 to 10 in FIG. 81(a) are patterns in which the symbol combination at the 17th temporary stop of the decorative symbols is "e) the same red color", and the symbol combination at the 18th fixed stop is , "m) per red figure" only. In the scenario element of "with 18 times fluctuation development", the decorative pattern is not fixed and stopped at the 6th and 12th pseudo fluctuations, and after the 6th temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern changes again and the 7th and subsequent Pseudo-fluctuations are executed, and after the 12th temporary stop of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols fluctuate again, and the 13th and subsequent pseudo-fluctuations are executed. Therefore, even in "with 18 times variation development", the symbol change patterns 1 to 10 are configured so that the symbol combination at the time of the temporary stop of the 6th time and the 7th time is the same type, and the pseudo variation does not end at 6 times. It is suggested that it continues after the 7th time. On the other hand, the symbol combinations for the 12th and 13th temporary stops are different from the symbol change patterns 1 to 5 configured so that the 12th and 13th times are the same kind of symbol combination. There are pattern change patterns 6 to 10 to be used. If the symbol combination at the time of the 12th temporary stop is "same color" that suggests the continuation of the pseudo fluctuation, it is confirmed that the pseudo fluctuation will be executed 18 times, so the pseudo fluctuation will continue after the 13th time. This is because there is little need to explicitly suggest that

FIG. 82(b) shows 11 kinds of zonal color change patterns "with 18 times fluctuation development". In band color change patterns 1 to 11 in FIG. 82(b), the display color of the band image 532 changes to red.
The change pattern of the display color of the band image 532 in the 1st to 12th pseudo fluctuations of the band color change patterns 1 to 11 in FIG. Same as change patterns 1-11. In the band color change patterns 1 to 11 in FIG. 82(b), the display color of the band image 532 in the 13th to 18th pseudo fluctuations is red, and the decorative pattern becomes the reach and the button effect is executed. will be executed or it will be a direct hit jackpot.

In this embodiment, when scenario elements are determined according to the production patterns of FIGS. A lottery for determining the pattern is executed separately. As a result, according to the increase in the number of pseudo fluctuations, the decorative pattern 506 changes to a display mode that suggests a high degree of expectation (for example, the same color of green or the same color of red), while the band image 532 suggests a high degree of expectation. It is possible that the display mode (for example, green or red) does not change. Conversely, while the decorative pattern 506 does not change to a display mode that suggests high expectations (for example, the same color of green or the same color of red) according to the increase in the number of pseudo fluctuations, the band image 532 suggests high expectations. It may change to a display mode (for example, green or red). Note that both the decorative pattern 506 and the band image 532 may change to a display mode suggesting a high degree of expectation, and both the decorative pattern 506 and the band image 532 should not change to a display state suggesting a high degree of expectation. can also be Further, by randomly determining the combination of the pattern change pattern and the band color change pattern, the timing of changing the pattern combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506 and the timing of changing the display color of the band image 532 are synchronized. Sometimes it can be out of sync.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a pattern change pattern and a band color change pattern in the scenario element of "with 6 times variation development", showing an example of a case where the change timing is synchronized and a case where the change timing is not synchronized. FIG. 83(a) shows an example where the change timings of the design change pattern and the band color change pattern are synchronized, and shows the case where the design change pattern 2 and the band color change pattern 1 of FIG. 79 are selected. As shown, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol 506 is "b) white order" in the 1st to 3rd pseudo fluctuations, and "c) blue same color" in the 4th to 6th pseudo fluctuations, or It is "f) blue same color fake". Also, the display color of the strip image 532 is white in the 1st to 3rd pseudo fluctuations, and is blue in the 4th to 6th pseudo fluctuations. Therefore, in this combination of patterns, the display color of the strip image 532 changes from white to blue at the start of the fourth pseudo-fluctuation, and the decoration pattern 506 becomes relatively highly expected in the fourth pseudo-fluctuation. It can be said that the chance-up effect is executed in synchronism with the same timing because the game changes to "c) eyes of the same blue color" and is temporarily stopped. In addition, since the decorative pattern 506 changes to blue and the display color of the band image 532 also changes to blue, it can be said that a chance-up effect suggesting a similar degree of expectation is executed synchronously.

FIG. 83(b) shows an example where the change timings of the design change pattern and the color change pattern are not synchronized, and shows the case where the design change pattern 1 and the color change pattern 4 of FIG. 79 are selected. As illustrated, the pattern combination of the decorative pattern 506 is "a) loose stitches" in the first pseudo-fluctuation, "b) white order" in the second to third pseudo-fluctuations, and 4 In the pseudo-fluctuations from the first to the fifth times, it is "c) blue same color", and at the sixth fixed stop, it is "g) green same color false". On the other hand, the display color of the band image 532 is white in the 1st to 2nd pseudo fluctuations, blue in the 3rd to 4th pseudo fluctuations, and green in the 5th to 6th pseudo fluctuations. Therefore, in this combination of patterns, the display color of the strip image 532 changes with the start of the pseudo-fluctuations of an odd number of times (three times, five times), whereas the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 506 is caused by the pseudo-fluctuations of the odd number of times. The symbol combination of time does not change. On the other hand, in the pseudo fluctuations of an even number (2 times, 4 times, 6 times), the display color of the band image 532 does not change with the start of the pseudo fluctuations as a trigger, whereas the pattern combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbols changes. do. That is, it can be said that the chance-up effect by changing the display mode of the decorative pattern 506 and the chance-up effect by changing the display mode of the band image 532 are executed at different timings.

In the special pseudo-continuous zone, a pseudo-continuous variation effect with a large number of pseudo-variations such as 6 times, 12 times or 18 times is executed. In the special pseudo-run zone, it can be said that it is difficult to execute the chance-up effect based on the symbol display mode, such as changing the kind of symbol combination at the time of temporary stop in one pseudo-variation. Also, in the special pseudo-run zone, it can be said that the chance-up effect based on the display mode of the display different from the pattern, such as the display color of the band image changing in one pseudo-change, is difficult to execute. On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous variation effect (also called normal pseudo-continuous) that can be executed in a different effect mode (for example, normal mode) from the special pseudo-continuous zone has a small number of pseudo-variation times, such as 2 or 3 times, so each time It can be said that there is a high possibility that the chance-up effect will be executed in the pseudo fluctuation of. In the normal pseudo-run, it can be said that the chance-up effect based on the symbol display mode, such as temporary stop display of special symbols such as "Continue", is likely to be executed in one pseudo-variation. In addition, in the normal pseudo-continuation, in one pseudo-variation, it is based on the display mode of the display that is different from the pattern such as the display suggesting the continuation to the next stage such as "second stage" and the execution of special effects such as mission effects. It can be said that the chance-up production is easily executed. In the normal pseudo-run, a chance-up effect using special symbols can be executed, while in the special pseudo-run zone, a chance-up effect is performed using normal number symbols, and a chance-up effect using special symbols. is configured not to run. In addition, in the normal pseudo-continuation, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to execute a symbol action display that changes the display mode of the decorative symbols while fixing the display position of the decorative symbols, whereas in the special pseudo-continuous zone, the symbol action can be displayed. Display is configured to not run.

In the special pseudo-continuous zone, a pseudo-continuous variation performance with a large number of pseudo-variations such as 6, 12 or 18 times is executed, so in each pseudo-variation, the pattern combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbols is the same color with high expectations. It can be said that there is a low possibility that it will change on chance. This is in contrast to the situation in which when the decorative pattern becomes the same color chance when the pattern change is confirmed and stopped multiple times in the normal mode, there is a high possibility that it will change to the same color chance with a high degree of expectation in each pattern change. I can say. The "chance eye effect" in the normal mode may be a so-called look-ahead effect. It may be an effect that the combination of . In the chance eye production, it is suggested that the chance eye of the even number symbol combination and the chance eye of the blue symbol combination are low expectations, while the chance eye of the odd number symbol combination and the chance eye of the red symbol combination are high expectations. It is suggested that The chance eye effect may be continuously executed over a plurality of symbol changes, and when the symbol is stopped for the first time, it becomes a blue chance eye, when the symbol is stopped for the second time, it becomes a green chance eye, and when the symbol is stopped for the third time, it becomes a red chance eye. It can be an eye. In the chance display, when the symbols are stopped 1st to 3rd times, the chances are the same color, and when the symbols are stopped for the 2nd and 3rd times, the chances of the same color are changed to high expectations. It may be suggested that the expectation of a big win is high.

In the special pseudo-continuous zone, one pseudo-fluctuation period is shortened compared to the normal pseudo-continuous zone that can be executed in the normal mode. That is, in the special pseudo-running zone, the pseudo-variation is repeated at a higher speed than in the normal pseudo-running zone. In the special pseudo-continuous zone, one pseudo-fluctuation period is fixed, and the length of each pseudo-fluctuation period of a plurality of pseudo-fluctuations is constant. The special pseudo-continuous zone may be configured such that the predetermined pseudo-fluctuation period is relatively long. Specifically, the lengths of the 6, 12 and 18 quasi-variation periods of the special pseudo-continuous zone are the lengths of the 1-5, 7-11 and 13-17 times of the special pseudo-continuous zone. It may be longer than the length of the pseudo fluctuation period. On the other hand, in the normal pseudo-run, all of the pseudo fluctuation periods may be common, or all of the pseudo fluctuation periods may be different.

In the special pseudo-continuous zone, the length of one pseudo-fluctuation period may vary according to the number of pseudo-fluctuations. For example, in the special pseudo-continuous zone, the length of one pseudo-fluctuation period may be shortened as the number of pseudo-fluctuations increases. For example, the length of the pseudo fluctuation period of 1 to 3 times is 2 seconds, the length of the pseudo fluctuation period of 4 to 6 times is 1.5 seconds, and the length of the pseudo fluctuation period of 7 to 9 times is 1 second, the length of the 10th to 12th pseudo fluctuation periods may be 0.5 seconds, and the length of the 13th to 18th pseudo fluctuation periods may be 0.2 seconds. That is, in the special pseudo-continuous zone, the length of one pseudo-fluctuation period is changed with a plurality of (for example, two or three) pseudo-fluctuations as a trigger, and as the number of pseudo-fluctuations increases, one pseudo-fluctuation The length of the period may be shortened. In addition, the length of the pseudo fluctuation period may be changed according to the number of times of pseudo fluctuation even in the normal pseudo run. In normal pseudo-runs, the length of the period of one pseudo-variation may be lengthened as the number of pseudo-variations increases. Further, in the normal pseudo-run, the length of one pseudo-fluctuation period may be changed each time the pseudo-fluctuation is executed, instead of being triggered by a plurality of pseudo-fluctuations.

In the special pseudo-run zone, the left, middle and right symbols of the decorative symbols 506 composed of three symbol rows may change to the temporary stop state at the same timing. On the other hand, in the normal pseudo-run, the decorative symbols composed of three symbol rows are temporarily stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and the timing at which each of the three symbol rows changes to the temporarily stopped state. may differ. In the special pseudo-continuous zone, when the decoration symbols are temporarily stopped, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be temporarily stopped in this order. may differ. Further, in the normal pseudo-run, the three symbol rows may change to the temporary stop state at the same timing. In addition, in the special pseudo-run zone, the timings at which the three symbol rows change to the temporary stop state may be the same or different from each other depending on the number of pseudo fluctuations. For example, in a pseudo-variation in which the symbol variation period of one time is a predetermined value or more (for example, 1 second or more), when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are temporarily stopped in this order. , In the pseudo-variation in which the one-time symbol variation period is less than a predetermined value (for example, less than 1 second), the left symbol, the middle symbol and the right symbol change to the temporary stop state at the same time when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. may That is, in the special pseudo-run zone, during the first period of one symbol fluctuation period, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol change to the temporary stop state at different timings when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In the second period after the first period in the symbol fluctuation period of one cycle, the timings at which the left design, the middle design and the right design change to the temporary stop state when the decorative design is temporarily stopped may be the same.

The special pseudo-continuous zone may be configured to output dedicated background music (BGM). The background music output in the special pseudo-run zone may be started to be reproduced when the special pseudo-run zone is started, and may be continuously output without interruption over a plurality of consecutive symbol changes in the special pseudo-run zone. For example, when the next variation starts after the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped in the special pseudo-continuous zone and the pseudo-continuous variation effect is executed, the same background music is output from when the decorative symbols are fixed to when the next variation starts, In addition, the output of the same background music is continued even in the pseudo-continuous variation presentation after the start of the next variation. In the special pseudo-continuous zone, the background music may be switched when the development effect is executed after the button effect is executed with the decoration symbol in the ready-to-win mode. For example, the first background music for the special pseudo-continuous zone is played until the button effect is executed, and when the button effect ends or the development effect starts, the reproduction of the first background music is interrupted and the first background music is played. Playback of a second background music different from that may be started. Note that the first background music may be continuously reproduced even when the development effect is executed in the special pseudo-continuous zone. On the other hand, when the normal pseudo-continuation is executed or the special step-up effect is executed in the normal mode, the background music may be switched with the start of the normal pseudo-continue or the special step-up effect as a trigger. In other words, even if the background music output before the start of the normal pseudo-continuation or the special step-up effect is interrupted by the start of the normal pseudo-continuation or the special step-up effect, and the output of another background music is started, good.

In a special pseudo-run zone, it may be possible to suggest that some event is certain to occur in the pseudo-fluctuation before the final pseudo-fluctuation, such as the 6th, 12th or 18th. For example, in the special pseudo-run zone, the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbols is "d) same color as green", which may suggest that the reach will be determined in the final pseudo-variation. It may be suggested that a big hit will be confirmed, or that a probability variable big win will be confirmed, by the symbol combination at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbols in the special pseudo-continuous zone is "e) Same color as red". Alternatively, it may be suggested that a jackpot (for example, a 10R jackpot) with a relatively large profit given to the player in the special game will be decided. When the display color of the band image becomes green in the special pseudo-continuous zone, it may be suggested that the reach is determined in the final pseudo-fluctuation. When the display color of the band image becomes red in the special pseudo-run zone, it may be suggested that a development effect will be executed after reaching the ready-to-win in the final pseudo-variation, or that a big win will be confirmed. In addition, in the special pseudo-continuous zone, even after it is suggested that some event will occur in the pseudo-fluctuation before the final pseudo-fluctuation, the subsequent pseudo-fluctuation may continue. . On the other hand, in the normal pseudo run, it may be possible to indicate that some event will occur by executing the last pseudo change. For example, when four pseudo-variations can be executed in a normal pseudo-run, a special symbol of "Continue" is displayed at the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or the fourth re-variation is started. It may be determined that the fourth pseudo-fluctuation results in a reach or a big hit. In this case, since the fourth pseudo-fluctuation suggesting reach or big hit confirmation is the final round, the pseudo-continuation is usually configured so that the decorative pattern does not temporarily stop and fluctuate again after the definite suggestion is made. good too.

In the special pseudo-continuous zone, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with the symbol combination that indicates the highest degree of expectation among the types of symbol combinations of the decorative symbols at the time of temporary stop (e.g., "e) red same color"). However, after the temporary stop, the decorative symbols may change again and the pseudo-change may continue. In the special pseudo-run zone, even after the symbol combination with the highest degree of expectation is achieved in the symbol change pattern, temporary suspension and re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols may be executed to continue the pseudo-variation. In the special pseudo-continuous zone, even if a display different from the decorative pattern (for example, a band image) is displayed in a display mode (for example, red) that suggests that the degree of expectation is the highest, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop After stopping, the decorative pattern may change again and the pseudo-change may continue. In the special pseudo-continuous zone, even after the display color of the band image in the band color change pattern has become the most expected display color, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and changed again, and the pseudo-change is continued. good too.

In the special pseudo-run zone, the decorative symbol may become the ready-to-win with the same symbol color as the symbol color of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the pseudo-fluctuation just before the decorative symbol becomes the ready-to-win. In the special pseudo-run zone, the symbol color with a higher degree of expectation than the symbol color of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the pseudo-fluctuation immediately before the decorative symbol becomes the ready-to-win may be the ready-to-win. Therefore, in the special pseudo-continuous zone, the symbol color of the decorative symbol temporarily stopped in the pseudo change immediately before the decorative symbol becomes the ready-to-win zone may be the symbol color that suggests the degree of expectation higher than the expectation indicated by the symbol color of the decorative symbol. .

In one embodiment, in one symbol variation from the start of the variation of the special symbols to the stop display, the decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device are temporarily stopped and then re-varied to simulate a plurality of times. It may be possible to execute a pseudo-continuous variation effect that makes it appear as if the symbol variation has been executed. A first pseudo-continuous-variation effect, in which a temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative pattern are executed N-1 times (N is an integer equal to or greater than 2) as pseudo-continuous-variation effect to make it appear as if N-times pattern changes have been executed. , a second pseudo-continuous variation effect that makes it appear as if N×M symbol variations have been executed by executing temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbols N×M−1 times (M is an integer equal to or greater than 2); may be executable.

In the pseudo-continuous variation production of an embodiment, the degree of expectation can be suggested by the pattern display mode (for example, pattern combination) at the time of temporary stop of the decorative patterns, and the expectation is given by the specific display mode (for example, band image) of the display different from the decorative patterns. degree can be suggested. As the symbol display mode, there may be a first symbol display mode and a second symbol display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first symbol display mode. As the specific display mode, there may be a first specific display mode and a second specific display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the first specific display mode. In the case where the decorative design is first temporarily stopped in the first design display mode after the first specific display mode is displayed, a) the decorative design changes again after the first temporary stop, and the decorative design is displayed after the first specific display mode is displayed. may be temporarily stopped in the first symbol display mode. b) The decorative symbols may change again after the first temporary stop, and the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in the second symbol display mode after the first specific display mode is displayed. c) The decorative symbols may change again after the first temporary stop, and the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in the first symbol display mode after the second specific display mode is displayed. d) The decorative symbols may change again after the first temporary stop, and the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped in the second symbol display mode after the second specific display mode is displayed. As the pattern display mode that can suggest the degree of expectation, a display mode in which the numbers of the symbols are in a specific combination may be used, or a display mode in which the symbol colors are in a specific combination may be used. As the specific display mode that can suggest the degree of expectation, a display mode in which a display different from the decorative pattern has a specific display color may be used, or a display different from the decorative pattern is displayed with a specific action. Display modes may be used.

As a pseudo-continuous variation performance of an embodiment, a first pseudo-continuous variation performance (for example, normal pseudo-continuous) and a second pseudo-continuous variation performance in which the number of times of temporary stop and re-variation of decorative symbols tends to increase more than the first pseudo-continuous variation performance There may be a continuous variable effect (for example, a special pseudo-continuous zone). Compared to the second pseudo continuous variation performance, the first pseudo continuous variation performance has a display mode at the time of the first temporary stop of the decorative symbols and a display mode at the time of the second temporary stop following the first temporary stop of the decorative symbols. may be different. Compared to the second pseudo continuous variation performance, the first pseudo continuous variation performance corresponds to the display mode of the notice performance that can be executed in response to the first temporary stop of the decorative symbols and to the second temporary stop of the decorative symbols. The display mode may be easily different from the display mode of the executable advance notice effect.

In one embodiment, the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped in the first pseudo-continuous variation performance (eg, normal pseudo-running) are a first portion (eg, number portion) indicating the type of symbol and a second portion attached to the first portion. (for example, a character part) may have a display mode. The decorative symbols temporarily stopped in the second pseudo-continuous variable effect (for example, special pseudo-continuous zone) may have a display form (for example, a display form of only a number part) consisting of a portion indicating the symbol type.

In one embodiment, when the first pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, normal pseudo-continuation) is executed, the background music that was output before the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation effect is changed to the start of the first pseudo-continuous change effect. It may be interrupted accordingly. When the second pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, special pseudo-continuous zone) is executed, the background music that was output before the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation effect is continued after the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation effect. good too.

In an embodiment, it may be possible to execute a chance-up effect suggesting that the degree of expectation increases in response to the temporary stop or re-variation of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous-variation effect. When the chance-up effect is executed in the first pseudo-continuous change effect (for example, normal pseudo-continuous effect), the decorative symbols may not temporarily stop and change again after the chance-up effect is executed. On the other hand, when the chance-up effect is executed in the second pseudo-continuous change effect (for example, special pseudo-continuous zone), the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and changed again after the chance-up effect is executed.

In the pseudo-continuous variation effect of a certain embodiment, it may be possible to execute the first notice effect in response to the temporary stop of the decorative symbols. It may be possible to execute the second notice effect corresponding to the stop display of the decorative symbols in the plurality of symbol variations of the special symbols. When the first notice performance is executed three times corresponding to the three consecutive temporary stops of the decoration pattern in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation performance, there is a possibility that the modes of the three first notice performances are different from each other. Also, when the second foretelling effect is executed in response to the three consecutive stop displays of the decorative pattern, the possibility that the modes of the three times of the second foretelling effect are different from each other may be higher. . The first notice effect may be a notice effect suggesting the degree of expectation by a symbol combination at the time when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The second advance notice effect may be a notice effect (for example, a chance effect) suggesting the degree of expectation by a combination of symbols in a disengaged state when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

As a pseudo-continuous variation effect of one embodiment, a first pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, normal pseudo-continuation) in which the upper limit number of times of temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative pattern is the first number (for example, 4 times), and a decorative pattern There may also be a second pseudo-continuous variation effect (for example, a special pseudo-continuous zone) in which the upper limit number of temporary stops and re-fluctuations is a second number (for example, six times) greater than the first number. When the first pseudo-continuous variation performance is executed, it is determined that the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit on the condition that the temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern in the first pseudo-continuous variation performance become the first number of times. may be suggested. When the second pseudo-continuous variation performance is executed, it is determined that the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit before the number of temporary stops and re-fluctuations of decorative symbols in the second pseudo-continuous variation performance reaches the second number. can be suggested, and the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbols can be continued even after that.

1) In an embodiment, when it is determined in advance that it is a big hit variation by a look-ahead, it is possible to execute a variation performance with temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbols in the big win variation or the variation before the big win variation. good too. In the big win variation, regardless of whether or not the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-varied in the symbol variation immediately before the big win variation, the variation performance accompanying the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbols can be executed in the big win variation. may As a variable effect involving temporary stop and re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern, a pseudo-continuous variable effect may be executed, or a resurrection effect in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a detached state and then re-varied is executed. It may be possible.

2) In an embodiment, a first effect (for example, a low-expectation effect) and a second effect (for example, a high-expectation effect) can be executed, and the pattern in which the first effect is executed and the second effect are different. A pattern to be executed and a pattern to execute the second effect after the execution of the first effect may be executable. A plurality of types of first effects can be executed, and depending on the type of the first effect, the degree of expectation for subsequent execution of the second effect may differ. For example, the degree of expectation that the second effect is executed after the first effect of the second type is executed may be higher than the degree of expectation that the second effect is executed after the first effect of the first type is executed. . In addition, a plurality of types of first effects and a plurality of types of second effects can be executed, and depending on the type of the first effects, the degree of expectation for the second effects when the second effects are executed after that is high. may differ. For example, after the execution of the first production of the first type, the second production of the type of the high expectation is executed rather than the second production of the type of the high expectation after the execution of the first production of the second type. The degree of expectation that the production will be executed may be higher. Further, in a pattern in which the second effect is executed after the execution of the first effect, the second effect may be executed at a plurality of timings within the symbol variation period, and the second effect may be executed according to the execution timing of the second effect. The expectations of the two effects may be different. For example, the longer the time value from the start of fluctuation to the execution timing of the second effect,

3) In an embodiment, it may be possible to execute the pseudo-continuous variation effect after the decorative symbols are in the ready-to-win mode. In this case, depending on the effect mode at the time of ready-to-win, the degree of expectation that the decorative symbols will temporarily stop and fluctuate again and the pseudo-variation will continue after the ready-to-win may differ.

4) In a certain embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous variation effect is executed, during the pseudo-fluctuation after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-flushed, the notice effect is executed once, and the notice effect is executed a plurality of times. There may be cases where During the pseudo fluctuation in this case, multiple types of advance notice effects may be executed, or the same type of advance notice effects may be executed multiple times. When a certain type of advance notice effect is executed multiple times during the pseudo-variation, a certain type of first notice effect is suggested after the execution of the certain type of first notice effect, and an expectation level lower than the expectation level suggested by the first notice effect is suggested. 2 Execution of the advance notice effect may be disabled. In other words, after execution of a certain kind of first notice effect, it may be possible to execute a certain kind of second notice effect suggesting an expectation higher than the expectation level suggested by the first notice effect. The level of expectation for a certain type of second notice effect may be the same as the level of expectation for a certain type of first notice effect, or may be higher than the level of expectation for a certain type of first notice effect. It can be expensive.

5) In some embodiments, the decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped and changed again after execution of the specific effect. The specific effect is to change the variation speed of the decorative pattern to a low speed so that the temporary stop of the decorative pattern is suggested, and then change the variation speed of the decorative pattern to a high speed without temporarily stopping the decorative pattern. ' may be In the slip effect, after slowing down the variation speed of the decorative symbols toward the display position where the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, by increasing the variation speed of the decorative symbols at the display position where the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. , the decorative pattern does not stop at the display position where the decorative pattern should be temporarily stopped, but is displayed as if it is slipping. When a specific effect (for example, a slip effect) is executed, the decorative pattern temporarily stops and changes again after the specific effect is executed, and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped after the specific effect is executed and does not change again. There may be There may be a case where the decorative symbols temporarily stop and change again without executing the specific effect (for example, the slip effect). In this case, the degree of expectation that the decorative symbols will change again after execution of the specific effect may be higher than the degree of expectation that the decorative symbols will change again without executing the specific effect. There may be a case where the specific effect (for example, slip effect) is executed after the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and a case where the specific effect is executed before the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode. In this case, the degree of expectation that the decorative pattern will change again after the specific effect is executed after the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode is the degree of expectation that the decorative pattern will change again after the specific effect is executed before the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-reach mode. may be higher than expected. A predetermined effect different from the specific effect may be executable after the re-variation of the decorative symbols.

6) In an embodiment, the selection process of the variation pattern that determines the variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) may be common. For example, a common variation pattern selection criterion for selecting a variation pattern (for example, a common lottery table) is provided, and a common variation pattern selection criterion in the selection of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 and the selection of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 may be used. The data regarding the variation pattern of the selected special figure 1 or special figure 2 may be stored in the same area of the main RAM 291 of the main substrate 200 . For example, the area of the main RAM 291 storing the data defining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be common. A command (for example, a variation start command) indicating whether it is special figure 1 or special figure 2 at the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 or special figure 2 may be transmitted. As the variation pattern, there may be a variation pattern corresponding to the time value of the re-variation production pattern in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-varied. Moreover, the jackpot processing of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may also be common.

7) In an embodiment, it may be possible to execute a re-variation suggesting effect that suggests whether or not the decorative pattern will change again after execution of the ready-to-win effect that can be executed in the state where the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-win mode. There is a pattern in which the development effect is executed after re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern after execution of the re-variation suggestion effect, and a pattern in which the development effect is executed without re-varying the decorative pattern after the execution of the re-variation suggestion effect. good too.

8) In an embodiment, a first pattern develops into a specific effect after the decorative pattern temporarily stops in the out-of-reach mode, and a second pattern develops into the specific effect without temporarily stopping in the out-of-reach mode. There may be The specific effect may be a high-expectation SP reach (strong reach) effect such as a battle reach effect or a strongest ritual reach effect. The second pattern may be executed when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbols in one symbol variation period is equal to or greater than the first number. When the number of re-variation of the decorative pattern in one symbol variation period is a second number smaller than the first number, the expectation that the second pattern will be executed is lower than when the number of re-variation is equal to or greater than the first number. may

9) In an embodiment, the first effect (for example, the challenge effect that can be executed only in the probability change state) may be executable during the symbol variation period in which the decorative symbols do not change again. A second effect different from the first effect (for example, a step-up notice effect that can be executed only in the normal probability state) may be executable during the symbol change period in which the decorative symbols change again. During the symbol variation period during which the first rendering is executed and the symbol variation period during which the second rendering is executed, a third rendering different from the first rendering and the second rendering (for example, operation rendering such as intense heat button rendering) is executed. It may be possible. The third effect may be executable after the execution of the first effect and the second effect within the symbol variation period.

10) In some embodiments, it may be possible to output a "one-shot notification sound" that notifies the player of winning by outputting a one-shot sound effect. The occurrence probability of the one-shot announcement sound may differ according to the type of the look-ahead effect executed before the timing at which the one-shot announcement sound can be output. For example, when the first look-ahead effect and the second look-ahead effect with a higher degree of expectation than the first look-ahead effect are executable, the second The probability that the one-shot announcement sound is generated after execution of the look-ahead effect may be higher.

11) In a certain embodiment, it may be possible to execute a number-of-times corresponding effect according to the number of re-changes of the decorative symbols. For example, under a situation where the number of re-variations of the decorative symbols is the first number, the first number-of-times production corresponding to the first number of times may be executable. Further, under a situation where the number of times of re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols is the second number, the second number of effects corresponding to the second number of times may be executable. Under the condition that the number of variations of the decorative pattern is the first number, the second number of effects may not be executed, and under the condition that the number of variations of the decorative pattern is the second number, the first number of effects cannot be executed. may After a predetermined timing in a situation where the re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern is the final time (for example, after the start of the development effect after the establishment of the ready-to-win), the effect corresponding to the number of times (for example, the first number of times effect and the second number of times effect) is executed. It may not be possible.

12) In a certain embodiment, there may be a plurality of types of re-fluctuation effect patterns with different re-fluctuation timings of decorative symbols. The probability that the re-variation timing of the decorative pattern will be the specific timing when the win/loss result is a big hit may be higher than the probability that the re-variation timing of the decorative pattern will be the specific timing when the win/fail result is a loss. When there is a first big win and a second big win in which a profit obtainable in a special game executed after the first big win is larger than that of the first big win, when the first big win is achieved, the re-variation timing of the decorative pattern is specified timing. In the case of the second jackpot, the probability that the timing of re-fluctuation of the decorative symbol will be the specific timing may be higher than the probability that the second jackpot is achieved. It may have a plurality of types of performance modes that determine the performance tendencies over a plurality of symbol fluctuation periods, and the selection tendencies of the re-variation performance patterns of the decorative symbols may differ according to the types of the performance modes. For example, the possibility that the re-fluctuation timing of the decorative symbols will be the predetermined timing may differ depending on the type of production mode.

13) In an embodiment, there may be a first notice effect, a second notice effect, and a third notice effect as the notice effects that can be executed after the decorative symbols are changed again. The first notice effect suggests the denial that the decorative pattern will change again after the execution of the first notice effect, that is, the notice effect that suggests that the decorative pattern does not change again after the execution of the first notice effect (for example , the next announcement effect) may be used. The second notice effect does not deny that the decorative pattern further changes after the execution of the second notice effect, that is, the notice effect suggests that the decorative pattern may change again after the execution of the second notice effect. (For example, it may be a step-up notice effect). The third notice effect suggests that the decorative pattern changes again after the execution of the third notice effect, that is, the notice effect that suggests that the re-change of the decorative pattern is confirmed after the third notice effect is executed (for example, Continuous pattern display) may be. There are a pattern in which the development effect is executed after the decorative pattern changes to the ready-to-reach mode after the re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern, and a pattern in which the development effect is executed without the decorative pattern to the ready-to-reach mode after the decorative pattern changes again. good too.

14) In a certain embodiment, there are a first pattern (normal pattern) and a second pattern (extreme heat pattern) that suggests a higher degree of expectation than the first pattern as effects that can be executed after the re-variation of the decorative symbols. may The re-fluctuation of the decorative design can be executed a plurality of times within one design-fluctuation period, and depending on the number of re-fluctuations of the decorative design within one design-fluctuation period, the number of times during the re-fluctuation of the decorative design is The execution of the two patterns may differ.

15) In some embodiments, it may be possible to execute step-up announcement effects in multiple stages. For example, after the first step step-up notice, the second step step-up notice may be executed, and after the second step step-up notice, the third step step-up notice may be executed. Re-variation of the decorative pattern can be executed during the execution of the step-up notice effect, and after the re-change of the decorative pattern, the step-up notice of the first stage is executed regardless of the number of stages of the step-up notice effect during execution. may be The performance process of the step-up notice executed within the symbol variation period is determined when the variation of the decorative symbols is started, and may not be determined when the re-variation of the decorative symbols is started. The step-up notice A executed during the A-th re-variation of the decorative symbols may be different from the step-up notice B executed during the B-th re-variation of the decorative symbols. Step-up notice A and step-up notice B may be step-up notices having at least one common (same) number of stages, display mode, and type of effect. When the step-up notice A executed during the A-th re-variation of the decorative pattern and the step-up notice B executed during the B-th re-change of the decorative pattern are different, the jackpot expectation is the step-up notice A and the step. It may be higher than the big hit expectation degree when the up notice B is the same. After the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the normal pattern, a display element having a display form different from the normal pattern may be displayed, and the display element may be changed and displayed as a temporarily stopped pattern (special pattern) of the decorative pattern. good. There are a first jackpot (for example, 10R jackpot, probability variable jackpot) and a second jackpot (for example, 3R jackpot, normal jackpot) with a lower profit given to the player than the first jackpot, depending on the number of times of re-variation of decorative symbols. The degree of expectation to become the first jackpot may be different.

16) In an embodiment, it may be possible to execute a re-change suggesting effect that suggests whether or not the decorative pattern will change again. The re-variation suggestion effect may be a frame light-emitting effect in which a decorative lamp (for example, the decorative lamp 111) provided on the frame of the gaming machine emits light. The re-variation suggestion effect may be a specific operation effect that can be executed in response to an input operation to operation input means such as the effect button 109 and the effect lever 112 . There may be a plurality of ready-to-win types in which the symbol types of the decorative symbols to be the ready-to-win mode are different. For example, there may be a first reach type in which the left and right patterns of the decorative pattern are reachable in the first pattern, and a second reach type in which the left and right patterns of the decorative pattern are reachable in the second pattern. The tendency of which reach type to be selected according to the number of times of re-variation of the decorative pattern may be different. For example, the probability of becoming the first ready-to-win type and the probability of becoming the second ready-to-win type may differ according to the number of re-variation of the decorative symbols. There may be a ready-to-win type that is not selected when the number of times of re-variation of decorative symbols reaches a predetermined number. The number of ready-to-reach types that can be selected when the number of re-variations of the decorative pattern is a predetermined number is greater than the number of selectable reach-types when the number of times to re-change the decorative pattern exceeds the predetermined number. good too.

17) In an embodiment, even if a pseudo-variation effect is executed in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and re-varied, the specific effect may be executed only once within one symbol change period. The specific effect may be a one-shot announcement effect for notifying that a big hit will be achieved.

18) In an embodiment, the decorative symbols may be determined and stopped without executing the re-variation of the decorative symbols after the execution of the re-variation suggesting effect. When the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped without re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern after execution of the re-variation suggesting effect, a pending change effect of changing the display mode of the reserved object suggesting the expectation level of the withheld lottery value is executed. may

19) In a certain embodiment, there is a re-fluctuation effect pattern in which the effect process of re-varying the decorative design is determined, and it may be possible to pre-determine whether it is a re-varying effect pattern by looking ahead. Based on the preliminary determination result of the re-variation effect pattern, it may be possible to execute a look-ahead suggestive effect suggesting a re-variation in the variation prior to the variation in which the re-variation effect pattern is selected. When a specific development effect (for example, SP ready-to-win effect) is executed after the re-variation of the decorative pattern, the type of notice effect displayed during the pattern change may differ according to the number of re-variation of the decorative pattern. However, the degree of expectation that a certain kind of advance notice effect will occur in the middle of the symbol variation may be different.

20) In an embodiment, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, all of the plurality of decorative symbol rows may be simultaneously changed from the variable state to the temporarily stopped state. When the decorative symbols are changed again after being temporarily stopped, all of the plurality of symbol rows may be simultaneously changed from the temporarily stopped state to the variable state. When the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped after being re-varied, not all of the plurality of decorative symbol rows need to change from the variable state to the temporarily stopped state at the same time. For example, each of the plurality of symbol rows may change from the variable state to the temporary stop state at different timings.
In one embodiment, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, all of the plurality of decorative symbol rows do not have to change from the variable state to the temporarily stopped state at the same time. When the decorative symbols are changed again after being temporarily stopped, not all of the plurality of symbol rows need to change from the temporarily stopped state to the variable state at the same time. When the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped after being re-varied, all of the plurality of decorative symbol rows may be simultaneously changed from the variable state to the temporarily stopped state.
In one embodiment, when the decorative symbols are changed again, the plurality of symbol rows are displaced in the direction opposite to the normal variation direction (eg, downward direction) (eg, upward direction), and then the plurality of symbol rows are displaced in the normal variation direction (eg, upward direction). For example, it may be displaced in the downward direction), and may be changed at high speed in the normal variation direction (eg, downward direction).
In one embodiment, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped after the final re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols and then fixed and stopped, after part of the plurality of symbol rows are changed from the variable state to the temporary stopped state, the remaining symbol rows are changed. The variable state may be changed to the temporary stop state. For example, when the decorative symbols are composed of three rows of left, middle and right symbols, the middle symbols may be changed to the temporarily stopped state after the left and right symbols are changed to the temporarily stopped state. At this time, the left and right patterns may be changed from the variable state to the temporary stop state at the same time, or the left and right patterns may be changed from the variable state to the temporary stop state at different timings (for example, in the order of the left pattern and the right pattern). good.

21) In an embodiment, a sound effect may be output when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and the sound effect when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped may be varied according to the number of re-fluctuations of the decorative symbols. As the number of re-fluctuations of the decorative symbols increases, the output time of the sound effects at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbols may be increased, or the volume of the sound effects may be increased. For example, when temporarily stopping the decorative design after the second number of re-changes of the decorative design, which is larger than the first number of times, than the sound effect output when temporarily stopping the decorative design after the first re-change of the decorative design The sound effect output to may have a longer output time and/or a louder volume. In addition, a decoration lamp performance for lighting a decoration lamp (a frame lamp) may be executed when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped, and the execution mode of the decoration lamp performance may be changed according to the number of times of re-variation of the decoration pattern. As the number of times of re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern increases, the execution period of the decorative lamp effect at the time of temporary stop of the decorative pattern may be lengthened, the luminance of the decorative lamp may be increased, or the decorative lamp may be lit in the decorative lamp effect. The lighting colors of the decorative lamps may be made different, and the lighting patterns (blinking patterns, etc.) of the decorative lamps may be made different.

22) In a certain embodiment, a condition presenting performance presenting a condition for the decorative symbols to change again may be executed. There may be a plurality of conditions to be satisfied for the decorative pattern to change again. The degree of expectation that the condition presented in the condition presentation effect is achieved may differ according to the execution mode of the advance notice effect during the symbol variation period in which the condition presentation effect is executed. The degree of expectation that the condition presented in the condition presentation effect is achieved may differ according to the execution mode of the look-ahead effect executed in the variation prior to the variation in which the condition presentation effect is executed. It may be possible to execute a condition achievement effect for notifying the success or failure of the conditions presented in the condition presentation effect. The condition achievement effect may be a specific operation effect that can be executed with an input operation to operation input means such as the effect button 109 and the effect lever 112 as a trigger. In addition, it may be possible to execute a re-variation suggestion advance notice for pre-suggesting that the decorative pattern will change again. There may be a plurality of re-fluctuation suggestion notices. The degree of expectation for the re-variation of the decorative symbols after the occurrence of the re-variation suggestion advance notice may differ according to the manner of execution of the notice performance during the symbol fluctuation period in which the re-change suggestion advance notice occurs. The degree of expectation for the re-variation of the decorative pattern after the occurrence of the re-variation suggestion notice may differ according to the execution mode of the look-ahead effect executed in the variation before the re-variation suggestion notice is executed. The condition presentation effect may not be executed in a specific effect mode. In a specific production mode, the re-variation suggestion notice does not have to occur. The condition presentation effect may not be executed during the symbol variation period in which the specific advance notice effect occurs. In the symbol fluctuation period in which a specific advance notice effect occurs, the re-change suggestion notice may not occur.

23) In an embodiment, a special effect suggesting that a specific effect is to be executed may be executed in response to the re-variation of the decorative symbols. The special effect may be display of re-variation exclusive symbols or development symbols. The specific effect may be executed after changing the display mode of the special effect. For example, the specific effect may be executed after changing the display mode of the re-variation dedicated symbol or the display mode of the development symbol. In the symbol variation period during which the special performance is executed, the same kind of special performance (for example, the display of the developed pattern) may not be executed after the execution of a certain kind of special performance (for example, the display of the developed pattern).

24) In an embodiment, the execution of the change notice suggesting the re-change of the decorative pattern may be restricted (execution disabled) until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be, for example, that an input operation is performed in an operation presentation for commanding an input operation to the operation input means, or that the button effective period has elapsed. Further, execution of the pre-reading notice suggesting re-variation of the decorative pattern may be restricted (execution disabled) until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

25) In an embodiment, it is in a normal entry state (low entry state or low base state), and is acquired with the entry into the first start port corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the situation where the lottery value is reserved, if there is a ball entering the second start port corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2), the special figure 2 will be displayed in the next variation, and the special figure During the variable display of 2, the decorative pattern may change again. In this case, the probability that the decorative pattern will change again during the variable display of the special figure 2 when the special figure 2 becomes a big hit is It may be higher than the probability of change. The number of candidates for the variation pattern of the special figure 1 that can be selected in the normal entering state may be larger than the number of candidates for the variation pattern of the special figure 2 that can be selected in the normal entering state.

26) In an embodiment, the effect sound (sound) output when the decorative symbols temporarily stop before changing again may be different from the effect sound output when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped. It may be different from the production sound output when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the normal fluctuation production in which the pattern is not changed again. Based on the look-ahead of the pending lottery value, the effect sound output when the decorative design is decided and stopped at the chance eye in the design variation before the design variation corresponding to the look-ahead lottery value is normal variation In the production, the decorative pattern may be different from the production sound output when the decorative symbols are decided and stopped in a pattern combination different from the chance eye. The effect sound (sound) that is output when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped before changing again may be different from the effect sound that is output when the decorative symbols are fixed and stopped at the chance eye.

27) In an embodiment, it is possible to temporarily stop display of the decorative symbols superimposed in front of the display of the predetermined effect, and the display of the predetermined effect is continuously changed even during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols. A predetermined effect may be progressed by pressing the button. For example, the display mode of the predetermined effect may change during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbols, or the display mode of the predetermined effect may be switched.

28) In an embodiment, even if the number of re-variation of the decorative symbols is the same, the variation time from the start of the variation of the decorative symbols to the fixed stop may be different. Even when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbols is large, the variation time from the start of variation of the decorative symbols to the final stop may be shorter than when the number of re-variations of the decorative symbols is small. For example, there are a first pseudo-continuous variation effect in which the number of re-fluctuations of the decorative symbols is the first number, and a second pseudo-continuous variation effect in which the number of re-fluctuations of the decorative symbols is a second number smaller than the first number, The variation time from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the fixed stop when the first pseudo continuous variation effect is executed is the variation time from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the fixed stop when the second pseudo continuous variation effect is performed. It may be shorter.

29) In some embodiments, it may be possible to execute a button operation effect while the decorative symbols are being changed again. The specific operation effect that can be executed upon termination of the button operation effect may be configured so as not to fall behind after the re-variation. For example, it is possible to execute the first specific operation effect triggered by the button operation effect before the re-variation of the decorative pattern, and it is possible to execute the second specific operation effect triggered by the button operation effect after the re-variation of the decorative pattern. In this case, the degree of expectation for the second specific operation effect may be configured to be greater than or equal to the degree of expectation for the first specific operation effect. When the number of re-fluctuations of the decorative symbols is large, the frequency of occurrence of the button operation presentation during the period until the left and right patterns of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped may be low. For example, the frequency of occurrence of the button operation effect during the period from when the decorative pattern changes the first number of times until the left and right patterns of the decorative pattern temporarily stop is the second number of times, which is less than the first number of decorative patterns. It may be lower than the frequency of occurrence of the button operation effect during the period from the re-fluctuation to the temporary stop of the left and right decorative symbols. The button operation effect may be a single button effect in which one button operation is commanded within the effective period of the button operation. The button operation effect may be a repeated button effect in which a plurality of button operations are commanded within the valid period of the button operation. The timing at which the button image for the button operation effect is displayed during the re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols may be the first half of the period from the start of the re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols to the temporary stop timing of the left and right symbols. The number of times the button image for the button operation effect is displayed during the re-variation of the decorative pattern may be relatively small, for example, may be one or less. On the other hand, the number of times the button image for the button operation effect is displayed after the timing when the left and right symbols of the decorative symbols temporarily stop after the final re-variation of the decorative symbols may be relatively large. If the button operation effect occurs multiple times after the timing when the left and right patterns of the decorative pattern temporarily stop after the last re-fluctuation of the decorative pattern, the period from when the left and right patterns of the decorative pattern temporarily stop until the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped A button operation effect may occur in the latter half of the period.

30) In an embodiment, when the decorative pattern is changed again after the execution of the notice effect A, the notice effect B having a higher expectation than the notice effect A may be executed after the decorative pattern is changed again. Execution of the advance notice effect B may be restricted (execution disabled) until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition may be, for example, that an input operation is performed in an operation presentation for commanding an input operation to the operation input means, or that the button effective period has elapsed.

31) In an embodiment, the pattern at the time of temporary stop of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous variation effect in which the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbols are performed may differ according to the effect mode. For example, in the first effect mode, a normal symbol used as a symbol combination when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped may be used as the symbol when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In the second effect mode, a dedicated symbol that is not used as a symbol combination when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped may be used as the symbol when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The dedicated symbol may be a pseudo-continuous dedicated symbol that is used only at the time of temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous variation effect.

32) In some embodiments, it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the decorative symbols are being changed again. There may be a plurality of types of suggestion effects. The suggestive effect may be executed using a special symbol when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. The suggestion effect may be executed triggered by an input operation to the operation input means. The suggestive effect may be executed after the operation effect of instructing the input operation to the operation input means is completed, or may be executed upon expiration of the button effective period. The suggestive effect may be executed other than during the final re-variation of the decorative symbols, or may be executed during the re-variation before the final re-variation of the decorative symbols. The suggestive effect may be executed after the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode.

33) In an embodiment, one pseudo-variation time from re-variation of decorative symbols to temporary stop may become shorter as the number of times of re-variation of decorative symbols increases. That is, the interval from re-variation of the decorative design to the next re-variation may be shortened as the number of re-variation of the decorative design increases.

The present invention has been described above based on the examples. It should be understood by those skilled in the art that this embodiment is merely an example, and that various modifications can be made to combinations of each component and each treatment process, and that such modifications are within the scope of the present invention. be. Modified examples are given below.

At least one of the above-mentioned "1. Pre-suggestive effect", "2. Fixed expectation level effect" and "3. It can also be applied to slot machines and gaming machines installed in game centers and the like.

11... First starting port 12... Second starting port 60... Effect display device 80... Game board 81... Game area 210... Lottery means 220... Winner determination means 230... Fluctuation pattern determination means 260... Special game control means, 303... Effect determination means, 304... Effect control means.

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
and a production control means for controlling production,
A first effect process in which a specific effect is executed after execution of a special effect and a second effect process in which the specific effect is executed without executing the special effect are performed as effect processes that can be executed during the progress of the game. can be,
In the first production process, a first advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation of winning can be executed, and in the second production process, a second advance notice effect suggesting a degree of expectation of success can be executed,
The degree of expectation of winning after execution of the second effect process in which the second notice effect is executed is higher than the degree of expectation of win after execution of the first effect process in which the first notice effect is not executed, Lower than the expected degree of winning after execution of the first effect process in which the first notice effect is executed,
The second notice effect can be executed at any one of a plurality of timings before execution of the specific effect in the second effect process,
The first notice effect is a effect that definitely notifies the winning,
A first pattern for notifying a win at a first timing after the start of the specific effect, and a second pattern for notifying the win at a second timing after the first timing after the start of the specific effect. can be,
The first pattern has a higher selection probability than the second pattern,
The first notice effect can also be executed in the second effect process, and the degree of expectation of winning after the execution of the second effect process in which the first notice effect and the second notice effect are executed is A game machine having the same degree of expectation as winning after execution of the first performance process in which the first notice performance is executed .

Images